JP2023162488A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for increasing a performance effect in connection with a title display of a ready-to-win performance.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120 can execute a super-ready-to-win performance after a decorative pattern displayed on an image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-win mode. The super-ready-to-win performance is configured while including a title display part for displaying corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until a performance result is reported. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-win mode before the title display part in a super-ready-to-win performance, and title characters corresponding to the super-ready-to-win performance are displayed so as to use a display position of a decorative pattern resulting in a ready-to-win mode in the title display part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-32

Description

The present invention performs variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Regarding gaming machines.

As a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that displays a title to notify the type of the ready-to-win effect at the start of the ready-to-win effect has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1). Furthermore, as a step-up effect that changes the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in stages, the display screen of the liquid crystal device is likened to glass, and cracks (glass plate as a sign of cracking) are displayed on the display screen. There is a device that can perform an effect of displaying a plurality of fragment images as if the display screen had been broken after breaking (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP2019-118411A JP 2020-127593 Publication

However, there was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of claim 1 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The game control means is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium enters the starting region;
Executing variable display of the specific identification information,
Based on the result of the determination, select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns,
when determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command to the production control means;
when determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (FIG. 27, (See FIG. 29(C), FIG. 30, FIG. 32),
After being notified that the specific reach will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled,
displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach;
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the title display part,
In the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the cracked image, the display pattern of the cracked image can draw more attention and improve marketability.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this example. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 131SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern type determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation degree of the reach effect of super reach. It is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in the degree of expectation between reach effects of super reach. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data holding area for game control. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a data holding area for performance control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing an execution rate of a look-ahead notice performance. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination ratio of stopping symbols. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns according to variation patterns. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns according to variation patterns. It is a figure showing the flow of performance during variable display in a normal state. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in time saving state A and variable probability state. It is a figure showing the flow of performance during variable display in time saving state B. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base weak reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base weak reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base strong reach A effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image which shows a bad example of low base strong reach A effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of low base strong reach B effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of the low base strongest reach effect. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strongest reach effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image in the modified example of a title display part. It is a diagram showing the transition of images during execution of high base super reach effects A to D. It is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach effects A to D. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing positions where title characters are displayed in a display area of an image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing performance time of super reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between performance times of super reach performance. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between title characters and decorative patterns of a super reach effect. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of expectation level suggestion display. It is a figure which shows the transition of the image at the time of execution of a selection effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing the number of operations until switching to the next title in the selection performance and the execution rate of the super reach performance when the selection performance is executed. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. It is an explanatory diagram about the execution rate of the performance which can be performed during variable display. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display state of an explanatory text displayed in an explanatory text display effect. It is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. It is a figure which shows the execution status of title color change effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of title characters changes in a title color change effect. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect A. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance B. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance C. It is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance D. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the operation promotion image. It is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect. It is a figure which shows the display situation of the remaining number of times until play time. It is a diagram showing the execution status of play time start effect. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title character of the super reach performance, the explanatory text, the title character of the jackpot start performance, and the operation promotion character. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters, etc. of the super reach performance and the title characters, etc. of the play time start performance. It is a diagram showing the arrangement state of game effect lamps. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a diagram showing a brightness data table used for super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a weak reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the title common chance up red child table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up red. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the title common chance up golden child table. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of title common chance up money. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of weak reach system weak reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a strong reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a strong reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a strong reach common title. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of strong reach system strong reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of a high base reach type common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the child table of a high base reach common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of a high base reach type|system|group common title. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the parent table of high base reach system reach B introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach B introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach C introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach type reach C introduction. It is a figure which shows the setting content of the parent table of high base reach system reach D introduction. It is a figure showing the setting contents of the child table of high base reach system reach D introduction. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the engine which comprises the title display part of low base weak reach A, B effects, and brightness data. It is a front view showing a gaming machine in an example. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state or a variable probability state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a production control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing fluctuation categories. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram of whether or not to execute a hold display performance and the determination ratio of a performance pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the continuous cracking effect in the normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview performance is executed and the production pattern determination ratio in a normal state, and (C) is an explanation of the performance pattern. It is a diagram. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is executed and the production pattern determination ratio of the background change production, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the execution or non-execution of a reach suggestion production and the production pattern determination ratio, (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern determination ratio. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the normal state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the normal state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the performance that can be executed in the time saving state and the variable probability state and the performance pattern of the cracking performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram of the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. It is a figure showing the flow of performance in super reach β. It is a figure showing the flow of performance in super reach β. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of the 1st continuous crack effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation|movement of the 2nd continuous crack effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a dialogue preview performance. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. 7 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of a part of operation example of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation of reach suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of operation of reach suggestion production. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of weak development effect. It is a figure showing the details of a part of operation example of strong development production A. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B. It is a diagram showing details of an example of operation of strong development effect B. It is a figure which shows the detail of the example of cut-in effect|action. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot. It is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance when the variable display result is a jackpot. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating details of an operation example of a result notification effect when the variable display result is a failure. It is an explanatory diagram for comparing details of each performance. It is an explanatory diagram for comparing details of each performance. It is a timing chart showing details of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. It is a timing chart showing details of dialogue preview production. 5 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect A. 7 is a timing chart showing details of background change effect B. FIG. It is a timing chart showing the details of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart showing the details of reach suggestion performance. It is a timing chart showing details of weak development performance. It is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance A. It is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance B. It is a timing chart showing details of cut-in performance. It is a timing chart showing details of result notification performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing speed change of a fragment image in each performance. It is a figure which shows the crack pattern in crack production. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of each crack pattern. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern E. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a crack pattern G with a whiteout image and without a whiteout image. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a pseudo continuous effect, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in background change effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in strong development effect B. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 3 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 4 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 5 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 6 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 7 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 8 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 9 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification 10 of this invention.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is in the reach mode. This system is characterized by displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of the title.
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, the title display can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title display can be suitably performed.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-1,
Decorative identification information is displayed in the reach mode of the first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) displayed in the reach mode (Large)) is displayed in a second size (decorative design (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in the second size. It is characterized by being displayed using the display position of the displayed decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decoration identification information displayed in the first size becomes the second size to attract the attention of the player, and the display position of the decoration identification information in the second size is used to reach a specific reach. By displaying the corresponding title display, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-3 is the gaming machine described in Embodiment 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part of the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach mode is displayed, the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach mode. It is characterized by displaying the corresponding title display (title characters).
According to this feature, at the timing when the decoration identification information that has become the reach mode is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach, the title corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decoration identification information that has become the reach mode. By displaying this, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and a second reach (low base strong reach) that is expected to be controlled to the advantageous state more than the first reach. A to C performances), including
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern on the left side) among the decoration identification information in the reach mode. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decoration identification information in the reach mode, This makes it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) with a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears in a state where it overlaps with the decoration identification information (decoration patterns on both sides) of both sides in the reach mode.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which is expected to be controlled to be more advantageous than the first reach and the second reach, is displayed in a state where it overlaps with the decoration identification information of both reaches in the reach mode. Therefore, the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of Form 1-6 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) ) The title display corresponding to the above appears in a state where it overlaps with one of the decoration identification information (decoration pattern on the left side) or both decoration identification information (decoration pattern on both sides) among the decoration identification information in the reach mode, and then It is characterized in that it is displayed in a fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position, it is displayed in a state that overlaps with a part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has become a ready-to-reach mode.
According to this feature, even after the title display is displayed at a fixed position, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
Displaying second decoration identification information (an even-numbered decorative pattern) in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode and Display the title display (title characters) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. The present invention is characterized in that the title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has become the mode, it is possible to draw attention naturally to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be suitably displayed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
The case where the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a ready-to-win mode and the case where the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) are displayed in a ready-to-win mode are the advantageous state (jackpot game state). ) is characterized by different levels of expectations controlled by
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the degree of expectation for being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information is in the ready-to-reach mode, making it easier to draw attention to the title display. .

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth variation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ), and determine one of the multiple fluctuation patterns including
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The third reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
Displaying second decoration identification information (an even-numbered decorative pattern) in a reach mode before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, the reach mode and Display the title display (title characters) so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the first decorative identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern),
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), and in the title display part, the reach mode is displayed. Displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern),
The first decoration identification information (odd-numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the first decoration in the reach mode is displayed. The title display (title characters) is displayed using the display position of the decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative patterns),
The second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, the second display part in the reach mode is displayed. It is characterized by displaying the title display (title characters) using the display position of the decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative patterns).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in the ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach using the display position of the decoration identification information in the reach mode in the display part, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display. As a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) becomes the reach mode. Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach so as to use the display position of
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying a title display corresponding to a specific reach using the display position of the identification information, it is possible to naturally draw attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PA2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide on one of the multiple fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-3), transmitting a second command to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to PB1-7) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-7 to PA2-9) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) and the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) are reaches in which multiple characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B production) uses the first character (ally character "Yumemu") in the first reach and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the first reach, The reach is informed that the first character (ally character "Yumemu") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a game in which the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach and the second character (enemy character "Robo") in the second reach a reach that is used and is notified that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") in the second reach is on the near side and the second character (enemy character) in the second reach is The display starts with the character "Robo") placed at the back,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach B effect), the first character (ally character "Yumemu") in the first reach is on the near side and the second character (enemy character "Boingo") in the second reach is ”) is characterized in that the display starts from a display that is placed so that it is not on the back side.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which is relatively highly anticipated, the first character who is notified that it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state is on the near side, and the second character is on the back side. This allows the player to empathize with the game, makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the player has high expectations, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1,
The first character is a character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") that is given a benefit when winning a battle,
The second character is a character (enemy character "Robo") that is not given a benefit when winning a battle,
At the start of the introduction part in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in the front position with their backs turned, and the second The character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position on the back side facing toward you, and the first character and the second character are facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the player, and making the player have high expectations. This makes it easier to recognize that the level is high.

The gaming machine of Form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are shown in the title display part. The title display (title characters) is displayed at a position that includes the display area where the title display (title characters) was displayed.
According to this feature, a player who has been paying attention to the title display will naturally look at the first character and the second character when the title display disappears.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second variation pattern (a variation pattern designation command that specifies PA2-2 and PA2-3), transmitting a second command to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performances),
The execution time of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introduction part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), continue to display the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part in the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title characters) is displayed without displaying dialogue subtitles.
According to this feature, the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation level and a long execution time, is displayed so as not to overlap the title display and dialogue subtitles as much as possible, while the second reach, which has a relatively low expectation level and a short execution time. At the time of the first reach, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, by finishing the title display first, the dialogue subtitles can also be noticed, and the title display and dialogue subtitles can be suitably provided to the player. As a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1,
If the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), in the subsequent introduction part, the title The feature is that the production scene does not change until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title characters have finished displaying.
According to this feature, if the title display and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, in the subsequent introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title display are displayed. The scene does not change until the end of the scene, so you can draw attention to the title display and then the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of Form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 6-1 or 6-2,
When the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output. However, the feature is that the audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed at the same time, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title display is not output, so that the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles can be heard. It becomes easier.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The titles of the specific reaches (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effects A to D) are displayed with multiple characters (``6 people catch Bakuchu!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D'')) It consists of
The display means (image display device 5) displays the title (title characters) of the specific reach in a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the plurality of characters is visible in the title display part of the specific reach. The display size gradually decreases from the first size, and the title display (title characters) of the specific reach is displayed so that the display size becomes a second size (reduced size) where all the multiple characters can be seen. ,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title for strongest reach system, common title for high base reach system),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D) It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, the first size is displayed where only a portion of multiple characters can be seen, and then the size is gradually reduced until all characters are visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 7-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) is started, a movable object (movable body 32) is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves until the movable object returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background exclusively for falling effect) is displayed, and the movable object returns to its initial position. The title display (title characters) is displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which, when returning to It is characterized in that the display starts, and then a second size (reduced size) title display and a background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, while giving an impact with the display method of the reach title, it is possible to simultaneously switch the background without feeling strange, and the title display can be suitably shown to the player.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The titles of the specific reaches (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effects A to D) are displayed with multiple characters (``6 people catch Bakuchu!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D'')) It consists of
The display means (image display device 5) enlarges and displays the plurality of characters from a state in which the plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which they are displayed in a reduced size and in a fixed position) in the title display part in the specific reach. By (expanding the display area until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters), the title display part ends, and the display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) becomes visible. Display it so that
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title for strongest reach system, common title for high base reach system),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction (high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D) It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display in the title display part, and can suitably use the title display to smoothly switch to the display corresponding to the next introduction part. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
Execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and execution time of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) Unlike (T2-1~3),
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). The title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in a fixed position is made the longest to draw attention to the type of title display. I can do it. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until it is displayed at the fixed position is longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position until the display ends. By setting the time to be long, it is possible to influence which title display is displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the 1st reach and the 2nd reach, the title display part can be easily understood by making the relationship between the execution times of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd parts the same. It can be made easier.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in the normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled by the advantageous state), and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a winning fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including (outlier fluctuation pattern),
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates an outlier fluctuation pattern in the normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies an outlier variation pattern in a probability variation state) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
Execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in normal state) and title display in the second reach (super reach performance in variable probability state) Unlike the part execution time (T4),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach performed in the normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) is a special condition (probable variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. is the reach executed in
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). , displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state), the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period). , the title display (title characters) is displayed such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is the most By making it longer, you can draw attention to the type of title display. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part will be displayed in the fixed position until it is displayed in the fixed position. By making the time from the time to the end of the display longer than the third part, it is possible to influence which title display is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the relationship between the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part is By making them common, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

The gaming machine of Form 10-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is the execution time (T1-1 to T1-2, It is characterized by being shorter than T2-1 to T2-3 and T3).
According to this feature, since the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively short. The execution time of the title display part is relatively long, so it can be thoroughly stimulated.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The title display part includes a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a second part (title display period) during which the title display is displayed at a fixed position. It consists of the third part (title end period) from displaying the fixed position to ending the display,
The display means (image display device 5) is arranged such that in the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), the second part (title display period) is different from the first part (title start period) and the third part ( displaying a title display (title characters) such that the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed at a fixed position the longest, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title display. Further, by making the first part until the title is displayed at the regular position longer than the third part from when the title is displayed at the regular position until the display ends, it is possible to decide which title to display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the particular reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means is
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) is displayed in a first mode (white mode), and the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first mode It is possible to display in a second mode (red mode) in which the expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the second mode (red mode),
In the title display part (title display part shown in Figure 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production), the expectation level suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first size. and then displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in a second size larger than the first size,
When the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode). In any case when displaying, displaying the expectation level suggestion display in a common manner,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach system strongest reach title, strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to a specific reach is larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and its appearance suggests the expectation level, so it attracts the player's attention. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title display, attention can be drawn to the expectation level suggestion first. Moreover, since the expectation level suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title is displayed in the first manner or in the second manner, attention can be drawn to the manner in which the title is displayed thereafter.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ~9), a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PA2-12) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among the multiple fluctuation patterns including and,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-5 to PB1-7) to the production control means;
When the second fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-7 to PA2-9) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-8 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When determining the fourth variation pattern, transmitting a fourth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B production), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C production), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars),
The expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance) and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance) are made to be the same. highlight and
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach type strong reach C title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). It is said that
According to this feature, even when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. In this case, development costs can be reduced by using a common highlighted display. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 13-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-1,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
In the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the degree of expectation is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
In the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the degree of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects,
In the expectation level suggestion display, each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and even if one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, , is characterized by highlighting in a common manner.
According to this feature, whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, development costs are reduced by highlighting in a common manner. It can be reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 13-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is characterized in that the time during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted is the same as the time during which 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted. It is said that
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by making the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects the same.

The gaming machine of Form 13-4 is the gaming machine described in Form 13-2 or 13-3,
In the expectation level suggestion display, a common emphasis sound ( It is characterized by the output of a sound that suggests the degree of expectation.
According to this feature, a common voice is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, reducing development costs. be able to.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect). It is possible to notify the
When the second command is received, the specified reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). It is possible to notify the
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach; An introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced;
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach production A to D), an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. It is possible and
In the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), emphasis is placed on the first object (star-shaped object). Then, while continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object), highlight the second object (star-shaped object), and then highlight the first object (star-shaped object). The third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display consisting of multiple objects, and in the expectation level suggestion display, before the highlighting for the first object ends. , the highlighting for the second object starts, but the highlighting for the third object does not start until the highlighting for the first object ends, so we are aware of the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation. It becomes easier to do so.

The gaming machine of Form 14-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 14-1,
In the expectation level suggestion display, an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output every time an object (star shaped object) is highlighted, and an emphasis sound ( After the output of the expectations-suggesting sound is finished, a highlighting sound for highlighting the next object (expectations-suggesting sound) is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation.

The gaming machine of Form 14-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation level"),
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (the text "Expectation Level").
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to both the plurality of objects and the characters that constitute the expectation level suggestion display by highlighting the objects.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) with a specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect). It is possible to notify the
When the second command is received, the specified reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). It is possible to notify the
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach; An introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced;
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach effect A to D effect), an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed. It is possible and
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach performance A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach performance A to D performance), the suspension display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display,
The light emission control means (effect control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (strong reach type common title, strongest reach type strongest reach title, high base reach type common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, high base reach system reach A It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means using the high base reach type reach B introduction, the high base reach type reach C introduction, and the high base reach type reach D introduction).
According to this feature, while an expectation level suggestion display consisting of multiple objects is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation level suggestion display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 15-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display that has started matches the maximum number (5) of objects (star-shaped objects) constituting the expectation level suggestion display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach is reached in a situation where the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it may be mistakenly assumed that the maximum number of objects that constitute the expectation suggestive display are displayed in the pending display and active display. It is possible to prevent this from being recognized as such.

The gaming machine of Form 15-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 15-1 or 15-2,
The present invention is characterized in that the suspended display ends when the display means (image display device 5) displays a monochrome display before the start of the title display part.
According to this feature, the hold display can be ended without any discomfort.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16), a third variation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. A certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a certain fourth variation pattern (PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) Deciding one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including the sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PA2-12/PA2-18) which is an uncontrolled fluctuation pattern,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) to the production control means;
When determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) to the production control means,
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-10 to PA2-12/PA2-18) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance), it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects),
Expectations that the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is composed of objects (star-shaped objects) of a second number (3.5) that is larger than the first number. It is possible to display a degree-suggestive display,
Expectation level suggestion made up of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) that are larger than the second number in the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) display is possible and
The difference in number between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference in number between the second number and the third number (0.5),
The expectation level controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) The difference from the expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed is the expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, and when it increases from the second number to the third number, The amount of increase in the number is the same, but the amount of increase in expectation that is controlled to be more advantageous when increasing from the second number to the third number than when increasing from the first number to the second number is Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the increased number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state. I never get my hopes up.

The gaming machine of Form 16-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-17) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19),
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15/PA2-19) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The display means displays an object (star-shaped object) with a fourth number (4.5), which is larger than the third number, in the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect). It is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of
The difference in numbers between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference in numbers between the first number and the third number (1),
The expectation level controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is executed and the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) ) is executed and the expectation level is controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed. The difference is greater than the difference between the expectation level to be controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the third number to the fourth number, more objects are displayed as the expectation level suggestion display than when the number increases from the first number to the third number. Although the amount of increase in the number is small, the amount of increase in the degree of expectation controlled to be advantageous is greater when increasing from the third number to the fourth number than when increasing from the first number to the third number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the control will be more advantageous even if the increased number of objects is small.

The gaming machine of Form 16-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, the number of objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number than when the number increases by 1 from the first number to become the third number. If the number is 4, it can be expected that the control will be more advantageous.
The gaming machine of Form 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 16-1 to 16-3,
When the third reach (high base reach C performance) is executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state and the second reach (high base reach B performance) ) is executed and the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is the difference from the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect) is executed in the normal state. The difference is greater than the difference between the degree of reach and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to expect that a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state will be controlled to an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases. can.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C) are both reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach effects) is a reach executed in a normal state. Reach A to C effects) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performances),
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production);
The expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has relatively high expectations, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has relatively low expectations, and the title display part in the second reach While the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the first reach, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, so it is made to feel that the expectation level is higher in the second reach than in the first reach. be able to. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 17-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period). and
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects). It is characterized by
According to this feature, the text display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the text display part of the title display part in the first reach, so the second reach is longer than the first reach. It is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is high.

The gaming machine of Form 17-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 17-1 or 17-2,
This is a reach executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach performance) that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C effects). ,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period). ,
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and consists only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach effect A to C effect). It is said that
According to this feature, the text display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the text display part of the title display part in the second reach, so the third reach is longer than the second reach. It is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is high.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2 to 3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-4) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. 12) Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies PB1-2, 5, and 8) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 to PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches executed in a normal state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), there is no notification that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the performance, and ), there are cases where it is announced that it will not be controlled, and cases where another reach (super reach effect) is executed.
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performances) is performed when it is announced that the effect will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) as a result of the production, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). There are cases where it is announced that it will not be done, and there is a certain reach.
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification whether or not the other reach is executed. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production);
The expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the second reach where it is sometimes reported that the control will be directly controlled to an advantageous state, Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach that is not reported, it is possible to prevent the first reach from creating an excessive sense of expectation. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 18-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 18-1,
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), the title is displayed (title letters) in a confirmed mode (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach effect) will be executed. It is characterized by the fact that it can be displayed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the validity of the above is announced, and
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach) is achieved through a selection effect using title display (title letters) corresponding to multiple reaches including the specific reach (super reach effect). may be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display together with the title display (title characters) in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach) and the selected production,
When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach), the expectation level suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects). step by step,
When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is When displaying the degree suggestion display, the expectation degree suggestion display consisting of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so the expectation degree suggestion display is not only displayed in stages in the title display part but also in the selection performance before it. This eliminates the annoyance caused by the display of

The gaming machine of Form 19-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 19-1,
The selection performance is a performance that changes in stages from a reach with low expectations (super reach performance) to a reach with high expectations (super reach performance) by operating the performance operation means (push button 31B),
The time required to change by one level in the selected production (minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach production) is based on the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach) The present invention is characterized in that the time required for displaying one level of the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part of the title display part (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold through highlighting) may be shorter.
According to this feature, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the stepwise changes in the selection performance.

The gaming machine of Form 19-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 19-2,
The selection performance is a performance that changes from the current reach (super reach performance) to a reach (super reach performance) with higher expectations by one stage at each stage, and changes to the next stage each time it changes by one stage. This feature is characterized in that the number of operations of the effect operation means (push button 31B) required for this purpose is increased.
According to this feature, the higher the expected level of reach, the more anxious the player can be.

The gaming machine of Form 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection performance, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so it is easy for the player to determine which reach has finally been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) in a manner with larger movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title letters of the super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by moving the name display of the advantageous state more greatly, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 20-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D), when displaying the title display (title characters), a background dedicated to the title display is provided. displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized in that it is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled to an advantageous state by moving the background of the advantageous state name display more widely.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
Displaying the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional character display displayed in the introduction part prompts the player to take action, and by moving it larger than the title display displayed in the title display part, it intuitively prompts the player to move. can encourage action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 21-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to take action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed. Promotional characters (large)) can be displayed,
Both the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) and the special promotion text display (operation promotion text (large)) move more than the title display (title text) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being displayed in a large format.
According to this feature, whether it is a promotion character display or a special promotion character display, by moving the title display larger than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to make a move. .

The gaming machine of Form 21-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, since the number of characters in the promotion character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, the content of the characters can be recognized even if the character is moved significantly.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory characters) that is different from the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
Displaying the explanatory character display (explanatory character) in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory text display in a manner with greater movement than the title display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory text display is added in addition to the title display. Can be done. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 22-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 22-1,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is characterized in that the content suggests that the particular reach (super reach performance) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory character display is added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), and determining one of the fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including;
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The degree of expectation that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) will be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is better than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects). Also displays the font size to be larger,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the first reach (weak reach system common title),
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the title display part of the second reach (strong reach system common title),
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B production), use the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) controlling the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using a strong reach C system.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation. Therefore, just by displaying the title, it is possible to make the user realize that the second reach has higher expectations than the first reach. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 23-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effects) The display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up (title characters). It is characterized by being larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, since the display area occupied by one character is larger in the title display corresponding to the second reach, it is made to feel that the expectations for the second reach are higher than the first reach. be able to.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative design) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
The first size of the decoration identification information (decorative design (large)) is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the second size smaller than the first size is displayed. Displaying the decoration identification information (decoration pattern (small)) in a reach mode,
displaying at least one character of a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) in a size larger than the second size (decorative design (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to a specific reach is displayed in a larger size than the decorative identification information reduced to the second size, so it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part. can. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 24-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 24-1,
Any character of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is smaller than the first size (decorative design (large)) and smaller than the second size (decorative design (small)). It is also characterized by being displayed in a large size.
According to this feature, the decoration identification information can be reliably recognized when the reach mode is reached, but after that, the decoration identification information is reduced and the title display is configured in a larger size than the decoration identification information. Since each character is displayed, it is possible to draw attention to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which promotion characters are displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the control will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which the advantageous state is already controlled. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 25-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and a second character string (“BONUS”),
After the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) is displayed in the first position (upper position), the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed in the second position (lower position). is,
After the second character string (“BONUS”) is displayed in the second position (bottom position), the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) displayed in the first position (top position) is displayed. ") and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (at the bottom of the fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
The first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed in the first position (upper position) and the second position (lower position). Sometimes the font size is displayed at its smallest size,
When the first character string (“BIG” or “REGULAR”) and the second character string (“BONUS”) are displayed in the first position (upper regular position) and the second position (lower regular position); The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be celebrated even more.

The gaming machine of Form 25-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character of the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is greater than the largest character of the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)). It is also characterized by its large size.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the promotion character display. Even so, since the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state even more.

The gaming machine of Form 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 25-1 to 25-3,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, so that the player can feel the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of Form 25-5 is the gaming machine described in Form 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) is the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of jackpot start effect). It is characterized by being larger than.
According to this feature, the smallest character in the character string that makes up the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display, so which character should you focus on? Even so, since the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 26-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized in that it is displayed larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be congratulated by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach.

The gaming machine of Form 26-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 26-2,
The smallest character of the character strings that make up the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is the character that makes up the title display (title letters) that corresponds to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). Characterized by being larger than the largest character in the column.
According to this feature, the smallest character of the character string that makes up the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the title display that corresponds to any type of specific reach. Therefore, no matter which character you pay attention to, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, so you can celebrate being controlled to be in an advantageous state even more.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter larger than the promotion text display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 27-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 27-1,
After the promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), and a title display part in the specific reach starts. .
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part in a series of flows, and by displaying the title display that will be displayed later larger than the promotion text display. can.

The gaming machine of Form 27-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character of the character strings that constitute the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) constitutes the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)). It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the string.
According to this feature, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title display that corresponds to a specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the promotional character display. Even if you pay attention to the title, you can draw attention to the title display.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the advantageous condition name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled will be displayed. It is possible to display
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) larger than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) larger than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state. Moreover, by displaying the promotional text display before the title display part and displaying the subsequent title display larger than the promotional text display, attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 28-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 28-1,
After the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed, it develops into the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and the specific reach ( The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed after it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the low base weak reach A and B performances).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part in a series of flows, and by displaying the title display that will be displayed later larger than the promotion text display. After being informed that the player will be controlled into an advantageous state due to a specific reach, the name display of the advantageous state is displayed larger than the title display, thereby congratulating the player on being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) for a longer time than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 29-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 29-1,
The time from when all the character strings forming the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed corresponds to the specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by a longer time than the time from when a part of the character string that makes up the title display (title characters) is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is clearly visible longer than the time during which the title display whose purpose is to agitate the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state, the game can give people a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of Form 29-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is changed to an operation suggestion display (image (small) promoting right-handed hitting and promotion of right-handed hitting) that suggests how to operate during the advantageous state. image (large)), and after a predetermined period of time has passed since switching to the operation suggestion display, operate using the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (operation method of launching the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R). This allows for advantageous control,
The time at which the advantageous state name display (title letters of jackpot start performance) switches to the operation suggestion display (right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and right-handed hitting promotion image (large)) corresponds to the specific reach (super reach performance). It is characterized by being shorter than the time it takes to finish the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is switched to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and after a predetermined period of time, advantageous control is performed by operating in the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display. It is possible to prevent disadvantages to the player due to changing the operating method from the period in which display of the advantageous state name ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introduction part (operation promotion effects B and D) of the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, a situation in which promotion characters are displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the control will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is a situation in which an advantageous state is already in place. This is the situation after being notified that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than displaying the promotion characters, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in the advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 30-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting characters (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or a valid period of time for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time during which the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed is the period after the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small)) is displayed, the prompted action is not performed, and the prompted action is not performed. It is characterized by the fact that the effective time is longer than the time it takes to elapse.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the time when the prompted action is not performed, thereby controlling the vehicle to an advantageous state. can be blessed.

The gaming machine of Form 30-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the character strings forming the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) are displayed until at least a part of the character strings is no longer displayed is the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (lower case) )) is characterized by being longer than the displayed time.
According to this feature, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the display of promotional characters whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action, thereby satisfying the player. It can give a feeling.

The gaming machine of Form 30-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 30-1 to 30-3,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is a display of promotion characters (characters encouraging operation) without a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect);
In the special operation promotion display (operation promotion characters (large)), promotion characters (characters that prompt operation) are displayed after the promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer period of time than the special promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with blessings is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. be able to.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) for a longer time than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by displaying the promotion text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion text display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 31-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 31-1,
The promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is displayed for a period of time from when all the character strings forming the title display (title characters) are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed. It is characterized by being longer than time.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the title display by making the time during which the title display is clearly visible longer than the time during which the promotional character display whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action is displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 31-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 31-1 or 31-2,
A special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion text (small)) is a display of promotion characters (characters encouraging operation) without a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect);
In the special operation promotion display (operation promotion characters (large)), promotion characters (characters that prompt operation) are displayed after the promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed,
The time during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special promotion character display (operation promotion characters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, by making the time during which the title display is displayed longer than the time during which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, attention can be drawn to the title display.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
In front of the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to move can be displayed. can be,
After it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled by the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the advantageous condition name display (title characters of jackpot start effect) corresponding to the advantageous condition to be controlled will be displayed. It is possible to display
Displaying the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start performance) for a longer time than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
displaying a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) for a longer time than the promotion letter display (operation promotion letters (small));
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, a situation in which a title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, whereas a situation in which an advantageous state name is displayed is already in an advantageous state. This is the situation after being informed that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state, and by displaying the name of the advantageous state for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to congratulate the user on being controlled in an advantageous state. Further, by displaying the promotional text display before the title display part and displaying the title display that will be displayed thereafter for a longer time than the promotion text display, attention can be drawn to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), a third variation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth variation pattern (PA2-10) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. 4 to 12), a fifth variation pattern (PB1-14) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth variation pattern (PA2-16) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, and A plurality of fluctuation patterns including a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to an advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA, PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the fifth variation pattern, transmitting a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-14) to the production control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-16) to the production control means,
When determining the seventh variation pattern, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-15 to PB1-17) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-17 to PA2-19) to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that displays a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The third reach (high base reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performances) are reaches performed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach effects A and B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means is
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C production), it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The expectation level suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation level suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
It is characterized in that the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A and B effects).
According to this feature, since the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first reach. By not displaying it, it is not possible to make people expect excessively that the first reach will control the player to an advantageous state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation level than the fourth reach in the special state, but the expectation level is higher than the first reach in the normal state. By displaying the expectation level suggestion display even in reach, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled in an advantageous state both in the case of the third reach and in the case of the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in the normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (normal state) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled by the advantageous state), and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a winning fluctuation pattern in a certain variable state) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including (outlier fluctuation pattern),
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates an outlier fluctuation pattern in the normal state) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a jackpot variation pattern in a variable probability state) to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies an outlier variation pattern in a probability variation state) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) is a reach performed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is a reach performed in a special state (variable probability state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state), the light emitting means control,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a variable probability state), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table (high base reach system common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (super reach performance in normal state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong Controlling the light emitting means using the introduction of reach A, the introduction of strong reach system strong reach B, and the introduction of strong reach system strong reach C,
In the introduction part of the second reach (super reach performance in variable probability state), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled by using reach C and high base reach system reach D.
According to this feature, by making the title display part of the second reach in the special state shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo. In addition, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, respectively. Since the light-emitting means is controlled using the light-emitting means, the light-emitting means can be caused to emit light in a suitable light-emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 34-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 34-1,
The frequency of the second reach (super reach effect in the variable probability state) in the special state (variable probability state) is higher than the frequency of the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) in the normal state. There is.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of second reach increases in the special state, the special state can be advanced at a good tempo.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. ~12), a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PA2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state. Decide one of the fluctuation patterns from among the multiple fluctuation patterns including and,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-10) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-12) to the production control means;
When determining the third variation pattern, transmitting a third command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When determining the fourth variation pattern, transmitting a fourth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a display part that determines whether or not it is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It consists of an introductory part until the announcement is made, and
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The second reach (low base strongest reach performance) has a higher expectation that the advantageous state will be achieved than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), the first reach is performed in the first display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area). Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strongest reach effect), the second display operation mode (display mode in which title characters are displayed reduced from enlarged display) that is different from the first display operation mode is displayed. Display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the reach,
When the special state (time saving state B (play time)) is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, a display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed in the second It is characterized by display in a display mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed in a reduced size instead of being enlarged).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specific number of times is displayed in the same way as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation. Since the display is performed in two display operation modes, it is possible to recognize that the special state is highly advantageous after reaching a specific number of times.

The gaming machine of Form 35-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 35-1,
When ending the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state (time saving state B (play time)) will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times, the second reach (low base strongest reach effect) The present invention is characterized in that the title display (title characters) of the title display part is ended in the same display operation manner as that in which the title characters are enlarged and erased.
According to this feature, even when ending the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of times, the display operation mode is the same as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation. Since the operation is ended in the display mode, it is possible to recognize that the special state is highly advantageous after reaching the specific number of times.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (time saving state B (play time)), a display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times can be displayed. can be,
The size of the characters composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times (title letters of the play time start effect) is the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). larger than the size of the characters that make up the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the title will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, whereas the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the title will be controlled to an advantageous state. The display shown is a situation in which the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, and the size of the characters that make up the display indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is changed to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. By making it larger than the font size, you can celebrate being controlled into a special state after reaching a certain number of times. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 36-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes multiple types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The characters that make up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times are the title display (title letters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect). It is characterized by being larger than the letters that make it up.
According to this feature, the characters composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters composing the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. After reaching it, you can be blessed with being controlled by a special state.

The gaming machine of Form 36-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 36-2,
The smallest character of the character string that makes up the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times (title characters of the play time start effect) corresponds to which type of specific reach (super reach effect) It is characterized by being larger than the largest character in the character string that makes up the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings composing the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of times is the character string composing the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach. It is displayed larger than our largest font, so no matter which font you pay attention to, the display indicating that you will be controlled into a special state after reaching a certain number of times will be displayed larger than the title display corresponding to a specific reach. Therefore, being controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times can be a blessing.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (time saving state B (play time)), a display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times can be displayed. can be,
The display time of the display (title letters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times is longer than the display time of the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect). Also long,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether the title will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, whereas the situation in which the title is displayed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the title will be controlled to an advantageous state. This is a situation in which a special state is entered after reaching a certain number of reaches, and by displaying a display indicating that a special state will be entered after reaching a certain number of reaches for a longer period of time than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, After reaching it, you can be blessed with being controlled by a special state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 37-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 37-1,
The time from when all the character strings that make up the display (title characters of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specified number of times is displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is , characterized by being longer than the time from when a part of the character string forming the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. There is.
According to this feature, a title display whose purpose is to arouse the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state is displayed during the time when the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a certain number of blessings is clearly visible. By making the time longer than the average time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is the display (remaining number of characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. larger than the size of the constituent characters,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized by controlling the light emitting means by using a high base reach type reach C introduction, a high base reach system reach A introduction, a high base reach system reach B introduction, a high base reach system reach C introduction, and a high base reach system reach D introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters that make up the title display corresponding to a specific reach larger than the size of the letters that make up the display that shows the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching a certain number of times, It is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to the title. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 38-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach performance) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and a second reach (low base strong reach) that is expected to be controlled to the advantageous state more than the first reach. A to C performances), including
The display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed during the execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), (Low base strong reach A to C effect) is not displayed during execution.
According to this feature, in the first reach where expectations are low, by displaying the remaining number of times until reaching a special state after reaching a certain number of times, it is possible to make people aware of the number of times until reaching a special state after reaching a certain number of times. With a high second reach, it is possible to draw attention to the performance by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times, and also reduce the player's sense of regret when the number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is small. It can be alleviated.

The gaming machine of Form 38-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 38-2,
When it is announced that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state, a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining time until play time) is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying the number of times character) again,
If it is reported that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state, the specified number of times is reached after the second reach (low base strong reach effects A to C effects) is completed. The feature is that the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state (remaining number of times until play time characters) is displayed again.
According to this feature, when it is announced that the second reach will be controlled to the advantageous state, by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not displayed again. When the number of plays is small, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated. In addition, if it is reported that the second reach is not controlled to an advantageous state, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times will be displayed again after the second reach ends, so the number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times will be displayed again. It can quickly provide relief when there is little.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation promotion effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), a promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) that urges the player to make an action can be displayed;
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
The size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is the same as the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until play time characters) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. bigger than it,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, the size of the characters that make up the promotional text display that prompts the player to take action at a timing related to a specific reach, and the size of the letters that make up the display that shows the remaining number of times until a special state after reaching a certain number of times are changed. By making the size larger than that of , it is possible to attract attention to the promotion character display, and it is possible to effectively urge the player to take action. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of Form 39-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 39-1,
If the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion production A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), the specific reach has been reached. A display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state (remaining number of times until play time) is displayed at the same time,
If the promotion text display (operation promotion text (small)) is displayed in the introduction part (operation promotion production D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C production), a special state will be activated after reaching the specific number of times. It is characterized by the fact that the display indicating the remaining number of times until the play time (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before developing to a specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed at the same time as the promotion text is displayed, so that the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed. By not displaying the remaining number of times until a special state is reached after reaching a certain number of times in the operation promotion display of the introduction part, it is possible to determine whether or not it will be notified that the control will be in an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second variation pattern (loss variation pattern) that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including ,
When determining the first fluctuation pattern, transmitting a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates a jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the production control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, transmitting a second command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies a deviation variation pattern) to the production control means,
The normal state and the state where the starting conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the normal state, and the variable display where the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result ("Jackpot" special figure display result) has been executed a specific number of times (900 times) It is possible to control into multiple states including a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled based on
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of
The display means (image display device 5)
After being notified that the specific reach (super reach performance) will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state,
In the normal state, it is possible to display a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters),
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time characters) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. Bigger than size;
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach series, common title for strong reach series),
In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach It is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the name of an advantageous state is displayed is the situation after it has been announced that the advantageous state will be controlled, and there is no need to display the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching a certain number of times. Therefore, before displaying the advantageous state name display, the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times ends, and the size of the characters that make up the advantageous state name display is changed to By making the size of the characters larger than the size of the characters that make up the display indicating the number of times remaining until the state is reached, it is possible to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

The gaming machine of form 40-2 is the gaming machine according to form 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching the specified number of times, a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times (remaining number of times until play time) is displayed. The sizes of the characters that make up the characters (characters) are the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is the same as the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number characters until play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specified number of times. It is characterized by being larger than its size.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the size of the characters forming the advantageous state name display indicates the number of remaining times to reach the special state after reaching the specific number of times. By making the size of the characters larger than the size of the characters forming the display, it is possible to celebrate being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of Form 40-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) first puts game media into the starting area (first starting prize opening, second starting winning opening) in a special state (time saving state B (play time)) after reaching a specific number of times. It is characterized in that a special fluctuation pattern (time saving B start fluctuation pattern) is determined when a (game ball) enters the ball.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, it is possible to perform an effect according to the special variation pattern.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) may be changed from a first aspect (white aspect) to a second aspect (red or gold aspect) and displayed. It is possible and
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the specific reach (low base weak reach A, The time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is displayed is longer than the time when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is displayed in the first mode (white mode). (title characters) are displayed for longer than the displayed time,
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach system weak reach A, introduction of weak reach system weak reach B).
According to this feature, when changing the title display corresponding to the specific reach from the first aspect to the second aspect in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the specific reach is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. By making the time that the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed longer than the time that the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode, it is possible to ensure that the change to the second mode has been made. It can be recognized. In addition, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the light emitting means emits light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. can be done. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

The gaming machine of Form 41-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or may not be changed as the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), , at a specific timing (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the first mode (white mode) is changed to the second mode (red or golden mode), and a specific effect is generated. Outputs a sound (specific sound),
If the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not changed in the first mode (white mode), when the specific timing comes (title display When the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the period), the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output without changing the first mode (white mode).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing, and a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing. Since a specific sound effect is also output, it is possible to expect that the mode will change to the second mode by outputting the specific sound effect.

The gaming machine of Form 41-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes multiple types of aspects (red and golden aspects),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red, gold aspect), , a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output when changing to any type of the second mode (red mode, golden mode).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first mode to the second mode at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output when changing to any type of second mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which type of second mode changes by outputting the specific sound effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change and display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect). can be,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is controlled from the first aspect (white aspect) to a more advantageous state than the second aspect (red aspect). It is possible to change and display the third aspect (golden aspect) with high expectations,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed. ) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (golden aspect), the first aspect (white aspect) The display is changed from a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) and then to the second mode (a red mode) or the third mode (a golden mode). It is said that
According to this feature, even when changing the title display corresponding to a specific reach from the first mode to the second mode in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the third mode. Also, when changing from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode, the common display mode is changed to the second mode or the third mode. Alternatively, until the change to the third mode, the user can expect the change to the third mode, which is more expected than the second mode, until the end.

The gaming machine of Form 42-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) shine, and when the light is clear, the characters change to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode). It is characterized by change.
According to this feature, by lighting the characters forming the title display, it is possible to encourage a change to the second mode or the third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
A brightness data table (weak reach type) for the title display part that is common to the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) controlling the light emitting means using a common title);
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction). It is said that
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part can be set to the same brightness data table corresponding to each title display part. By using the data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until it is announced whether or not the situation will be advantageous, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-6) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state; and a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state. a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10), and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12), which is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among multiple fluctuation patterns including
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
When the fifth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fifth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4) to the production control means;
When the sixth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-6) to the production control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part until the
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether the fourth reach is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until the propriety of the judgment is announced, and
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) are the same as the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (effect control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The luminance data table (weak controlling the light emitting means using the reach system common title),
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) Control the light emitting means using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach The invention is characterized in that the light emitting means is controlled using the light emitting means (C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part the same for Reach 2 with high expectations and Reach 2 with low expectations, increases in cost and capacity can be prevented, and By using the corresponding brightness data tables, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state exists, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed. .

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. , a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state; a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PA2-6) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state; and a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state. a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10), and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12), which is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled by the advantageous state. A plurality of patterns including a ninth variation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth variation pattern (PA2-13 to PA2-15) which is a variation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JA) to the production control means,
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2) to the production control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, transmitting a third command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-JB) to the production control means,
When the fourth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fourth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-3) to the production control means,
When the fifth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a fifth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PB1-2 to PB1-4) to the production control means;
When the sixth fluctuation pattern is determined, transmitting a sixth command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-4 to PA2-6) to the production control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, transmitting a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) to the production control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, transmitting an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) to the production control means;
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a ninth command (variation pattern designation command specifying PB1-11 to PB1-13) to the production control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, transmitting a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command specifying PA2-13 to PA2-15) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state). ,
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A effect) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified. It consists of an introductory part until the
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and whether the fourth reach is controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until the propriety of the judgment is announced, and
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part up to, and
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) are the same as the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach The expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) includes the first reach (low base weak reach effect A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach effect B effect), and the third reach (low base strong reach effect A effect). ), the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than either of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
The luminance data table (weak control the light emitting means using the reach system common title),
A second title display part that is common to the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) Control the light emitting means using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the third title display part (strongest reach system strongest reach title) for the fifth reach. ,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the second reach (weak reach system weak reach B introduction),
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the third reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction),
In the introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the brightness data table for the introduction part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part of the fifth reach (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). .
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for Reach 2, which has a high expectation level, and Reach 2, which has a low expectation level, the increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and the introduction part The brightness data table corresponding to By providing dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introduction part, the interest can be increased, and as a result, suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to change and display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) from a first aspect (white) to a second aspect (red or gold),
The light emission control means (production control CPU 120) is
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), if the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the first brightness data table (common title for weak reach systems) (white)) to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A and B effects), when changing the title display (title characters) to the second mode (red or gold), the second brightness data table (common title for weak reach systems) (red) or weak reach common title (gold)) to control the light emitting means,
In the introduction part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), regardless of whether the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach changes to the second mode (red or gold), the same The light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, whether the title display is not changed to the second mode or changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part can be made common. By using brightness data tables corresponding to each title display part to prevent an increase in cost and capacity, it is possible to prevent the title display from changing to the second mode and when changing it to the second mode. Each can be suitably rendered, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
By executing variable display of specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure), and deriving a specific display result (special figure display result of "jackpot") as a result of variable display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100),
Production control means (production control CPU 120),
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamp LA1 to LA4),
Light emission control means (production control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled when the game medium (game ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole),
Executing variable display of the specific identification information (first special figure, second special figure),
Based on the result of the determination, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2) that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. -2, PA2-3), and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among the fluctuation patterns,
When determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command (a variation pattern designation command that specifies (PA2-2, PA2-3)) to the production control means;
When determining the second fluctuation pattern, transmitting a second command (a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates PA2-2 and PA2-3) to the production control means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and a notification as to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. It consists of an introductory part until the
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production) is as follows:
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach starts to be displayed until it is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the luminance data table for the first part (weak reach title start) is used to emit light. control the means;
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B production), the brightness data table for the second part (weak reach type title display) is set. controlling the light emitting means using
In the introduction part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) It is characterized by
According to this feature, the brightness data table corresponds to the first part from when the title display starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position in a specific reach, and the second part after the title display is displayed at the fixed position. By using the luminance data table corresponding to the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part and the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part, the period for displaying the title and the period until notifying whether or not an advantageous state is reached can be optimized. As a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Example]
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece becomes the winning ball. It approaches the device 6A and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray), apart from the upper tray, from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the batting rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 may be used as long as it can display setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time saving state is also called a low certainty/high base state, the variable probability state is also called a high certainty/high base state, the normal state is also called a low certainty/low base state, etc. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of production, etc.]
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching a reach mode with a non-probability variable pattern, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. It's good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is good if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the symbols.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in an on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The CPU 103, which has executed such game control main processing, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority play). Furthermore, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball hitting rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball launch rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball launch rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the variable special figure has a setting value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reach and super reach may differ depending on the setting value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the original position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the production control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May be included. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 131SG]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 131SG will be explained. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic section 131SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "131SGS1", and "Normal reach" is replaced by "N reach" and "Super reach". It is sometimes abbreviated as "SP reach". Furthermore, in the feature section 131SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

Unlike the explanation of FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) that have different ratios of displaying jackpot display results. This game machine will be described as a gaming machine in which the variable display result is not ``time saving, winning or losing'' and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/319.

In addition, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) in a low certainty state. If the next jackpot does not occur, the game may be controlled to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or relief time saving state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games). , is a gaming state also called "play time" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled to be the jackpot A of the plurality of types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) among the plurality of time-saving states. Therefore, the number of variable display times from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the relief time saving is 790 times, but if the jackpot game state is controlled to be either jackpot B or jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots. Since the variable display is performed 110 times in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the variable probability state to the arrival of the relief time reduction is 900 times. Further, in this embodiment, the number of variable display times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time saving number counter becoming "0" is 1100 times.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, at the lower left of the image display device 5, it is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the first special symbol pending memory for which a starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet. A first special figure pending storage display area 130SG005D is provided, and in the lower right corner of the image display device 5, a pending display corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in which a starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet is displayed. A displayable second special figure pending storage display area 130SG005U is provided. At the lower center of the image display device 5, an active display area 130SG005F is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

In addition, on the right side of the image display device 5, there is a fourth symbol 131SG005J for informing the player that the variable display is being executed, and the same as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5. It is possible to display a small pattern 131SG005M in which a variable display is executed, and in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays until the time saving state B (relief time saving state) is controlled, which will be described later. It is possible to display a remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment display 131SG005Z indicating the remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment.

Furthermore, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed with a left side where game balls can flow down. It is formed in the right game area 2R that can be flowed down. The game ball weakly launched by the firing device flows down the first path as the left game area 2L, and the game ball strongly launched by the firing device flows down the second path as the right game area 2R.

Further, at the lower left of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D that indicates the number of reserved special symbols by the number of reserved displays is displayed, and at the lower right of the image display device 5, a second reserved special symbol is displayed. A second pending storage display area 131SG005U is provided in which the number of stored items is indicated by the number of pending displays. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5, in which a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the downward direction of the game balls. The first big prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the big winning opening door (not shown), which allows the game ball to enter the open state and the game ball to enter the closed state where the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change the state. The second grand prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the grand prize opening door (not shown). It is possible to change the state.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A that can detect game balls is provided in the first grand prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B that can detect game balls is provided in the second grand prize opening. There is.

In other words, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 2L (first route) can win in the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and can win in the right gaming area 2R (first route). 2 paths), the game balls flowing down the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, It is possible to win a prize, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

The switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to a first count switch 131SG023A, a second count switch 131SG023B, and a jackpot start switch 131SG024 built in the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 2L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 2R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there is a first Special symbol display device 131SG004A, second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, first reservation display device 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reservation memory number, capable of displaying the second reservation memory number 2nd pending display 131SG025B, normal symbol display 131SG020 that can perform variable display of normal symbols, normal pattern pending display 131SG025C that can display the number of normal patterns stored, number of rounds of the jackpot game during the jackpot game (jackpot Round indicator 131SG131 capable of displaying the game type), jackpot game state, high-accuracy/high-base state (variable probability state), low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state), etc. A game in which game balls are launched toward the right gaming area 2R. right-handed lamp 131SG132 that lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state), variable-probability lamp 131SG133 that lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state), and low-accuracy/high-base state (variable-probability state) and low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state) A game information display section is provided in which lighted time-saving lamps 131SG134 are collectively arranged. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lights up exceptionally from the timing when the variable display stops.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits gaming information (signals) to external devices such as a management computer of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). It is equipped with an information output circuit for output.

In this embodiment, the second big winning hole is provided with a V winning hole and an outlet located on the downstream side of the V winning hole. Further, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided on the upstream side of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game ball flowing down inside the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. It is assumed that the water cannot pass through the water and flows down to the outlet.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 includes a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a game ball has passed through the V winning hole provided downstream of the second big winning hole. and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

Further, a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 are connected to the effect control board 12. In addition, the lamp control board 14 includes a right-handed LED 131SG031 for encouraging a right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that is lit while the second special symbol is being variably displayed. the second special figure LED 131SG033, the first reservation LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first reservation memory number is 1 to 2, and the first reservation LED 131SG034B that lights up when the first reservation memory number is 3 to 4. , a second hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory number is 1 to 2, a second hold LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory number is 3 to 4, and are built in the push button 31B. The button LED 62, the movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR2 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern, a random number MR4 for determining a fluctuation pattern, a random number MR5 for determining a normal figure display result, and a random number MR6 for determining an initial value of MR5 is controlled to be countable. . Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these The range of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A variation pattern determination table and the like that store a plurality of types of variation patterns serving as modes are stored.

FIG. 11-3(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, the special figure display results are displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/319.68 in this example), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/319.68 in this example). /80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, in addition to the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot type determination table (C1) shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), the fluctuation pattern type determination table, the fluctuation pattern determination table, and the regular pattern display result determination table (not shown) ), a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball launch rate) does not change depending on the setting value, but the probability of winning the jackpot (ball launch rate) varies depending on the setting value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the values change.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11-3 (C1) and FIG. 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in this example will be explained using FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, as jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided, in which time saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be achieved by entering the V winning hole after the game ball enters the second big winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and the maximum after the end of the jackpot game. This is also a jackpot in which variable probability control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open states of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) include a short open state in which the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds) and a long open state in which the open state is long. (for example, 15 seconds). Jackpot A is when the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and jackpot B and jackpot C are when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. shall be.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short-circuit open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect it, it's essentially a regular jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot B" changes the second jackpot in the first round to an open state that is advantageous for the player, and the first jackpot in the second to sixth rounds that is advantageous to the player. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability change control is executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot C" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to 10th rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

In addition, in this example, a form in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of jackpot types is two or less, or four. More than one type may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%, so that the jackpot is achieved. After the game ends, both probability change control and time saving control are carried out. Furthermore, if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change control will be performed after the jackpot game ends. and time-saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even if the jackpot A is achieved, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is short-circuited, but it is extremely rare. , V will not be won and probability variable control will not be executed. In addition, even in the case of jackpot B and jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare that you will not be able to win a prize when the V lid is in a long open state, so it will be jackpot B and jackpot C. In this case, the description will be made on the assumption that V is won and probability variable control is executed.

In addition, in this example, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by the special figure display result determination. It may also be determined using MR1, which is a random value for.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which probability change control and time saving control can be executed 110 times after the end of the jackpot game state is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot D etc. may be provided in which the time saving control is performed 1009 times (variable probability state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. By doing this, it is highly likely that there will be a jackpot next time, so the interest will be increased, and even if the probability variable control ends without a jackpot occurring in the probability variable state 110 times after the end of jackpot D, the time saving state A (low probability After performing 899 variable displays without a jackpot in the /high base state), by performing only one variable display in the normal state, the system is further controlled to the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state), which will be described later. Therefore, interest will increase.

[Number of time savings]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low Time saving state A where the probability control is performed 110 times (in this embodiment, the time saving state is controlled to BATTLE RUSH where the number of time savings is 110 times. Also, either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game is in the probability variable area. When a ball wins, (1) the time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the variable probability state where the variable probability control is performed 110 times (in this example, the time saving control is performed 110 times). RUSH)).In addition, when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low accuracy state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy It is controlled to the time saving state B in which the control is performed 1100 times (in this example, the play time is 1100 times shortened).However, after the end of the time saving state B, the control is performed again in the 900 time saving state without being controlled to hit the jackpot in the low probability state. Even if the number of changes is made, the time saving state B will not be controlled again based on this change.

Note that the relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by variable displaying n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is It can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K=Relief time saving arrival rate, ML=Jackpot probability, n=Number of variable displays)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is about 1/319, the relief time saving attainment rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows setting of a setting value, if the setting value with a lower jackpot probability is set, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate becomes, the player can be rescued even with a setting value with a low jackpot probability. can do.

[Variation pattern]
FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns of this embodiment are roughly divided into a loss variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss, and a jackpot variation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the out-of-reach fluctuation patterns can be roughly divided into non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns whose fluctuation pattern type is non-reach), and normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation patterns in which no reach effect is executed and the result is a loss. Variation pattern of normal reach where reach effect is executed and misses (variation pattern where variation pattern type is normal reach), reach effect of low base weak super reach A or reach of low base weak super reach B in normal state (low base state) Variation pattern of low base weak super reach where the performance is executed and misses (fluctuation pattern type is low base weak super reach variation pattern), final low base strong super reach A reach in normal state (low base state) A variation pattern of low base strong super reach A that results in a miss after the performance is executed (a variation pattern where the variation pattern type is low base strong super reach A), and finally a low base strong super reach B in the normal state (low base state) The variation pattern of low base strong super reach B that is executed and misses (the variation pattern of variation pattern type is low base strong super reach B), in the normal state (low base state), the low base strong super reach Variation pattern of low base strong super reach C that results in reach effect of reach C being executed (fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C variation pattern), finally low base in normal state (low base state) The variation pattern of the strongest super reach on a low base that is executed and misses when the reach effect of the strongest super reach is executed (the variation pattern of the strongest super reach on a low base), the final result in time saving state A or definite variable state (high base state) Variation pattern of high base super reach A that results in a miss when the reach effect of high base super reach A is executed (fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A variation pattern), time saving state A or definite variable state (high base state) , the fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B is finally executed and the reach effect of high base super reach B is missed (the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of high base super reach B), the time saving state A or the variable probability state (high base super reach B). Variation pattern of high base super reach C that ultimately results in the execution of reach effect of high base super reach C (base state) (variation pattern of high base super reach C as variation pattern type), time saving state A or definite variation In the state (high base state), a fluctuation pattern of high base super reach D (fluctuation pattern of high base super reach D whose fluctuation pattern type is a fluctuation pattern) is provided in which the reach effect of high base super reach D is finally executed and misses. ing.

As a variation pattern where the variation pattern type is non-reach, the special figure variation time is 12000ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 2 or less, no reach effect is executed. PA1-1, special figure fluctuation time is 5000 ms, and when the number of pending memories of the target special figure of variable display in the normal state is 3, no reach effect is executed PA1-2, special figure fluctuation time PA1-3 is 2000 ms and no reach effect is executed during time saving control (time saving state A or probability variable state), and special symbol variation time is 500 ms and any reach effect is not executed during time saving control (time saving state B). There are four types of variation patterns PA1-4 in which no performance is executed.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is normal reach, there is one type of variation pattern PA2-1 in which the special symbol variation time is 20000 ms and the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the player loses.

The variation pattern of the low base weak super reach variation pattern is PA2-2, where the special figure variation time is 43000ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, and the special figure variation time is Two types of variation patterns are provided, PA2-3, which is 53000ms and results in a low base weak super reach B reach effect being executed and a miss.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach A, the special symbol variation time is 63000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed. PA2-4, which is executed and misses, the special symbol fluctuation time is 73000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-5, the special symbol fluctuation time is 40000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, and it misses. There are three types of variation patterns PA2-6.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach B, the special symbol variation time is 78000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed. PA2-7 is executed and misses, the special figure fluctuation time is 83000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-8, the special figure fluctuation time is 45000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B and misses. Three types of variation patterns are provided, PA2-9.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach C, the special symbol variation time is 88000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed. PA2-10, which is executed and misses, the special symbol fluctuation time is 93000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed and it becomes a miss. PA2-11, the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B and it misses. There are three types of variation patterns PA2-12.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type of low base strongest super reach is that the special symbol variation time is 98000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed. PA2-13 is a miss, and PA2-14 is a miss because the special symbol fluctuation time is 103000ms, and after the low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, the low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed. , the special figure variation time is 60000ms, and the reach effect of the strongest low base super reach is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a miss PA2- 15 three types of variation patterns are provided.

As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach A, there is one variation pattern of PA2-16 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach A is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach B, there is one variation pattern of PA2-17 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach B is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach C, there is one variation pattern of PA2-18 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach C is executed and misses. It is provided. As a variation pattern with a variation pattern type of high base super reach D, there is one variation pattern of PA2-19 where the special symbol variation time is 30000 ms and the reach effect of high base super reach D is executed and misses. It is provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot variation patterns include non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, as well as the loss variation pattern. Variation patterns of the following variation pattern types are provided: low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, as a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is non-reach, the special symbol variation time is 500ms + 15000ms, and during time-saving control (time-saving state B), any reach One type of variation pattern, PB1-18, in which no performance is performed is provided.

As a variation pattern whose variation pattern type is normal reach, there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-1 in which the special symbol variation time is 20000ms+15000ms and a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

The variation pattern for the low base strong super reach A variation pattern type is that the special symbol variation time is 63000ms+15000ms, and after the low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, the low base strong super reach A reach effect is executed. PB1-2, which is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time is 73000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-3, the special symbol fluctuation time is 40000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. Three types of fluctuation patterns of PB-4 are provided.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach B, the special symbol variation time is 78000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed. PB1-5 is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation time is 83000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-6, the special symbol fluctuation time is 45000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are three types of variation patterns PB1-7.

As for the variation pattern of the variation pattern type low base strong super reach C, the special symbol variation time is 88000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed. PB1-8 is executed and becomes a jackpot, the special symbol variation time is 93000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed and becomes a jackpot. PB1-9, the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000ms + 15000ms, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are three types of variation patterns PB1-10.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type of low base strongest super reach is that the special symbol variation time is 98000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed. PB1-11 which becomes a jackpot when the special symbol fluctuation time is 103000ms + 15000ms, and after the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed and becomes a jackpot PB1-12 , PB1- where the special symbol variation time is 60000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of the strongest low base super reach is executed without executing the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, resulting in a jackpot. There are 13 types of variation patterns.

The variation pattern of the variation pattern type is High Base Super Reach A, the special symbol variation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and there is one type of variation pattern of PB1-14 in which the reach effect of High Base Super Reach A is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. The fluctuation pattern type of high base super reach B is one type of fluctuation pattern of PB1-15 where the special symbol fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of high base super reach B is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. The fluctuation pattern type of high base super reach C is one type of fluctuation pattern of PB1-16 where the special symbol fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of high base super reach C is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided. As a variation pattern of the variation pattern type High Base Super Reach D, there is one variation pattern of PB1-17 where the special symbol variation time is 30000ms + 15000ms and the reach effect of High Base Super Reach D is executed and a jackpot is achieved. It is provided.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/Fluctuation pattern determination table]
The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include a plurality of variable pattern type determination tables for determining variable pattern types according to gaming conditions and variable display results, and variable patterns determined by the variable pattern type determination tables, gaming conditions, and variable display results. Also included are a plurality of variation pattern type determination tables for determining a variation pattern according to the display result and the number of pending memories (number of pending memories for variable display) of special symbols to be variable displayed.

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the gaming state and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read out in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing, and the variation pattern type is determined.

For example, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base weak super reach", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the variation pattern type is determined. If the type is determined as "low base strong super reach A" and the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach B", and the value of random number MR3 is determined as "low base strong super reach B". is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strong super reach C", and when the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 4095, the variation pattern type is determined as "low base strongest super reach" decided on.

In addition, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is a loss, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) and determine the fluctuation pattern for the loss. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the variation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach". If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the variation pattern type is determined as "High Base Super Reach A", and if the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the variation pattern is determined. If the type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach B" and the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach C" and the value of the random number MR3 is 4095. If it is within the range, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, select the loss variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(C), and select the loss variation pattern determination table C. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

In addition, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Low Base Strong Super". If the random number MR3 value is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the variation pattern type is determined to "Low Base Strong Super Reach B" and the random number MR3 value is in the range of 2677 to 3706. If so, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the random value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the variable display result is a loss, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E) and determine the corresponding jackpot variation pattern. The variation pattern type is determined by comparing table B with the value of the random number MR3. If the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the variation pattern type is determined to be "Normal Reach", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the variation pattern type is determined to be "High Base Super Reach". A", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the variation pattern type is determined to "High Base Super Reach B", and if the value of random number MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380 The variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and when the random value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, select the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and The variation pattern type is determined by comparing the values of the random number MR3. If the value of the random number MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the variation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach".

After determining the variable pattern type as described above, depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols to perform variable display (number of reserved variables subject to variable display), Select one of the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in , and compare the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 read out in step 131SGS55 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, if the variable display result is a loss, the gaming state is normal, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 0 to 2, select the loss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8 (A). , the deviation pattern determination table A is compared with the random value MR4 to determine a variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1. If the determined variation pattern type is low base weak super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 199, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2, and the random number MR4 value is 200 to 255. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-3.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, and the random number MR4 value is 89 to 173. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss, the gaming state is normal, and the number of variable display target pending memories is 3, select the loss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-8(B) and select the corresponding A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-4. If the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-7. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-10. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 173, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined variation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the random number MR4 value is within the range of 0 to 88, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, and the random number MR4 value is 89 to 173. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), and select the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing C and the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-3. When the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-17. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-18. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-19.

In addition, if the variable display result is a loss and the gaming state is the time saving state B, select the loss variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the normal state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the random value The fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-2, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-2. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-5, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-5. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-6, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

When the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strong Super Reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-8. If the random value MR4 is within the range of 166, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-9, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined variation pattern type is Low Base Strongest Super Reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the variation pattern is determined to PB1-11, and the value of random number MR4 is 82 to 166. If the random number value MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10(B), and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing B with the value of the random number MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is normal reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach A, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-14. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach B, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-15. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach C, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-16. When the determined variation pattern type is high base super reach D, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-17.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is time saving state B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing with the value of numerical value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, if the random value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Expectations for super reach performance]
When the type of variation pattern and the variation pattern are determined as described above, the expected jackpot is as shown in FIGS. 11-11(A) to 11-11(C). The jackpot expectation of a super reach performance is the percentage of jackpots when the corresponding super reach performance is executed, and the probability of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed is the probability of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. It is a value calculated by dividing by the sum of the percentage of winnings by executing the corresponding super reach effect and the percentage of losing by executing the corresponding super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the reach performances of super reach performed when the gaming state is normal, the reach performances of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B are Since there is no direct jackpot, the expected jackpot is 0% for each, but from the reach effects of low base weak super reach A and low base weak super reach B, other super reaches (low base strong super reach A ~ C, low base weak super reach) may develop into a reach effect, and the expected degree of development from low base weak super reach A to other super reach reach effects is approximately 44%, and from low base weak super reach B to other super reach effects. The level of expectation for the development of Super Reach's Reach production is approximately 68%. The expected level of development of a super reach performance is the rate at which it will develop into other super reach performances when the corresponding super reach performance is executed. The rate of development is determined by the sum of the ratio of executing the relevant super reach performance and developing into another super reach performance, and the ratio of executing the relevant super reach performance and failing without developing into another super reach performance. This is the value calculated by dividing.

Also, among the super reach effects that are executed when the gaming state is normal, the jackpot expectation for the low base strong super reach A reach effect is about 20%, and the jackpot expectation for the low base strong super reach B reach effect is about 20%. The jackpot expectation level is about 25%, the jackpot expectation level for the low base strong super reach C reach effect is about 35%, and the jackpot expectation level for the low base strong super reach reach effect is about 55%. Furthermore, the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of Low Base Strong Super Reach A to C and Low Base Strongest Super Reach is as follows: when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach B, and when developing from Low Base Weak Super Reach B. The expected jackpot is different when executed directly without going through Weak Super Reach A and B, and the expected jackpot for the reach performance of Low Base Strong Super Reach A, which evolved from Low Base Weak Super Reach A, is approximately 19. %, the expected jackpot of the reach effect of low base strong super reach A that evolved from low base weak super reach B is about 20%, the jackpot of the reach effect of low base strong super reach A that was executed directly without going through B The expectation level is about 21%, and the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, which evolved from low base weak super reach A, is about 24%, and the low base strong super reach B, which developed from low base weak super reach B. The expected jackpot for the reach effect of is about 25%, and the expected jackpot for the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, which was executed directly without going through B, was about 27%, which evolved from low base weak super reach A. The jackpot expectation of the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is about 33%, and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, which evolved from low base weak super reach B, is about 35%. The expected jackpot for the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, which was executed directly without any hit, is about 37%, and the jackpot expectation for the reach performance of low base strong super reach, which evolved from low base weak super reach A, is about 53%. The expected jackpot of the low base strongest super reach reach effect developed from low base weak super reach B is approximately 55%, and the jackpot expectation level of the low base strongest super reach reach effect executed directly without going through B is approximately This will be 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(B), the jackpot expectation of the reach performance of high base super reach A executed when the gaming state is time saving state A is about 14%, and the reach performance of high base super reach B The jackpot expectation level of the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 27%, and the jackpot expectation level of the reach performance of the high base super reach D is about 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11(C), the jackpot expectation of the reach effect of high base super reach A executed when the gaming state is variable probability state is about 40%, and the reach effect of high base super reach B is about 40%. The jackpot expectation level is about 45%, the jackpot expectation level for the reach performance of the high base super reach C is about 60%, and the jackpot expectation level for the reach performance for the high base super reach D is about 90%.

As will be described later, in the super reach performance, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display that suggests the jackpot expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance by the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11(A), among the super reaches performed when the gaming state is normal, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed for the low base weak super reach A and B reach effects, and the 3 stars for the expectation level suggestion display in the reach performance of strong base super reach A, 3.5 stars for the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and expectations for the reach performance of low base strong super reach C 4 stars are displayed in the degree suggestion display, and 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation degree suggestion display in the reach performance of the strongest low base super reach. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), 3 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display in the reach performance of high base super reach A that is executed when the gaming state is time saving state A and variable probability state. 3.5 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of high base super reach B, and 4 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the reach performance of high base super reach C. 4.5 stars are displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for D's reach performance.

The same number of stars will be displayed in the expectation level suggestion display for the super reach reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is normal and the super reach reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is variable. However, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation level suggestion display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation level is not the same. If the number of stars displayed in the degree suggestion display is the same, the super reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is in a variable state is greater than the super reach performance that is performed when the gaming state is in the normal state. It is suggested that the reach performance of the reach has a higher jackpot expectation.

In addition, whether it is a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is variable, the expectation level suggestion is displayed. Each time the number of stars displayed increases by 0.5, the implied jackpot expectation increases, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the super Also in the reach effect expectation level suggestion display, the more the number of stars increases, the greater the amount of increase in the suggested jackpot expectation level. Also, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), when the number of stars displayed in the expectation level suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5, the amount of increase in the jackpot expectation level is It is the same whether it is a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a super reach effect that is executed when the gaming state is variable, but the expectation level The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4 and from 4 to 4.5 is when the gaming state is normal. The reach effect of the super reach executed when the gaming state is in a variable probability state is larger than the reach effect of the super reach.

[Production control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIGS. 11-13(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and any value may be set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), determines whether the variable display result is a "miss" or "jackpot" (predetermined result), or the variable display result. ``In the event of a jackpot, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation designation command that specifies the stop (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. be.

Command 9000H is an initialization designation (power-on designation) command for displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from a power outage (power outage) state.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that designates display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot start specification command and the jackpot end specification command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command that the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the first pending memory display area 132SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the second pending memory display area 132SG005U or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command that notifies that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 in a state where the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, the start of the jackpot game. The command D200H is a V winning notification command that notifies that the game ball has passed the V switch 131SG023B1 in the jackpot game state, that is, the game state will be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

The command E1XXH is a remaining time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining number of times of time saving control in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding the relief time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variation number notification command that notifies the remaining probability variation number of times in the probability variation state.

Command F100H is a right-handed player LED lighting notification command that notifies the right-handed player LED 131SG031 to be lit. Command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command that notifies that the right-handed LED 131SG031 is turned off.

The command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of rescue time reductions at the time of recovery, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifying it at the time of power restoration. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), the command for specifying the number of times saving time is Different EXT data is set depending on the digit (4th digit).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are commands 1 command for specifying the number of times saving time saving during recovery that specifies the first digit of the value of the number of saving time saving times. It is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are 2 commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9130H to 913FH are three commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9140H to 914FH are four commands for specifying the number of times the rescue time is shortened during recovery, which specifies the fourth digit of the value of the number of times the rescue time is shortened.

The command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(D), the command 9400H is a rescue time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 times remaining until relief time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 times remaining until the relief time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that there are 127 or more times remaining until relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened is 100, command 9601H is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable display times is 700, the relief Command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number 1 designation command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data holding area]
The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 131SG151C, a game control flag setting section 131SG152, It includes a game control timer setting section 131SG153, a game control counter setting section 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 131SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 131SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reservation memories can be stored as the first special symbol reservation memory (retention memory that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reservation memories can be stored as the second special symbol reservation memory ( A maximum of four pending memories can be stored in the second special figure pending storage section 131SG151B.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

In addition, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103 first inputs random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reservation storage section 131SG151B if the second special symbol reservation memory exists in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6). After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 131SG151B. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR4, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Moreover, CPU103 determines whether the 1st special figure reservation memory exists, when the reservation memory is not memorize|stored in the 2nd special figure reservation memory|storage part 131SG151B. When the first special figure reservation memory exists, after reading the random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A, the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 131SG151A. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR4, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result (if the variable display result is a jackpot, the random number value After executing the judgment of the jackpot type based on MR2), in the variation pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), different variation patterns are determined depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol for which variable display is executed. After determining the type of variation pattern using the type determination table, the variation pattern is further determined using a different variation pattern determination table depending on the determined type of variation pattern, gaming status, number of pending memories, etc.

That is, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory immediately before variable display.

The normal pattern holding storage section 131SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 131SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 131SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 131SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 131SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 131SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

[Production control data holding area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 131SG190 shown in FIG. 11-15(A) includes a production control flag setting section 131SG191, a production control timer setting section 131SG192, a production control counter setting section 131SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 131SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 131SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 131SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 131SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 131SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-15(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 131SG194. The start winning command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designation commands. The storage area, the area for storing the variable category designation command, the area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and the area for storing the pending display flag are associated with the pending memory number, and the first special figure pending memory is created. A storage area (entry) is secured for separately storing the special figure and the second special figure reservation memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas higher up.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 131SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 11-15(C), a storage area similar to the starting winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , is provided.

In this embodiment, if a starting winning occurs when the variable display is not executed and there is no pending memory, a starting winning prize designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a pending memory based on the starting winning, etc. The number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 131SG194A at the time of starting winning. Incidentally, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The storage contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

[Start winning determination process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (131SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (131SGS102). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 131SGS102 (131SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (131SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 131SGS105 (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of special figure reservations stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 131SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section 131SG154. 131SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine a variation pattern including a variable display time of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. By executing the process of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (131SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (131SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (131SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 131SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

[Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 131SGS 112 in FIG. 11-17 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot game state. A determination is made as to whether or not to control. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "jackpot", and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will perform a pre-read notice such as a panel display performance or a pending notice performance, as will be described later. will be executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first specifies the gaming state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3(B) (step 131SGS122). . Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, a symbol designation command transmission setting is made in accordance with the loss (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 131SGS126b). If the gaming state is the normal state, select the loss variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not the time-saving state B, that is, the gaming state is the time-saving state A or the variable probability state, select the loss variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7(B) and proceed to step 131SGS131 ( In step 131SGS126e), if the gaming state is time saving state B, select the losing variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(C) and proceed to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Further, in step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 131SGS130a). When the gaming state is the normal state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (D) is shown, and when the gaming state is the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the table is shown in Figure 11-7 (E). If the jackpot variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. , step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and other (normal reach). For example, if the random number MR3 is a variation pattern type of non-reach, the variation category is determined to be non-reach, and if the random number MR3 is a variation pattern type of normal reach, the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach), and the variation category is determined to be other (normal reach). Numerical MR3 is low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B , high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category may be determined to be super reach. Then, transmission settings are made for a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in FIGS. 11-17(B)) according to the determination result, and the winning random value determination process is ended (step 131SGS132).

Note that the command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

[Game control main processing]
FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when the production control command instructing recovery from a power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of variable displays until the relief time is shortened. Then, a value obtained by converting the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter into hexadecimal is set, and control is performed to send a command for specifying the number of rescue time reduction times at the time of recovery to the effect control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter and send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions is sent, and the remaining variable number until the current rescue time reduction is You will be notified of the number of views.

Note that although this embodiment shows a case where, at the time of restoration from a power outage, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time and a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time are transmitted in addition to the command at the time of recovery, but this is limited to such an embodiment. do not have. For example, the configuration may be such that the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 is set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened and then transmitted. .

Further, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, the area of the rescue time reduction counter is also cleared in the initialization process of step S8. Execute clear processing on the included area.

Further, when the production control command instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "900" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this embodiment, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if a jackpot does not occur even after executing the variable display 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the game enters the time saving state B. It will be controlled. In addition, in this embodiment, since the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the production control command instructing.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (in this embodiment, it is "900"), sets the current value of the rescue time reduction counter to a hexadecimal number, and performs the recovery at the time of recovery. Control is performed to transmit a time saving number designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" for initial setting. However, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed when the RAM clearing process is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and RAM clear processing is executed. When an abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

[Time saving flag, fixed variable flag]
In this embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to be in the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. Note that in the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the time-saving state A is controlled via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (the timing when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, the 110 time-saving control ends and the normal state (timing controlled by).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B is controlled via the relief time saving. This time saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays are executed after the RAM is cleared and the display result does not become a jackpot symbol, or when the display result does not become a jackpot symbol after the end of the jackpot game state in a low probability state. is set when is executed, and is cleared when time saving state B ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during time saving state B, timing when 1100 time saving controls are completed and control returns to normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when a V prize is won in the first round of a jackpot game, when the jackpot game ends, a probability change flag is set as the game state is controlled to a probability change state. This probability variation flag is erased at the timing when the probability variation state ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during the probability variation state, timing when the 110th probability variation control is executed and control returns to the normal state, etc.). For example, if the determination is YES in step 131SGS69A of FIG. 11-20, which will be described later, the variable probability flag is erased based on the fact that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the variable probability state.

[Special design normal processing]
11-19 and FIG. 11-20 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 131SGS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Note that the mode is not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured to do so.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value and a random number for hit determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability variable state is low), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (Step 131SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the random number value is determined as the jackpot type (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (step 131SGS63; No), the process moves to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing special symbol normal processing, the rescue time saving condition (by subtracting the value of the rescue time shortening counter to control the rescue time shortening regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss) is set to "0". The configuration is such that it is possible for this to occur. In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is established based on the fact that the jackpot A has been reached, and the next jackpot has not occurred even after the variable display has finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 900 times). Although the time saving state B is controlled, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the rescue time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot, the control is performed to the time saving state A based on the jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of variable display during the time saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 131SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the variable display (step 131SGS69).

Note that in this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to perform subtraction processing of the time saving number counter before the counting process of the number of variable display times until relief time saving is performed after step 131SGS71. It is not limited to the processing mode. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of variable displays until the time saving time reduction after step 131SGS71 is executed. In this case, for example, if the variable display is a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time reduction counter to "110" (see step 131 SGS172), the value of the time reduction counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the rescue time, the value of the time saving counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be configured to be set to "111" which is one more than the number of time reduction counters.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, when the process of step 131SGS69A is executed and the game is in a variable probability state, the processes after step 131SGS70 (particularly the process of step 131SGSS71) are not performed, so when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, Even if the variable display is executed during extreme battle rush (in this embodiment), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the state is non-probability variation), the process moves to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process moves to step 131SGS84 without executing the processes from step 131SGSS70. If it is set, the process moves to step 131SGSS70, but the process of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process moves to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time saving number counter is 0 at this point, it means that the timing after the time saving state (time saving state B) has already been controlled via the rescue time saving (time saving state B) or the time saving state B This is the timing when the control is returned to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations), and the jackpot that is the trigger for setting the relief time reduction number counter to 900 has not occurred. Further, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the process of step 131SGS71, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues a relief time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 131SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that control is to be made to the time reduction state B at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 131SGS75). ). Then, the process moves to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and sends command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control is performed to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 times (in this embodiment, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). ) (step 131SGS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of variable display times until relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and issues a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction, and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Although this example is illustrated, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time is shortened, and execute an inciting effect or a countdown effect, which will be described later.

For example, if the relief time reduction count counter is set (set to "900") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is such that relief time reduction can occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs the first time. The system is configured to send a command for specifying the number of times of saving time reduction and a command for specifying number of times of saving time reducing 2, and is configured not to send a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving and a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving 2 when saving time is shortened from the second time onwards. Also good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make jackpot A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided to be jackpot B, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3". If it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a loss, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stopping symbol in the stopping symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not operating, a stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed (step 131SGS132). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, clear the game status flags such as the time saving A flag, the time saving B flag, and the variable probability flag (step 131SGS134), clear the time saving number counter (step 131SGS135), and set the time saving flag according to the jackpot type. The transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). The jackpot start designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the relief time saving determination flag is not set, the process advances to step 131SGS147. If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the relief time saving determination flag is cleared and the time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is set is set (step 131SGS141, step 131SGS142). Further, the time saving number counter is set to 1100 corresponding to the time saving state B (relief time saving), and the transmission setting of the time saving state B designation command is performed (step 131SGS143, step 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Moreover, while starting the lighting of the right-handed player lamp 131SG132, the transmission setting of the right-handed player LED lighting notification command is performed (step 131SGS145, step 131SGS146). In addition, the right hit LED lighting notification command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, the symbol confirmation period timer is set to a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, which is the symbol confirmation period, and a symbol confirmation designation command is set to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). Note that the symbol confirmation designation command set for transmission is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a gaming state designation command according to the gaming state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. In addition, the game state designation command set to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing a command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, if the symbol determination period timer is operating in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150), and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out ( Step 131SGS151). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop processing is finished, and if the symbol confirmation engine timer has timed out, it is determined whether the derived stop symbol is a missed symbol or not (step 131SGS152) . If the derived stopping symbol is a losing symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol halting process is ended (step 131SGS153), and the derived stopping symbol is a jackpot symbol. If so, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, state transition in this embodiment will be explained. FIGS. 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region (V switch 131SG023B1), it is controlled to a variable probability state, and the jackpot occurs. When A occurs, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)) is controlled. Although not shown, even if the jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled. In addition, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the probability variable state ends, the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or in the time shortened state) After the end of 110 variable displays in A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low probability / high base state) ) is controlled by

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the state returns to the variable probability state. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state. Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the rescue time is shortened (after the RAM clearing process or after the variable probability state ends, the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or the time is shortened) When the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot after the completion of 110 variable displays in state A), the control is performed to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is shown in which the game is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A. Unlimited. For example, by comparing the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times (in this embodiment, 110 times) corresponding to the case where the game ball did not enter the probability variable area (V switch 131SG023B1), If the remaining number of times is greater, the current time saving state B may be continued as is.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is a disadvantageous game for the player. The state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed.

[Production control process processing/pre-read notice]
As shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, in the prefetch notice setting process of this embodiment, the timing at which a starting winning occurs (the received command buffer at the starting winning shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is stored pending) Active display or pending display can be activated by setting the pending display flag to any of 0 to 2 at the timing when the starting opening winning prize designation command, symbol designation command, fluctuation category command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. The display mode of the active display and the pending display can be used to suggest the proportion of the jackpot gaming state.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach", the pre-read notice is not executed ( Set the value of the pending display flag to "0") at a rate of 95%, and execute the pre-read notice in production pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a rate of 5%. , and execution of the pre-read notice in presentation pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a ratio of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is "other (normal reach)", the pre-read notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to " 90% of the time, it is decided to execute the pre-read notice in production pattern α (set the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a 10% rate, and Execution of the preview in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach", the pre-read notice is not executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0"). 70% of the time, the execution of the pre-read notice in production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") is decided at a 20% rate, and the pre-read notice is set to "1". Execution in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2") is determined at a rate of 10%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is a "jackpot", the non-execution of the pre-read notice (setting the value of the pending display flag to "0") is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pre-read notice is is executed in production pattern α (setting the value of the pending display flag to "1") at a rate of 30%, and the pre-read notice is executed in production pattern β (setting the value of the pending display flag to "2"). (to be set) at a rate of 65%.

After executing the pre-read notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the display update process for the remaining number of times the relief time reduction etc. are reached (step 131SGS163), and the relief time reduction arrival notification performance execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. do. In the pending display/active display update process, the process starts displaying the pending display or active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, and the active display is deleted from the active display area 131SG005F at the end timing of the variable display. Processing and processing to hide or start displaying the pending display and active display according to the progress of the performance during the variable display are executed. In the display update process for the remaining number of rescue time reductions, the value of the remaining number of rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 is updated each time the variable display starts, and In accordance with the progress of the current performance, processing to hide or start displaying the remaining number of rescue time reduction attainment display 131SG005Z is executed. In the relief time saving arrival notification performance execution process, from the end timing of the variable display when the number of variable displays has reached 900 times, a process for executing a relief time saving arrival notification effect that notifies that the time saving state B has been controlled is executed. .

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, copy the various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS602). In addition, the first special figure pending memory (various command data stored in correspondence with buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A is shifted upward one by one. (Step 131SGS603). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" are erased because there is no destination to shift them to.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not on in step 131SGS601, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, copy the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A to the active display buffer 131SG194B. (131SGS605). In addition, the second special figure pending memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning command buffer 131SG194A is shifted upward one by one. (Step 131SGS606). Note that at this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" are erased because there is no destination to shift them to.

Incidentally, if the second special figure variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process is ended.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are determined according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-26, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach is off), the stop symbols are set to "124" or "578" at a rate of 100%. ” and other “non-reach” combinations (non-reach mode, non-reach mode). In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is off), the stop symbol will be a combination of "reach" with an even number such as "242" or "676" at a rate of 95% ( Even number reach format, even number reach is off format), and a 5% ratio of "reach" combinations with odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach format, odd number reach is off format) do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (super reach is off), the stop symbol will be "reach" with an even number such as "242" or "676" at a rate of 80%. The combination (even number reach mode, even number reach is off) is decided, and 19% of the combinations are "reach" with odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" and "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach is off) The combination of "reach" with seven symbols such as "767" and "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach off mode) is determined at a rate of 1%.

Then, if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the stop symbol is determined to be a "reach" combination (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) with an even number such as "222" or "666" at a rate of 20%. Then, 50% of the time, the combination of "reach" with odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" and "555" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach jackpot mode) is decided, and 30% of the time, the combination of "777" is decided. A combination of "reach" with 7 symbols ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) is determined.

In other words, the expectation of jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol and it is a reach, and from then on, when it is a reach with an odd number symbol other than "7", when it is a reach with an even number symbol, and when it is a non-reach. The jackpot expectation level is set to decrease in order (Jackpot expectation level due to decorative symbols: Reach with "7" symbol > Reach with odd symbols other than "7" > Reach with even numbers > No reach). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decorative symbol is a reach mode, and which symbol is a reach mode.

In addition, in this example, a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on the case where the combination of even numbers of decorative symbols is a reach and the case where a combination of odd numbers is a reach, etc., has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the expected level of jackpot may be the same no matter which combination of decorative symbols becomes a reach, or the expected level of jackpot when a reach is achieved depending on the size of the number indicated by the decorative pattern. may be different.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute a preview performance during variable display that indicates the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display. A variable display preview performance determination process (step 131SGS609) is executed to determine the.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table (performance control pattern) according to the variable pattern, the gaming state, the variable display result, and the determination result of the variable display notice performance determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer. Start (step 131SGS611).

Note that a production control pattern is set in each process table. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound control for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operations of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (131SGS612). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (131SGS613). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (131SGS614). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

[About production during variable display]
When the production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, the production control CPU 120 sets the variable display start setting of the subsequent step S171. In the process, based on the variable display result such as the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, the special pattern or decorative pattern specified by the variable display result specification command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), Decide on the variable display mode of the decorative design, whether or not to execute the reach effect, its mode, execution start timing, etc., set the effect control pattern that reflects the decision results, etc., and set the effect control pattern based on the set effect control pattern. Controls variable display of symbols, reach effect, etc.

[About production control pattern]
As shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the production control pattern is set for each of the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 to PA2-19, and PB1-1 to PB1-18.

As performance control patterns corresponding to the variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set in which the decorative symbols do not become a reach mode and are out of reach mode. The fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are fluctuation patterns specified in the normal state, PA1-3 is the fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and PA1-4 is the fluctuation pattern specified in the time saving state B. This is a variation pattern selected in , and in the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative pattern ends is set to be different depending on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. ing.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance ("Normal" in the figure) in which the decorative pattern is in a reach mode is executed, and then the reach is off. The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern specified in the normal state, time saving state A, and variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-2, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. It is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. It is set.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-4, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach A reach performance ("Low base strong A" in the figure) is executed. ”) and then the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-5, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-6, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-7, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance (in the figure, the low base strong B ”) and then the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-8, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strong reach B is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-9, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-10, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-11, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strong reach C is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-13, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the figure) ) is executed, and then a pattern is set in which the reach is off. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14, after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, and then the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, and then the reach is off. A pattern has been set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-15, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach performance, the low base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then the reach is off.

The variation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all variation patterns specified in the normal state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach reach performance, the high base reach A reach performance ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, a pattern is set in which after the normal reach reach performance, the high base reach B reach performance ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of normal reach, the reach performance of high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is off. There is.

The fluctuation patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all fluctuation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1, a pattern is set in which a normal reach performance is executed and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-3, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach performance A is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12, after the normal reach reach performance, the low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then the low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, and then the jackpot occurs. A pattern is set. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a low base strongest super reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

The variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all variation patterns selected in the normal state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach A reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach B reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach C reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved. As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after a normal reach performance, a high base reach D reach performance is executed, and then a jackpot is achieved.

The fluctuation patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all fluctuation patterns selected in the time saving state A and the variable probability state.

As a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-18, a pattern is set in which a jackpot is achieved without executing a normal reach or super reach performance. The fluctuation pattern PB1-18 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving state B.

[About the flow of production during variable display]
FIG. 11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in the normal state. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, the decoration To control a pattern so that it is out of reach mode without being in a reach mode.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, Execute the reach effect of normal reach where the symbol is in the reach mode, and then control so that if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach will be out of reach, and If the fluctuation pattern is PB1-1, control is performed so that it is a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-2, the production control CPU 120 executes the normal reach production. After execution, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a miss is reported as a performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and the reach is controlled so that the reach is missed.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-3, the production control CPU 120 executes the normal reach production. After execution, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and after that, a miss is reported as a performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and control is performed so that the reach is missed.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 4, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-2, the low base A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 5, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-3, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach A, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach A if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-6. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-4, a jackpot will be announced as the production result of the low base strong super reach A reach production. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 7, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-5, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 8, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-6, the low base will be A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach B, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach B if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-9. Control is performed so that a miss is announced as the performance result and the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-7, a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach B reach performance. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 10, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, and the reach will be controlled so that it will be a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-8, the low base A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach C, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2- If it is 11, a miss is announced as a result of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, and the reach is controlled so that it is a miss, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-9, the low base is A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of strong super reach C, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, and then execute the reach effect of low base strong super reach C if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-12. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-10, a jackpot is announced as the production result of the low base strong super reach C reach production. and control it so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach A, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command becomes PA2-13. If so, a miss will be announced as a result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and control will be performed so that the reach will be missed, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-11, the low base strongest super A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of the reach, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base weak super reach B, further execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-14 If so, a miss will be announced as the result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and control will be performed so that the reach will be missed, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-12, the low base strongest super A jackpot is announced as a result of the reach performance of the reach, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, the normal reach After executing the reach effect of , execute the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the result of the reach effect of low base strongest super reach If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-13, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach performance of the strongest super reach on a low base, and a jackpot will be announced. Control so that

In this way, under normal conditions, a jackpot is announced as a result of the reach effect of low base weak super reach A and B, and it is not controlled by the jackpot and goes through the reach effect of low base weak super reach A and B. Low base strong super reach A to C executed as follows, Low base strongest reach, Low base weak super reach A to C executed without going through the reach effect of B, Low base strongest reach Only in the reach performance of Super Reach, a jackpot is announced as a result of the performance, and the jackpot is controlled.

FIG. 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of performance during variable display in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA1-3, the decoration To control a pattern so that it is out of reach mode without being in a reach mode.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1. To do this, execute the normal reach effect, and then control so that if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, the reach will be off, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is PB1-1, it is controlled so that it becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16 or PB1-14. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach A reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-16, the high base super reach A reach effect is executed. A loss is notified as the result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-14, a jackpot will be announced as the result of the reach performance of high base super reach A. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17 or PB1-15. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach B reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-17, the high base super reach B reach effect is executed. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-15, a jackpot will be announced as a result of the reach production of high base super reach B. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 or PB1-16. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach C reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-18, the high base super reach C reach effect is executed. If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-16, a hit will be announced as a result of the reach production of high base super reach C. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19 or PB1-17. After executing the normal reach reach effect, execute the high base super reach D reach effect, and then if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-19, the high base super reach D reach effect is executed. A loss is announced as the result of the performance, and control is performed so that the reach is off, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-17, a jackpot will be announced as the result of the reach performance of high base super reach D. It is controlled so that it is announced and becomes a jackpot.

In this way, in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the performance results of jackpot or miss are announced in the normal performance or the reach performances of high base super reach A to D that are controlled after the normal performance, and then the performance is controlled to be a jackpot or miss. Therefore, another reach effect is not executed from the high base super reach A to D that are controlled after the normal effect.

FIG. 11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in time saving state B. The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PA1-4, the decorative pattern is in reach. Control is performed so that the reach is out of reach without becoming a problem.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PB1-18, the decorative pattern is in reach. It is controlled so that it becomes a jackpot without becoming a pattern.

In this way, in the time saving state B, the control is made such that in the case of a loss and the case of a jackpot, there is always a non-reach.

[About super reach performance]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance during variable display. As mentioned above, the reach performance of super reach is performed in the normal state, low base weak super reach A, B, low base strong super reach A to C, low base strongest super reach reach performance, time saving state A, definite variable state Includes reach effects of high base super reach A to D performed in . In addition, below, the normal reach and super reach reach effects may be simply referred to as normal reach effect and super reach effect, respectively, and are referred to as low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, and low The reach effects of Strong Base Super Reach B, Low Base Strong Super Reach C, and Low Base Strongest Super Reach are simply Low Base Weak Reach A Effect, Low Base Weak Reach B Effect, Low Base Strong Reach A Effect, and Low Base Strong Reach, respectively. These are sometimes referred to as B effect, low base strong reach C effect, and low base strongest reach effect, and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D are respectively Sometimes they are simply called high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach performance.

The super reach performance executes a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, as well as the performance results that will ultimately lead to a jackpot (for low base weak super reach A and B, low base strong super reach A to C, This is a performance that informs you of whether the low base will develop into the strongest super reach or whether it will fail.

In addition, a title is set for each type of super reach performance, and a super reach performance has a title display part where the title of the super reach performance is displayed, and a performance result is announced after the title display part. It consists of an introductory part up to and including.

[About variations of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this embodiment, as a variation pattern for executing the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance, after the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance is executed, it develops into another super reach performance. Although the configuration does not include a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without any development, after the execution of the low base weak reach effect, there is a variation pattern PB1-JA that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect, and a low base weak reach effect B effect. After execution, it may be configured to include fluctuation patterns PB1-JB that become a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects.

In such a configuration, the production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, After executing the normal reach performance, execute the low base weak reach A performance, notify the jackpot as a result of the low base weak reach A performance, control so that it becomes a jackpot, and execute the first variable display start command or When the second variable display start command is received and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-JB, after executing the normal reach effect, the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and the low base weak reach B effect is executed. A jackpot is announced as a result of the production, and control is performed so that the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, either it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance, or it will develop into another super reach performance. Therefore, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance, either it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance, or it will develop into another super reach performance.

In addition, after the execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B, a configuration may be adopted that does not include a variation pattern that develops into other super reach performances. In such a configuration, in the introduction part of the low base weak reach performances A and B, , it will be announced whether or not there will be a jackpot as a result of the performance.

Also, in the following embodiments, a configuration may be applied that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of the low base weak reach effects A and B; in this case, , Low base weak reach A so that the jackpot expectation level of low base strong reach A to C productions and low base strongest reach production is higher than the jackpot expectation level of low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach A production. , a variation pattern that results in a loss after execution of performance B, and a determination ratio of a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after execution of low base weak reach performance A and B is determined.

[About low base weak reach A production]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A effect is executed, and FIG. 11-33 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the relative As shown in Figure 11-32 (a1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command starts changing at a predetermined timing. ) is stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, and a normal reach effect is executed in which the reach mode is set. After that, operation promotion effect A, which will be described later, is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F. After executing a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining , the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is started.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (background of the daytime sky) in which the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash effect is changing is different from the white flash effect. After that, it switches to the background of the low base weak reach A effect (corridor background), and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in reach mode before the white flash effect is larger than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash effect. Switches to reach mode with small decorative pattern (small).

As shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, part of the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance “Catch the Bakuchu!” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when the title is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed in the fixed position, and the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" that was displayed in the fixed position. Catch me!'' disappears and the title ends until it switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), a part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed from the left side of the display area in the reach mode. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), appear in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), then move the entire title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" toward the fixed position and stop at the fixed position. let When the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. be done.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach A production. During the start period, even if the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", part of the title character "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be the decoration on the left and right side of the reach mode. It appears in a manner that overlaps with the decorative pattern (small) on the left side of the design (small), and when the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" is stationary in the fixed position, the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" A portion is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the ready-to-reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), an enemy character ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' appears behind the title character ``Catch the Bakuchu!'' displayed in a fixed position. ``Bakuchu'' appears, and below the title character ``Catch Bakchu!'', a subtitle with the line ``If you can, try to catch it!'' is displayed, depending on the scene where the enemy character ``Bakuchu'' appears. The audio of the lines displayed as subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-33, no sound for reading the title is output. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11- 48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the display area. Move the title to the right side until all the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-33, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, the expectation level suggestion display described later is not displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect is the same as the background of the title display part (corridor background), and from the title display part The scene of the video that started (the scene where the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) continues throughout the introduction part, and the line that was displayed in the title display part, "Catch it if you can!", continues to be displayed. , the speech voices being output from the speakers 8L and 8R are also continuously output. After that, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Catch it if you can!" displayed in the title display part is finished, the next part of the introductory part is started. The scene changes to a video scene (a scene in which the ally character ``Mumemu'' chases the enemy character ``Bakuchu'').

The production control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern is specified by a variation pattern specification command that develops into any of the low base weak super reach A, the low base strong super reach A to C, and the low base strongest super reach. After executing a falling effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the part, it is developed into one of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect. . On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base weak super reach A, the ally character "Yumemu" will catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. , the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance is notified to the effect that it is not a jackpot, and then a decorative pattern indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display the (large) combination.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that becomes a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak super reach A performance by the fluctuation pattern specification command. After executing the low base weak reach A effect, if a variation pattern is specified that will result in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect, at the end of the introduction part, the ally character ``Yumemu'' will attack the enemy character ``Bakugo''. "Chu" is caught and the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance is a jackpot (controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified by a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a designated type of jackpot is displayed.

[About low base weak reach B production]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and FIG. 11-35 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, As shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. , stops at the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R and executes a normal reach effect in a reach mode. After that, operation promotion effect A to be described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F After executing a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining , the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect is started.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (background of the daytime sky) in which the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash effect is fluctuating is different from the white flash effect. After that, the background changes to the low base weak reach B effect (the background where the character "Yumemu" and the character "Boingo" face each other from side to side with a hockey table in between), and the decorative pattern that was displayed in the reach mode before the white flash effect is displayed. (Large) switches to the reach mode of the decorative pattern (small), which is smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large), after the white flash effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from 2000 until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are displayed in the fixed position, and the display of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" that was displayed in the fixed position. This includes the title end period until it disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period. In the title start period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed from the left side of the display area to the left and right sides of the reach mode. The decorative pattern (small) is made to appear in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small), and then the entire title character ``Bilibili Hockey Showdown'' is moved toward a fixed position and kept stationary at the fixed position. When the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base weak reach B production During the start period, even if the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be replaced by the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. When the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" appears in the reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small).

The production control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are displayed below the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown". '' is displayed in response to the scene in which the left and right players are facing each other, and the subtitles ``Let's play hockey! We won't lose!'' are displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, no sound for reading the title is output. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-35). 48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B production, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move it until everything disappears. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35, in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, the expectation level suggestion display described later is not displayed.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect is the background of the title display part (the character ``Yumemu'' and the character ``Yumemu'' with a hockey table in between. The scene in the video that starts from the title display part (the scene where the friendly character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other left and right) continues throughout the introduction part. In addition, the line "Let's play hockey! We won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line that is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R continues to be output. After that, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b7) to (b8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Let's play hockey! We won't lose!" that was displayed in the title display part ends, the introductory part starts. The scene switches to the next video scene (the scene where the ally character "Mumemu" hits the puck back).

The production control CPU 120 is introduced when a variation pattern that develops into any of the low base weak super reach B, the low base strong super reach A to C, or the low base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command. After executing a falling effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the part, it is developed into one of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, and a low base strongest reach effect. . On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base weak super reach B, the ally character "Yumemu" will fight against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introduction part. Unable to win, a performance result indicating that it is not a jackpot is notified as a performance result of the low base weak reach B performance, and thereafter, the image display device 5 shows the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination of decorative designs (large).

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that becomes a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach B performance by the fluctuation pattern specification command. After execution, if a variable pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects is specified, at the end of the introductory part, the ally character "Yumemu" wins the battle with the enemy character "Boingo" and receives a low The performance result of the base weak reach B performance is a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified of the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About low base strong reach A production]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low base strong reach A effect, and FIG. 11-37 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach A production. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach A production.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance starts. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1'). do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance is the same as the prologue display period before the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance “Catch the Bakushu together!” , the title start period from when a part of the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" until it is displayed in the fixed position in the display area of the image display device 5, and the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" The title display period during which “Catch the Bakuchu!” is displayed in a fixed position, and the title end period until the display of the title character “Two people catch the Bakuchu!”, which was displayed in a fixed position, disappears and switches to the introductory part. ,including.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, only the falling effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) will switch to the background of the low base strong reach A production (the background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway). , the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Additionally, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the transition from the selection effect occurs, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed at the end of the prologue display period. After that, the background changes to a low base strong reach A production (background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway). The display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), a part of the title characters "Let's catch Bakuchu together!" is displayed from the left side of the display area. Out of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, make it appear in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), and then move the entire title character "Two people catch Bakuchu!" toward the fixed position. and hold it in place. When the title character "Two people catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Two people catch the Bakuchu!" appears on both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach A production During the start period, even if the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Two people catch Bakushu!" will be displayed in the reach mode. Out of the left and right decorative patterns (small), it appears in a manner that overlaps with the left decorative pattern (small), and when the title character "Two people catch the Bakushu!" remains in the fixed position, the title character "2" appears. A portion of "Catch the Bakuchu with people!" is displayed in a manner that overlaps both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people catch the Bakushu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach A production, first, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" is displayed with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The title is kept displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title, as shown in FIG. 11-37. Next, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), below the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" there is a smaller size than the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" Display the expectation level suggestion display. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title characters displayed in the fixed position ``Catch the Bakuchu with two people!'' are displayed in the fixed position. Move the title from to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display as well as the title characters are also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines is not output from 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect is the background after the title start period in the title display part (the ally character "Yumemu" in the hallway). and the background where "Jam" is displayed), and the video scene that starts from the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) continues throughout the introduction part. do. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introduction part starts, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears and the lines corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears. A subtitle saying "Catch it if you can!" is displayed, and the audio of the dialogue displayed in the subtitle is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A production, the sound that reads the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, but the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the production control CPU 120 changes the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" to enemy characters at the end of the introduction part. Catch the "bakuchu" and notify the effect that it is a jackpot as a result of the low base strong reach A effect (that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then specify the variable display result on the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the command is displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after a low base strong super reach A, at the end of the introduction part, the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Jam" will ”, the performance result of the low base strong reach A performance is notified that it is not a jackpot, and after that, the image display device 5 shows that the reach of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is off. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach A performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" and the title text "Two people catch the Bakushu!" with a smaller size than the expected level. A suggestion display is displayed. The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In a normal state in which the low base strong reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reservations and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, since the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part also suggests the expectation level by multiple objects, the pending display and active display and the expectation level suggestion display are displayed at the same time in the title display part. In this case, there is a possibility that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation level suggestion display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating the level of expectation.

In addition, since it is almost impossible for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening under normal conditions, if the number of pending special drawings for the first special drawing is at the maximum (4) and is being displayed variablely, the pending display and active display will be displayed. Up to 5 objects may be displayed, which corresponds to the number of objects that indicate the highest level of expectation in the level of expectation suggestion display, but the title display part of the low base strong reach A production. In this case, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, It is possible to prevent objects displayed in the pending display and active display from being confused with objects in the expectation level suggestion display and being mistakenly recognized as having the highest expectation level in the expectation level suggestion display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed in the prologue display period before the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part, but the prologue display period starts. From time to time, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending display and active display are hidden, and even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent objects forming the pending display and active display from being mistakenly recognized as objects in the expectation level suggestion display.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center) during the prologue display period. , After displaying the ally character "Yumemu" on the layer in front of the pending display and active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged. Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, by displaying the character on a layer in front of the pending display and active display and enlarging the display until the entire display area is filled, the character is displayed before the entire display area is filled. The configuration is such that the hold display and active display are not displayed, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode. By executing the display performance, the configuration may be such that the pending display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. Can be done.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c4), the title text ``Catch the Bakuchu with two people!'' is placed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. It remains displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c5) to (c6), a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Let's catch the Bakushu together!" Display. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11- As shown in 36 (c6), by changing the color of the three star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach A effect from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach A effect is created. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested.

When developing from a low base weak reach A production or a low base weak reach B production to a low base strong reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-38 (x1) to (x2), during the prologue display period, the ally character " Until the entire display area is filled with the enlarged display of "Yume Yume", if there is a pending number remaining, the pending display and active display will be displayed, and the expectation level suggestion display will be hidden in the subsequent title display part. As shown in Figure 11-38 (x3) to (x4), without going through the step of displaying the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" in a fixed position, the title text "Two people catch Bakushu!" is displayed. !” At the same time, five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed, and then the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, and the objects that make up the pending display and active display are Immediately after the display is started, objects constituting the expectation level suggestion display are displayed, and there is a possibility that the pending display and active display are confused with the expectation level suggestion display. On the other hand, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation level suggestion display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation level suggestion display is hidden during the title display period, and the title text "Two people "Catch Bakushu!" remains displayed in the fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and then a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakushu!", so the display is on hold. Also, it is possible to prevent the active display and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach B production]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B effect is executed, and FIG. 11-40 is a diagram showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect. This is a timing chart.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach B production. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach B performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect starts. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, in the case of direct development from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1'). do. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect is the prologue display period before the title characters "Gekisha Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect are displayed, and the display part of the image display device 5. The title start period from when part of the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period during which the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in the fixed position, and the fixed position This includes the end period of the title until the title character "Gekken Robo Battle" that was displayed on the screen disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B performance), the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right of the reach mode While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, only the falling effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" After the prologue display period ends, the background (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) will be changed to the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach B production (the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo") The pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" will disappear after the prologue display period ends. . Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the selection effect is transitioned, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is changed to the end of the prologue display period. Thereafter, the background is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach B effect (a background in which the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed at the left and right positions). In addition, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B production, part of the title characters "Gekishock Robo Battle" is displayed from the left side of the display area to the decorations on the left and right sides of the reach mode, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4). The symbol (small) is made to appear in such a manner that it overlaps with the decorative symbol (small) on the left side, and then the entire title character ``Geki-Shin Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position and held still at the fixed position. When the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title of the low base strong reach B production During the start period, even if the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Gekushin Robo Battle" will be displayed as the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode. ) appears in a manner that overlaps with the decorative pattern (small) on the left side, and when the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" is stationary in the fixed position, part of the title character "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" appears as a decoration on the left and right side of the reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both of the small design.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B production, first, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekken Robo Battle" were displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle". As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). ).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishock Robo Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area. Move the title characters until all of them disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display as well as the title characters are also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (Figures 11-47 and 11 -48). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines is not output from 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (allied characters "Jam" and "Nana"). ” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed on the left and right positions), at the start of the introduction part, the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect changes from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part. (The background shows the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" confronting each other in the town). In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B production, the enemy character "Robo" faces the front from the back position when viewed from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face from the front position when viewed from the player. The video begins with the two facing each other with their backs turned. At this time, the enemy character "Robo" located in the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" located in the front as seen from the player, are not displayed during the title display period of the title display part. The characters ``Gekisha Robo Battle'' are displayed in a position that overlaps with the original position. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the introduction part starts, the dialogue "Losing The subtitle "No!" is displayed, and the audio of the dialogue displayed in the subtitle is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B production, the sound that reads the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R in the title display part, but the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed, and the sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, the subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

The production control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach B by a variation pattern specification command, and in the final stage of the introduction part, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" change to the enemy character " ``Robo'', the performance result of a jackpot as a result of the low base strong reach B performance (controlling to a jackpot game state) is announced, and then a variable display is displayed on the image display device 5. A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the result specification command is displayed. On the other hand, if the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the low base strong super reach B, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" will be connected to the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introduction part. The player loses the battle, and the result of the low base strong reach B performance is notified to the effect that it is not a jackpot, and thereafter, the image display device 5 shows the type of reach specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination of decorative designs (large).

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach B performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a size smaller than the title characters "Geki-Shin Robo Battle". The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5), and the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach B effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expected If the degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistaken as objects of the expectation degree suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating an expectation level indication.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low Even when the base strong reach B effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level may be mistakenly recognized as having the maximum level in the expectation level suggestion display. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the pending display and the active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period in the low base strong reach B performance, and even in such a configuration, the objects that make up the pending display and the active display are It is possible to prevent the object from being mistakenly recognized as a suggestive display object.

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d2) to (d3), a background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center) during the prologue display period. , After displaying the ally character "Yumemu" on the layer in front of the pending display and active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged. Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled are hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, by executing the monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the displayed pending display and active display are deleted, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d4), the title character "Gekisha Robo Battle" is displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Gekisha Robo Battle." At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects forming the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 39 (d6), by changing the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strong reach B effect from black to gold among the 5 star-shaped objects, the low-base strong reach This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot in performance B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strong reach C production]
The low base strong reach C performance has many points in common with the low base strong reach B performance described above, so the drawing for the low base strong reach C performance will be omitted.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. , develop into a low base strong reach C performance. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strong super reach C is specified by the variation pattern specification command, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach effect, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be performed. Execute and develop into a low base strong reach C performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect starts. In the falling effect, while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the low base After switching from the background at the end of the weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance to the background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is moved to the initial position. rise to.

In addition, when directly developing from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance after executing the selection performance described later. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C performance is the prologue display period before the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach C performance are displayed, and the title character "Daigeki Earthquake" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when a part of "Robo Battle" is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" are displayed in the fixed position, and the title that was displayed in the fixed position Including the end period of the title until the display of the characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" disappears and the switch to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying a prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C performance that has transitioned from the falling performance, a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center), a display of decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, and the first reserved memory are displayed. While maintaining the pending display and active display of the display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the ally character "Yumemu" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center). , after displaying on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C performance that has transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C performance), the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. While maintaining the display, the ally character ``Yumemu'' is displayed in a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection performance, and then the ally character ``Yumemu'' is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled.

After the end of the prologue display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title start period.

During the prologue display period that transitions from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is replaced by the prologue display. After the period ends, the background will change to a low base strong reach B production (background where the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions), and the ally character "Yumemu" The pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period when the selection effect is transitioned, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yumemu" is changed to the end of the prologue display period. Afterwards, the background is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low base strong reach C production (a background in which the friendly characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions). In addition, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right sides of the ready-to-reach mode is maintained even after the end of the prologue display period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

During the title start period for the low base strong reach C production, a part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" will be displayed from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, the entire title character ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' is moved toward a fixed position, and then stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, a part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, but during the title start period, the reach mode Even if the left and right decorative patterns (small) are numbers from "1" to "9", a part of the title character "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" is the left side of the left and right decorative patterns (small) in reach mode. It appears in a manner that overlaps with the design (small), and when the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" is stationary in the fixed position, a part of the title character "Daigekisha Robo Battle" appears in the left and right decorative design (small) of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C production, first, the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" remain displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden for a predetermined period of time. , the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle." The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' displayed at a fixed position are moved from the regular position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear. Furthermore, the expectation level suggestion display as well as the title characters are also moved to the right side of the display area until they all disappear. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, unlike the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed, and the audio of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance after the end of the title end period. The background at the beginning of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production is the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Big Robot" are displayed on the left and right positions). At the beginning of the introduction part, the background for the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect (the background of the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" and the enemy character The scene changes to a background scene where the "Big Robot" confronts each other in the town. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach C production, the enemy character "Big Robot" is facing forward on the back side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" are on the back side on the front side as seen from the player. The video starts with a scene where the two face off against each other. At this time, the enemy character "Big Robot" located in the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" located in the front as seen from the player, are displayed during the title display period of the title display part. , the title characters ``Great Earthquake Robo Battle'' are displayed in a position that overlaps with the regular position where they were displayed. In addition, after the introduction part starts, the subtitles ``I will never lose!'' are displayed, corresponding to the scene where the friendly characters ``Mumemu'' and ``Nana'' confront the enemy character ``Big Robot'', and the speaker 8L, The audio of the lines displayed in subtitles is output from 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part are not displayed and are output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is now output according to the character.

When the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the production control CPU 120 changes the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" to enemy characters at the end of the introduction part. After winning the battle with the "big robot", the performance result of the low base strong reach C performance is announced as a jackpot (controlling to a jackpot game state), and then on the image display device 5, A combination of decorative patterns (large) representing the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after a low base strong super reach C, at the end of the introduction part the ally characters "Yumemu" and "Nana" '', the low base strong reach C effect is notified that it is not a jackpot, and then the image display device 5 shows that the reach of the type specified by the variable display result specification command is off. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating .

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the low base strong reach C performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" as well as an expectation level suggestion display in a smaller size than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robo Battle." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object. The degree of expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state where the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expected If the degree suggestion display and the expectation degree suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistaken as objects of the expectation degree suggestion display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents an object from being mistakenly recognized as an object indicating an expectation level indication.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display, the low Even when the base strong reach C effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and the expectation level may be mistakenly recognized as having the maximum level in the expectation level suggestion display. You can prevent it from being put away.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the pending display and the active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period in the low base strong reach C performance, and even in such a configuration, the objects that make up the pending display and the active display are It is possible to prevent the object from being mistakenly recognized as a suggestive display object.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach B effect, during the prologue display period, the background dedicated to the falling effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the ally character "Dream" on a layer in front of the pending display and the active display. After displaying "Yume", the ally character "Yume" is enlarged and displayed until the display area is completely filled, and the pending display and the display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled due to the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume" are Since the active display is hidden after the prologue display period ends, the pending display and the active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strong reach C effect, by executing the monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, it is possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the displayed pending display and active display are deleted, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C production, the title text "Great Earthquake Robo Battle" remains displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden for a predetermined period of time, and then the title text A display indicating the level of expectation will be displayed below "Great Earthquake Robo Battle". At this time, at the initial stage, all of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then among the five star-shaped objects, the low base strong reach C effect is displayed. By changing the color of the corresponding four star-shaped objects from black to gold, the expectation level of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the low-base strongest reach effect, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. It is.

The production control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to the low base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 120 If the pattern is a variable pattern that develops from normal reach to low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, perform the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance, Developing low base and strongest reach performance. In addition, when a variation pattern corresponding to the lowest base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, and if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that directly develops from the normal reach, after the normal reach effect is executed, the selection effect described below will be executed. Execute and develop into the strongest reach performance with low base.

When developing from a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a falling performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the final stage of the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance. After execution, the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect will start. In the falling effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e1), the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are displayed, the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are displayed. While maintaining the hold display and active display, after switching from the background at the end of the low base weak reach A production or the low base weak reach B production to the background dedicated to the falling production (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the movable object 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

Furthermore, in the case of direct development from the normal reach, the performance control CPU 120 starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance after executing the selection performance described later, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1'). . Details of the selection effect will be described later, but in the selection effect, at the start of the selection effect, the hold display and active display of the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, part of the title characters of the low-base strongest reach effect, ``Six people catch Bakushu!'', is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period from when it is displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position, the title display period in which the title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" is displayed in the fixed position, and the title text that was displayed in the fixed position This includes the end period of the title until the display of "Six people catch Bakuchu!" disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period for the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e3), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode is maintained, and the title text ``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'' !” is displayed at an enlarged size such that only some of the characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the entire display area is displayed with a portion of the title characters ``Six people catch Bakuchu!''. Further, the part of the title character "Six people catch Bakuchu!" that is displayed in the display area appears in a manner that overlaps with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "Six people to catch Bakushu!" gradually shrinks until all characters in the title text "Six people catch Bakushu!" are displayed. The reduced size title text ``Six people to catch Bakuchu!'' is made to stand still in a fixed position so that it can be seen in the area. When the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is reduced to a fixed position and remains in place, a part of the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' with the strongest low-base reach effect is in reach mode. It is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small).

As the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode, one of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed, but the title starts with the strongest reach effect on a low base. During the period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" that appears in enlarged size will be reached. The title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' appears in a manner that overlaps with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the aspect, and is displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position. It is displayed in a manner that overlaps both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period after the transition from the falling effect, the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' The background dedicated to the falling effect (background with patterns radiating out from the center) that was displayed before being displayed in its full state has been changed to a part of the enlarged title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" While the display area is completely filled, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the strongest low-base reach effect (background where 6 friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right positions) When the title character ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the lowest base strongest reach effect is displayed as the background. In addition, during the title start period after transitioning from the falling effect, a portion of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' was displayed before the display area was completely filled. The pending display and the active display are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Six people catch Bakuchu!". Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

In addition, during the title start period when the selection effect was transitioned, a part of the enlarged title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" was displayed before the display area was completely filled. The selection result image of the selection effect (in this case, the title image of the low-based strongest reach effect) is displayed in such a way that the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' While this is happening, the background changes to the title display for the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which 6 ally characters and the enemy character ``Bakuchu'' are displayed on the left and right positions), and the title text ``Six people make Bakuchu'' appears. Catch it!'' is reduced to a fixed position, and a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as the background. Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending display and active display that were hidden in the selection performance are maintained hidden.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Six people catch the Bakushu!" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the low-based strongest reach production, first, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title character "6 people catch the Bakushu!" is set with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The title is kept displayed at that position for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), below the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!", there is a message smaller than the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!" Display the expectation level suggestion display. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title text "Catch Bakushu with 6 people!" displayed in a reduced size and in a fixed position. , a portion of the title text ``Six people catch Bakushu!'' is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. In this case, instead of being displayed in an enlarged manner, which is the opposite of the case where the title text "Six people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title text "Six people catch the Bakushu!" is displayed in an enlarged manner during the title start period. Catch the Bakushu!'' is reduced and displayed in a different manner from the reverse. Expand until the entire display area is filled. In other words, during the title start period, the trajectory of each part of the title character shrinks as the title character "Six people catch the Bakushu!" expands during the title end period. This is different from the trajectory that each part of the title character takes during the process. For this reason, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Six people catch Bakushu!" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-based strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, subtitles for dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, and the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed on the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is also not output.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the beginning of the introductory part of the low-based strongest reach effect (the background in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is the title Unlike the background dedicated to displaying the title in the display part (the background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right positions), during the title end period, the title text "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!" After the background dedicated to displaying the title is completely filled and the title end period ends, the background changes to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect. The introductory part of the low-base, strongest reach performance begins with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu." In addition, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the introduction part begins, the line ``If you can, try to catch it! !” is displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed as the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach production, while the title display part outputs the audio that reads the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the title display part does not display subtitles with lines corresponding to the scene of the title display part, and the title is read out from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines corresponding to the scene of the displayed part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the sound of the lines of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines you respond to will be output.

When the variation pattern designation command specifies a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after the strongest super reach with a low base, the production control CPU 120 causes six ally characters to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. The performance result of the low base strongest reach performance is a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is notified of the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command. Display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating . On the other hand, when the variation pattern specification command specifies a variation pattern in which the reach is missed after the strongest super reach on a low base, six ally characters are unable to catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part. , notifies the performance result that it is not a jackpot as the performance result of the low base strongest reach performance, and then displays on the image display device 5 a decorative pattern (large) indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command. Display the combination.

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for the lowest base strongest reach performance]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach production, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" and the title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" indicates the level of expectation with a smaller size than the title text "Six people catch Bakuchu!" Display is displayed. The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star-shaped objects and the star-shaped object, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), and the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the normal state where the low base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and in the title display part, the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level are displayed. If the suggestion display and are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-based strongest reach performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being mistakenly recognized as an object for displaying expectations.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so when the low base Even when the strongest reach effect is executed, the objects displayed as pending display and active display may be confused with the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, resulting in the misunderstanding that the expectation level is the highest in the expectation level suggestion display. can be prevented.

In addition, when executing the low-based strongest reach effect, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e2) to (e4), during the title start period, the title characters ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' It was displayed at an enlarged size so that only the letters of the section were visible in the display area, and then reduced to a reduced size so that all letters were visible in the display area, and a background dedicated to displaying the title with the strongest reach of a low base was displayed. Sometimes, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, by executing a monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, the display before the monochrome display effect can be executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending display and active display that have been displayed are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "6 people catch the Bakushu!" is placed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The displayed state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), a display indicating the level of expectation is displayed below the title characters "Six people to catch the Bakushu!" Display. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 41 (e6), by changing the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect from black to gold among the 5 star-shaped objects, the low-base strongest reach effect is achieved. The expectation level of jackpot is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About the modification of the title display part]
FIG. 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in a modified example of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, the low base strong reach C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 moves to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1), the display area is Executes a blackout effect that displays the entire screen in black. If the pending display and the active display are displayed before the execution of the blackout effect, the pending display and the active display are hidden when the blackout effect is started.

After continuing the blackout effect for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation level suggestion display (see FIG. 11-43 (f2)) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black. In step 43 (f2), a display indicating the degree of expectation of low base strongest reach effect is displayed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) (f5), the corresponding super reach is displayed. The title characters of the performance (in FIGS. 11-43 (f3) and (f5), the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance) are displayed in a fixed position in a larger size than the expectation level suggestion display.

When the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect are all displayed in a fixed position, a part of the title characters are displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode. Regardless of whether the small) is a number from 1 to 9, part of the title character of the corresponding super reach effect when displayed in the fixed position is the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

Further, the title characters are displayed in either a white format (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) or a red format (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are to be displayed in white or red is determined in the aforementioned step 131SGS609 during the variable display preview effect determination process. In the variable display preview performance determination process, if a variable pattern including execution of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, and low base strongest reach performance is identified, a jackpot will be awarded. Whether the title characters are displayed in white or red is determined by the probability depending on whether the title is present or not, and if the title characters are displayed in red, it is a jackpot. Whether to display the title characters in white or red is determined with a probability that the ratio is higher than the ratio of winning a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in white. Therefore, when the title characters are displayed in red in the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the title characters are displayed in white.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the expectation level suggestion display and the title characters of the corresponding super reach performance, and then displays the expectation level suggestion display and the corresponding super reach performance, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (f4) and (f6). While maintaining the display of the title characters of the reach performance, a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed, and a sound reading out the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, in the title display part, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the audio of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer time than the time from when the blackout effect starts until the title characters are displayed (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 causes the transition to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as each of the above-mentioned super reach effects, so the explanation here will be omitted.

In this way, in the modified example of the title display part, the title characters of the corresponding super reach effect are larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and the expected appearance depends on whether the appearance is white or red. Since the degree is suggested, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation degree suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation degree suggestion first.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach effect is the same, the same format is used. An expectation level suggestion display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether the appearance of the title characters after the expectation level suggestion display is white or red.

[About high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of images displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of high base reach effects A to D, and FIG. 11-44 shows the execution status of high base reach effects A to D. FIG. In addition, high base reach A to D productions are the same except that the expectations suggested by the type of enemy character appearing, title name, and expectation level suggestion display are different, so we will explain high base reach A production here. However, the explanation of the high base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the high base super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2), the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing. A normal reach performance is executed in which the robot stops at the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R and takes a reach mode. After that, the title display part of the high base reach A performance is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A performance starts after part of the title characters “Battle Reach A” of the high base reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The title start period until it is displayed in the position, the title display period in which the title letters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position, and the title letter "Battle Reach A" that was displayed in the fixed position disappears. This includes the title end period until switching to the introduction part.

When transitioning to the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode. Display at an enlarged size such that only some characters are visible in the display area. At this time, the entire display area is displayed with a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A". Further, the portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" displayed in the display area appears in a manner overlapping both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced to a reduced size where all characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area. The title characters ``Battle Reach A'' are held still in a fixed position. When the title character "Battle Reach A" is reduced to a fixed position and remains stationary, a portion of the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode. Ru.

One of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure) will be displayed as the decorative pattern (small) on the left and right sides of the reach mode, but the title of the high base reach A production will start. During the period, regardless of whether the decorative pattern (small) on the left or right side of the reach mode is a number from "1" to "9", the title character "Battle Reach A" that appears in enlarged size will be the decoration on the left or right side of the reach mode. The title character "Battle Reach A" appears in a manner that overlaps with both the symbols (small) and is displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position, and part of it is the decorative symbol (small) on the left and right side of the reach mode. are displayed in an overlapping manner with both.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the time saved before the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" The changing background (night sky background) of the decorative pattern (large) in state A or variable state is displayed in such a way that the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A". While there, the background changes to a special background for displaying the title of the high base reach A production (a background in which the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right positions), and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are reduced. When the size is fixed at a fixed position, a background dedicated to displaying the title of the high base reach A effect is displayed as the background. In addition, the hold display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A" are replaced by the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A". A" is hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of "A". Note that the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) in the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A performance, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" were displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. This state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound reading out the title. Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A performance (see FIGS. 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period of the high base reach A production, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A" displayed in the fixed position in reduced size are replaced with the title characters "Battle Reach A". The display area is expanded until the entire display area is filled with a portion of "Reach A". In this case, instead of being enlarged in the opposite manner to the case where the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period. The title character "Battle Reach A" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled with a part of the title character "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the reverse manner. In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Battle Reach A" shrinks during the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Battle Reach A" expands during the title end period. is different. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (Figures 11-47 and 11-48 reference). In addition, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance, subtitles for dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed on the speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue is also not output.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the high base reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the beginning of the introduction part of the high base reach A production (the background where the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting) differs from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the background in which the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are displayed on the left and right positions), the title character "Battle Reach A" is displayed during the title end period. After the background dedicated to displaying the title is partially filled and the title end period ends, the background changes to the background at the start of the introduction part of the high base reach A performance. The introductory part of the high base reach A production begins with a video scene where the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Maskman" are fighting. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the introduction part starts, the dialogue ``Fight'' corresponding to the scene where the ally character ``Yumemu'' and the enemy character ``Maskman'' are fighting is added. !” is displayed, and the audio of the lines displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high base reach A production, while the title display part outputs the audio reading out the title from speakers 8L and 8R, the title display part does not display subtitles with dialogue corresponding to the scene of the title display part, and the title is read out from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the displayed part is also not output, and after the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue according to the scene of the introduction part are displayed, and the sound of the dialogue corresponding to the scene of the introduction part is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The audio of the lines you respond to will be output.

The production control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern that will be a jackpot after high base super reach A by the variation pattern specification command, and in the final stage of the introduction part, the ally character "Yumemu" will interact with the enemy character "Maskman". After winning the battle, the performance result of the high base reach A performance is a jackpot (it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and then the image display device 5 is designated by a variable display result designation command. A combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot won is displayed. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specification command specifies a fluctuation pattern in which the reach is off after a high base super reach A, the ally character "Yumemu" is defeated by the enemy character "Maskman" at the end of the introduction part, and the high A performance result indicating that the base reach A performance is not a jackpot is notified, and then a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of reach failure specified by the variable display result designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Display.

[About the display that suggests the level of expectation for high base reach performances A to D]
The expectation level suggestion display for high base reach A to D performances are the same except for the different expectations suggested by the expectation level suggestion display, so here we will explain the expectation level suggestion display for high base reach A performance, and A description of the display of expectation level suggestions for base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" and an expectation level suggestion display in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A." The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

In the time saving state A or the variable probability state where the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the pending number and an object indicating the active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the pending display and the active display may be displayed in the title display part. If , and the expectation level suggestion display are displayed at the same time, there is a risk that the objects forming the pending display and the active display may be mistakenly recognized as the objects of the expectation level suggestion display. For this reason, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance where the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the pending display and active display are configured by not displaying the pending display and active display at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. This prevents the object from being mistakenly recognized as an object for displaying expectations.

In addition, in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the game ball almost never enters the first starting prize opening, so if the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum (4) and is being displayed variablely, the reserved A maximum of 5 objects may be displayed as display and active display, which corresponds to the number of objects that indicate the maximum expectation level in the expectation level suggestion display, but the In the title display part, the pending display and active display are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so if the high base reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to 5 objects are displayed as the pending display and active display. However, it is possible to prevent objects displayed in the pending display and active display from being confused with objects in the expectation level suggestion display and being mistakenly recognized as having the maximum expectation level in the expectation level suggestion display.

In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, only part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" is displayed during the title start period, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g1) to (g3). When the display is enlarged so that it is not visible in the area, and then reduced to a reduced size where all characters are visible in the display area, and a background dedicated to displaying the title of the high base reach A effect is displayed, the title start period Since the pending display and active display that were displayed before are hidden, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any discomfort. In addition, when executing the high base reach A effect, by executing a monochrome display effect that displays the entire display area in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, the display before the monochrome display effect can be executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending display and active display that have been displayed are erased, and even in such a configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without causing any discomfort.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position with the expectation level suggestion display hidden. The state is maintained for a predetermined period of time, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation level suggestion display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), at the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects forming the expectation level suggestion display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), As shown in 44 (g5), out of the five star-shaped objects, 3 correspond to the high base reach A effect (3.5 objects for the high base reach B effect, 4 objects for the high base reach C effect, By changing the color of the star-shaped objects (4.5 pieces in the reach D performance) from black to gold, the expectation level of a jackpot in the high base reach A performance is suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pending display, the active display, and the expectation level suggestion display from being confused.

[About the display position of title characters]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L, and since the game board 2 is arranged in front of the rectangular display area 5L, the image display device 5 The visible area in the display area 5L is an area that is visible from the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, an area that is not covered by the members that constitute the game board 2.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "Catch the Bakushu!" at a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance. At this time, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakushu!" is displayed is the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (A). 5L, and as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), it is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2. This position overlaps with the intersection of diagonal lines of a certain visible rectangular area 5S.

Similarly, the title text for the low base weak reach B production is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low base strong reach A production is "Catch the Bakushu together!", and the title text for the low base strong reach B production is "Gekishaku". "Robo Battle", title text with low base strong reach C production, "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", title text with low base strongest reach production, "6 people catch Bakuchu!", title text with high base reach A production, "Battle Reach A" , the title characters "Battle Reach B" for the high base reach B production, the title characters "Battle Reach C" for the high base reach C production, and the title characters "Battle Reach D" for the high base reach D production. As shown in FIG. 11-46(A), the fixed position at which the title character is displayed during the title display period is the position where the title character overlaps the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. As shown in 11-46(B), the intersection of the diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. They are in overlapping positions.

Game machines are often subject to design changes during the development stage, and due to changes in the design of the game board 2, the area covered by the display area 5L of the image display device 5 by the members constituting the game board 2 changes. The visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In addition, gaming machines installed at gaming parlors may be taken over, refurbished, and sold again, and in such cases, the design of the gaming board 2 may be changed and the parts that make up the gaming board 2 may be changed to the image display device 5. The area covered by the display area 5L may change, and the visible area of the display area 5L may be changed. In such a case, if the arrangement of the title characters in the super reach effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters will deviate greatly from the center of the visible area. .

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any super reach effect, the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is such that the title characters are located between the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5. This is a position that overlaps with the intersection, and also a position that overlaps with the intersection of diagonals of the visible rectangular area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area that is not obstructed by the members of the game board 2 within the visible area of the image display device 5. The title characters displayed at a fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position that overlaps with both the intersections of the diagonals of the rectangular area 5S where the intersections of the diagonals of the display area 5L are visible. Even if the design of the game board 2 is changed when the machine is reused, the display position of the title characters can be prevented from being largely deviated from the center of the visible area.

[About the performance time of super reach performance]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the performance time of each super reach performance, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the performance times of each super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the entire performance time (time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introduction part) of the low base weak reach A performance is T1-1, and the performance of the title display part is T1-1. The time is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The entire presentation time of the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt1c.

In addition, the overall performance time for low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance is different, but the performance time of the title display part, the performance time of the title start period, the performance time of the title display period, and the end of the title. The performance time of each period is the same.

As shown in FIG. 11-47, the entire performance time of the low base strong reach A performance is T2-1, the performance time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt2a, The presentation time during the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time during the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall performance time of the low base strong reach C performance is T2-3, the performance time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt2a, and the performance time of the title display period is Tt2b. Yes, the performance time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall performance time for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance is different, but the performance time of the title display part, the performance time of the title start period, and the title. The presentation time of the display period and the presentation time of the title end period are both the same time.

The overall performance time of the low base strongest reach performance is T3, the performance time of the title display part is Tt3, of which the performance time of the title start period is Tt3a, the performance time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the performance time of the title display part is Tt3b. The performance time of the end period is Tt3c.

The overall performance time of high base reach performances A to D is all T4, the performance time of the title display part is all Tt4, and the performance time of the title start period is Tt4a, and the performance time of the title display part is Tt4a. The presentation time is Tt4b in both cases, and the presentation time in the title end period is Tt4c in both cases.

Comparing the overall performance time of the super reach performance in the low base medium (normal state) in this form, as shown in Figure 11-48 (A), it is longer than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The overall performance time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance with high jackpot expectation is low base weak reach A The performance is longer than the overall performance time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach B performance, and is expected to be a bigger hit than the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach performance B, and the low base weak reach C performance. The total performance time (T3) of the strongest low base reach performance with a high degree of intensity is the total performance time (T2-1, T2- 2, T2-3).

In addition, among the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production, the overall performance time (T1 -2) is set longer than the entire performance time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A performance. In addition, among the low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production, the low base strong reach C production has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A production and low base strong reach production B. The overall performance time (T2-3) is longer than the total performance time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A performance and the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach A performance, Among the low base strong reach B performances, the total performance time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A performance, is the entire performance time of the low base strong reach A performance. (T2-1) is set longer.

Comparing the production times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), which of the super reach productions (low base weak reach A, B Even in the case of production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production, high base reach A to D production), the production time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is the production of the title start period. (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is longer than the title end period. It is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

Comparing the performance time of the title display part in the super reach performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), it is found that the low base weak reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the strong base reach A production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production is the production time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. The production time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach production, which is longer than the time (Tt1) and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach production A, low base strong reach production B, and low base weak reach production C production. is set longer than the performance time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. In addition, the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D production is the production time (Tt4) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, and the low base strongest reach production. It is set shorter than the time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3).

In this embodiment, if we compare the performance times of the title start period and title display period in the low-base strongest reach effect and the high-base reach effect A to D, we can see that the title in the low-base strongest reach effect is shown in Figure 11-48 (D). The production time (Tt3a) of the start period is set longer than the production time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D productions, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the production time (Tt3a) of the low base reach is the strongest. The presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach presentations A to D.

Comparing the production times during the title start period for super reach productions (low base weak reach A and B production, low base strong reach A to C production, and low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this form, As shown in Figure 11-48 (F), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The production time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the C production is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production, and is longer than the production time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A production and the low base strong reach A production. The performance time (Tt3a) during the title start period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the base strong reach C performance.

Comparing the production times during the title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this embodiment, As shown in Figure 11-48 (G), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of C presentation is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of low base weak reach A presentation and low base strong reach A presentation. The performance time (Tt3b) during the title display period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach performance C, is the low base strong reach performance A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the base strong reach C performance.

Comparing the production times during the title end period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) in this form, As shown in Figure 11-48 (H), the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The performance time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the C performance is longer than the performance time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The performance time (Tt3c) during the title end period of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the strong reach performance B and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach performance. It is set longer than the performance time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the base strong reach C performance.

In this form, the character display period of the title display part (title display Comparing the production time of the part (which does not include the prologue period (described later) and which is the sum of the title start period, title display period, and title end period), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base The performance time (Tt2d) during the character display period for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have higher jackpot expectations than the weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, are as follows: It is longer than the performance time (Tt1d) of the character display period of low base weak reach A performance, low base weak reach B performance, and is more jackpot than low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance. The performance time (Tt3d) during the character display period of the highly anticipated low base strongest reach performance is the performance time (Tt2d) during the character display period of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance. ).

In this form, the production time of the title start period and title display period in the super reach production (low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production) during low base (normal state) As shown in Figures 11-48 (J) and (K), any of the super reach effects (low base weak reach effects A, B effects, low base strong reach effects A to C effects) during low base (normal state) , low base strongest reach effect), the effect time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the effect time of the title start period (Tt1a) /Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c) of the title end period.

In this form, super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during low base (normal state) and high base (time saving state A and definite variable state) Comparing the overall performance time of the middle super reach performances (high base reach A to D performances), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the super reach performances during the high base (time saving state A and variable probability state) The overall performance time (T4) of (high base reach A to D performances) is the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, low base reach performance) during low base (normal state). It is set shorter than the entire performance time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the base strongest reach performance).

[About the title characters of super reach production]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text of the low base weak reach A production is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the number of characters in the title is 10 characters, and the font size of the title characters (per character (standard size) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all title characters) is EJA.

The title character of the low base weak reach B production is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the number of characters in the title is 10 characters, the font size of the title character is FJ, and the display area size in which the title character is displayed is EJB. .

The title text of the low base strong reach A production is "Two people catch Bakushu!", the number of characters in the title is 13 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area where the title characters are displayed. The size is EKA.

The title characters of the low base strong reach B production are "Gekisha Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 7 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKB.

The title text of the low base strong reach C production is "Great Earthquake Robo Battle", the number of characters in the title is 8 characters, the font size of the title characters is FK, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed is EKC. .

The title text of the low base strongest reach production is "6 people catch Bakushu!", the number of characters in the title is 13 characters, the font size of the title characters is FSK, and the display area size where the title characters are displayed. is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before it develops into a super reach effect is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after it develops into a super reach effect. is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this form, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the low base strong reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance. , the font size FK of the title characters for the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is a larger font size than the font size FJ of the title letters for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. . Furthermore, the size of the smallest font among the characters that make up the title characters for Low Base Strong Reach A Production, Low Base Strong Reach B Production, and Low Base Strong Reach C Production is the same as for Low Base Weak Reach A Production, Low Base Weak The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the reach B effect.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title character of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance A, The font size is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect constitutes the title characters for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters for the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach B effect, the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base weak reach B effect. The font size FK of the title characters for the base strong reach C effect and the font size FSK of the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect are both smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before it develops into the super reach effect. The font size is larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after it is developed into a super reach effect. In addition, the size of the largest character of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A effect, the low base weak reach B effect, the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach The size of the largest font among the characters that make up the title letters for the C production, and the size of the largest font among the letters that make up the title text for the low base strongest reach production, will both develop into a super reach production. It is smaller than the size of the smallest character among the characters that can be taken by the previous decorative pattern (large), and is the smallest of the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A production and the low base weak reach B production. Small font size, size of the smallest font among the characters that make up the title characters of low base strong reach A production, low base strong reach B production, low base strong reach C production, low base strongest reach production The size of the smallest size of the letters that make up the title letters is larger than the size of the largest size of the letters that can be taken by the decorative design (small) after the development of the super reach effect. .

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the low base strong reach A has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. The display area size EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title text for the production, low base strong reach B production, and low base strong reach C production are the display area size EJA of the title text for the low base weak reach A production and low base weak reach B production. , the display area size ESK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance, which is larger than EJB and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is the low base strong reach performance ESK. It is larger than the title character display area size EKA, EKB, and EKC for the strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance.

[About expectation level suggestion display]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

The expectation level suggestion display displayed in the title display part is displayed above five star objects and the star object, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), and the star object indicates the expectation level. The number of star-shaped objects whose color changes from black to gold indicates the level of expectation among the five star-shaped objects. be.

When performing the expectation level suggestion display, the performance control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), and displays the star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level. After displaying the characters ``expectation level'' to indicate that the object is a certain object, a plurality of star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left side. Furthermore, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it to a normal display of gold.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the production control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the star-shaped object whose color changes, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center to its periphery, and The entire enlarged object changes to white until it disappears, and then a star-shaped object with the entire object or half of it changed to gold is displayed. In particular, for the second to third star-shaped objects, a part of the enlarged star-shaped object is a part of the text "Expectation Level" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. Expand it to a size that overlaps with . Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 performs highlighted display in a common manner both when changing from a black star-shaped object to the entire star-shaped object to gold, and when changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), when changing a plurality of star-shaped objects to gold, the production control CPU 120 waits until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first has finished. At a timing (t1) before the normal display, the highlighted display of the star-shaped object next to the star object is started. On the other hand, the production control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object that is two adjacent to it until the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that has started highlighting first ends; At the timing (t2) when the highlighted display of the star-shaped object that started is completed, the highlighted display of the star-shaped object two adjacent stars is started. In other words, two adjacent star-shaped objects are highlighted at the same time, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted at the same time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the production control CPU 120 outputs the expectation level suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of the star-shaped object starts, and also outputs the expectation level suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and displays the multiple star-shaped objects. When changing an object to gold, the output of the expectation level suggestion sound that accompanies the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first is ended before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object starts, and then the next star-shaped object is highlighted. The sound that suggests the level of expectation accompanying the highlighting of the star-shaped object is no longer overlapped with the output.

[About selection effects]
FIG. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection performance is any type of super when directly executing the low base strong reach A to C performance or the low base strongest reach performance without going through the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance from the normal reach performance. This is a performance that specifies whether the reach performance will be executed.

When the selection performance is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the normal reach performance as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then controls the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2). A window is displayed within the display area of , and the title of the selected performance is displayed within the window. In the title of the selection effect, the message "Upgrade your reach!" is displayed, suggesting that the selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the performance control CPU 120 displays the title image of the super reach performance in the window, a button image imitating the push button 31B, and continuous operation of the push button 31B. An operation promotion image consisting of operation promotion characters "Continuously press!" is displayed. The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content of the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect, and the title images of the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect are , an expectation level suggestion display is also displayed.

The production control CPU 120 selects, as the title image of the super reach production displayed in the window, the title image of the low base weak reach A production, which has a jackpot expectation of 0 and has the lowest expectation of development to other super reach productions. is first displayed, and each time the push button 31B is operated a number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super reach effect, the super reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is displayed. Switch to the title image of the next super reach effect until the title image is reached.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the window is the low base weak reach effect A effect, which has the lowest expectations for development into other super reach effects. After the title image, the expectation of development to other super reach performances is higher than the low base weak reach A performance.The title image of the low base weak reach B performance, the expectation of jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach A and B performances. Title image of low base strong reach A performance, title image of low base strong reach B performance with higher jackpot expectation than low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach with higher jackpot expectation than B performance The title image of the C performance is switched in order, and the title image of the low base strong reach performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance, is switched in order.

Then, when the title image of the super reach effect corresponds to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 presses a push button a number of times corresponding to the title image of the displayed super reach effect. When the operation of 31B is detected, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), a confirmed image is displayed in which the operation promotion image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window. It is notified that the super reach performance of the title image will be executed, and then the transition is made to the title display part of the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-52, the number of times the push button 3B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance is three times, and from the title image of the low base weak reach B performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image for the low base strong reach A performance is 4, and the number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image for the low base strong reach A performance to the title image for the low base strong reach B performance is 8. The number of times the push button 31B was operated was 10 times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, and from the title image of the low base strong reach C effect to the title of the low base strongest reach effect. The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the image is 15 times, and the more the developing attitude of the super reach effect of the title image to be switched to other super reach effects or the jackpot expectation level increases, the more it is necessary to switch to the next title image. This increases the number of times the push button 31B is operated, and it becomes necessary to operate the push button 31B many times.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-52, when the selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach effects A and B are never executed, and the jackpot expectation level is always higher than the low base strong reach effect A. It has been confirmed that the super reach effect will be executed, and the proportion that the low base strong reach effect will be executed is approximately 32.18%, the proportion that the low base strong reach effect B effect will be executed is approximately 30.16%, and the low base strong reach effect is approximately 30.16%. The rate at which the strong reach C effect is executed is about 30.30%, and the rate at which the low base strongest reach effect is executed is about 7.36%.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 will also display an expectation level suggestion display in the same way as the title display part in the title image of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach production in the selected production. In the expectation level suggestion display in the part, five star-shaped objects are displayed in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold are gradually changed from black to gold in order from the left side. , In the expectation level suggestion display displayed in the selected performance, out of the five star-shaped objects, the number of star-shaped objects indicating the expectation level of the corresponding super reach performance is displayed in a golden state from the beginning. .

The minimum time required to switch from the title image of the super reach effect displayed in the selected effect to the title image of the next super reach effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the super reach effect plus one press of the push button 31B. This is the time multiplied by the time required for the operation. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and it is necessary to operate the push button 31B three times when switching from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. The minimum time required for this is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part, the time for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, that is, the time for the suggested expectation level to change by one level, is approximately 300 ms, and the low base weak reach A It is set longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. Therefore, in the selection performance, the performance control CPU 120 changes the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the low base weak reach A performance in a time shorter than the time for the expectation level suggested in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part to change by one level. It becomes possible to switch to the title image with weak reach B effect.

[About effects that can be executed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, effects that can be executed during variable display include explanatory text display effects, title color change effects, and operation promotion effects A to D.

The explanatory text display performance is a performance that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, and is a performance that displays an explanatory text that suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

The title color change performance is a performance that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and B performance, and is a performance that changes the color of the title characters from the original white to red or gold.

Operation promotion performance A is a performance that can be executed in the normal reach performance, and displays an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and develops into the low base weak reach performance A and B in response to the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that announces whether or not it is true. In addition, in the operation promotion performance A, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, it is possible to develop not only the low base weak reach performance A and B performance, but also the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance. good.

Operation promotion performance B is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that notifies whether or not the low base strong reach performance will develop into one of the low base strong reach performances A to C in response to the operation of the push button 31B. In addition, in a configuration in which a jackpot is announced as a performance result in the low base weak reach performances A and B, in the operation promotion performance B, the performance result as to whether or not it is a jackpot is notified in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B. It may also be used as a configuration.

Operation promotion performance C is a performance that can be executed in the middle of the introduction part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the strongest reach performance, and displays an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and prompts the user to operate the push button 31B. This is an effect that displays one of a plurality of types of cut-in images depending on the cut-in image.

Operation promotion performance D is a performance that can be executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, and displays an operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) that prompts the operation of the push button 31B. This is a performance that notifies you of the performance result, whether or not it is a jackpot, in response to the operation of the push button 31B.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the explanatory text display performance during variable display, whether to perform the title color change performance and to which color it should change, and whether to execute the operation promotion performance A. , whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) in the operation promotion effect B, whether to execute the operation promotion effect C, and the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) It is determined in the preview effect determination process of the variable display start setting process whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) in the operation promotion effect D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (A), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which low base strong reach effects A to C are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined. is determined. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a negative performance result is identified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is specified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, execution of the explanatory text display performance is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a loss is identified, so the low base strong reach A The explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the ~C effect, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and regardless of whether or not the explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. First, although the execution time of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the execution time of the title display part do not change, the first variation pattern is used as a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach effects A to C are executed. a second fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the first fluctuation pattern, and when the first fluctuation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is not executed and the second fluctuation pattern is specified. In this case, the explanatory text display effect may be executed using a variation time set longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, it is not determined whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance in the preview performance determination process, but the explanatory text is determined based on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. It is determined whether or not to execute the display effect. At this time, by determining the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern so that when the explanatory text display effect is executed, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when the explanatory display effect is not executed, the low base strong reach The explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the A to C effects, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (B), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which low base weak reach A and B effects are executed is specified, whether or not to execute the title color change effect is determined. In addition, when executing the title color change effect, it is determined which color to change to. At this time, if a variation pattern in which the production result is off is identified, non-execution (white) is determined at a rate of 80%, execution (red) is determined at a 20% rate, and execution (gold) is determined at a rate of 20%. Not determined. In addition, if a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, 20% of the time it will not be executed (white), and 75% of the time it will be executed (red ) is determined, and execution (money) is determined at a rate of 5%. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C production or a low base strongest reach production is identified, title color change production is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that deviates from the production is identified. Since it has been decided that the color of the title letters will change in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performances, there is a high possibility that it will develop into the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance. It is suggested. In addition, execution (Friday) is determined only when a variation pattern that develops into the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect is identified, so in the title display part of the low base strong reach effects A and B. By changing the color of the title letters to gold, it is confirmed that the low base strong reach effects A to C will develop into the low base strongest reach effects.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach performance after execution of the low base weak reach effects A and B, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a variation that results in a loss. It is decided to execute the title color change effect at a higher rate than when a pattern is identified, and the color of the title letters changes in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects, indicating that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. may be suggested. In addition, in such a configuration, execution (gold) is determined only when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and the color of the title letters changes to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects. The jackpot may be confirmed by doing so.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (C), in the preview performance determination process, if a variation pattern that deviates from the normal reach performance or a variation pattern that develops from the normal reach performance to the low base weak reach performances A and B is identified. , it is determined whether or not to execute the operation promotion effect A. At this time, if a variation pattern that is out of line is identified, non-execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects is specified, execution is determined at a rate of 100%. In this way, execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B performances is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that is out of reach is identified. , it is suggested that when the operation promotion performance A is executed in the normal reach performance, it may develop into low base weak reach performances A and B.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (D), in the preview performance determination process, there is a variation pattern in which the performance results of the low base weak reach A and B performances are off, and a low base strong reach from the low base weak reach A and B performances. When a variation pattern that develops into the A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance is specified, it is determined which of the operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed. At this time, if a deviation pattern is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, an operation promotion image (small) will be determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image will be promoted at a rate of 90%. The image (large) is determined. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the operation promotion image (small) is used at a higher rate than when a deviation pattern is identified. Since the operation promotion image (large) is determined among the operation promotion images (large) and the operation promotion image (large), the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion performance B at the end of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. In this case, it is suggested that the possibility of developing into the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance is higher than when the operation promotion image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are specified, the operation promotion performance C It is determined whether to execute the cut-in image (A) or the cut-in image (B) when the operation promotion effect C is executed. At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a different performance result is identified, 50% of the time it will be decided not to execute it, 30% of the time it will be decided to execute it (cut-in image (A)), and 20% of the time it will be decided not to execute it. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined based on the ratio. In addition, when a variation pattern in which the production result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is decided at a rate of 5%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is decided at a rate of 30%, and execution is decided at a rate of 65%. Execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, the execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a loss is identified, so the low base strong reach A The operation promotion performance C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the ~C performance, which suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot. In addition, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a higher percentage of the cut-in image (A) and cut-in image (B) than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a loss is identified. B) is displayed, so when the operation promotion performance C is executed at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performance A to C and the cut-in image (B) is displayed, the cut-in image (A) is displayed. This suggests that there is a higher possibility of hitting the jackpot than if the player were to win the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the preview performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect are specified, the operation promotion image ( It is determined whether to display the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large). At this time, if a variation pattern that results in a negative performance result is identified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 90%, and an operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is specified, an operation promotion image (small) is determined at a rate of 10%, and an operation promotion image (large) is determined at a rate of 90%. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, a higher percentage of operation promotion images (small) and operation promotion images (large) are selected than when a variation pattern that results in a loss is identified. Since the image (large) is determined, when the operation promotion image (large) is displayed in the operation promotion performance D at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the operation promotion image (large) is displayed. It is suggested that the possibility of winning the jackpot is higher than when the image (small) is displayed.

[About explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display effect. .

The performance control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yumemu" as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to (I) during the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances. After that, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed until the entire display area is filled, and when an explanatory text is displayed during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yumemu" is enlarged and displayed in front of the background. Display the explanatory characters ``Surprise!'', ``Peach Tree'', and ``Big Lucky!'' that make up the explanatory text in order on the layer. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory characters "Surprise!" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (A). 11-56 (t1)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (B), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t2)), and then , as shown in FIG. 11-55(C), it is displayed while moving leftward at high speed again until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory characters "Peach Tree" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (FIG. 11-55(D)). -56 (t4)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (E), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t5)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55 (F), it is displayed again while moving leftward at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56 (t6)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-55(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory characters "Big Lucky!" while moving them leftward at high speed from the right side of the display area toward the center (FIG. 11-55(G)). -56 (t7)), as shown in Figure 11-55 (H), when it is moved near the center, it is displayed while moving to the left at low speed (Figure 11-56 (t8)), and then, As shown in FIG. 11-55 (I), it is displayed again while moving leftward at high speed until it disappears from the display area (FIG. 11-56 (t9)).

[About title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a title color change performance that changes white title characters to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the production control CPU 120 causes a part of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move them toward the home position, and move them toward the home position. Make it stand still. Thereafter, during the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the white title characters in a fixed position as shown in FIG. 11-57(A). Then, when the execution of the title color change effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. -57 (B) (C) As shown in (B) and (C), the white title character is kept stationary in the fixed position, and then the white title character displayed in the fixed position is moved from the fixed position during the title end period. Move the title characters to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when the execution of the title color change effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and also outputs the specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. As shown in -57 (D), if the title characters displayed in a fixed position are changed to appear to glow, and after the time t2 has elapsed, it is determined that the title characters will change to red. As shown in Figure 11-57 (E), the title characters are changed to red, and if the change to gold is determined, the title characters are changed to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57 (F). After that, the title characters are moved from the regular position to the right side of the display area until all the title characters disappear while maintaining the changed color displayed at the regular position during the title end period. When the title characters are changed from a glowing appearance to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light on the title characters becomes clear.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part is 500ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is 2200ms, and the title end. The presentation time T3 of the period is set to 300 ms, and the time t1 from the start of the title display period until the title characters change to appear to glow is 800 ms. The time t2 from which the title characters change to red or gold after changing to a visible mode is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from which the title characters change to red or gold until the title display period ends is set to 1200 ms. There is.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-58 (C), when the color of the title character changes from white to red or gold, the time (t1) at which the title character is displayed in white during the title display period Also, during the title display period, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in red or gold after the change is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white in the title display part. Also, the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold color in the title display part is longer.

[About operation promotion performance A]
FIG. 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect A.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance A that prompts the operation of the push button 31B in the normal reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the operation promotion performance A, as shown in FIGS. , an operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

A remaining time meter is formed on the button image (small) and indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected or the remaining time meter becomes 0, in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into low base weak reach A and B effects, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C) , a white-out effect is executed to display the entire display area in white, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-59(D), low base weak reach A and B effects are executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a miss state, as shown in FIG. 11-59 (E). let

[About operation promotion performance B]
FIG. 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion effect B.

In the low base weak reach performances A and B, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance B that prompts the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part.

When it is decided to execute the operation promotion effect B and it is decided to display the operation promotion image (small), the effect control CPU 120 executes the introduction part as shown in FIG. 11-60(A). At the end of the process, an operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) imitating the push button 31B and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, when it has been decided to execute the operation promotion effect B and it has been decided to display the operation promotion image (large), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect shown in FIGS. 11-60 (B) and (C). This is an image imitating the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, with a button image (large) larger in size than the button image (small) and operation promotion letters (large) that prompt the operation of the push button 31B: "Press! ” Displays an operation promotion image (large). At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-60(B), the production control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) with transparent backgrounds, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed. After performing a promotion introduction effect in which these multiple button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), the button image (large) and the operation promotion text (large) that urges the operation of the push button 31B "Press!" Display an operation promotion image (large) consisting of:

A remaining time meter is formed in both the button image (small) and the button image (large), and the performance control CPU 120 detects the operation of the push button 31B until the remaining time meter reaches 0. Or, when the remaining amount of time on the remaining time meter reaches 0, in the case of a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach effect A to C and a low base strongest reach effect, the operation as shown in Figure 11-60 (D). The promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) is erased, a falling effect is performed in which the movable body 32 falls, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-60(E), the low base strong reach A to C is performed. Performance, execute low base strongest reach performance.

On the other hand, in the case of a deviation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large) and erases the entire display area, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (F). After that, as shown in FIG. 11-60(G), a failure is announced as a result of the effect.

[About operation promotion performance C]
FIG. 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation promotion effect C.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance C that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When execution of the operation promotion performance C is determined, the performance control CPU 120 displays a button image (small size) imitating the push button 31B in the middle of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. ) and operation prompting characters (small) "Press!" prompting the user to operate the push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 is determined to display the cut-in image (A), and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, the CPU 120 displays the cut-in image (A) in FIG. As shown in C), after the operation promotion image (small) is erased and the cut-in image (A) in which the ally character "Nana" is displayed is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-61 (F). , carry out the continuation of the introductory part.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 has been determined to display the cut-in image (B), and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, then as shown in FIG. As shown in Figure 11-61(D), after the operation promotion image (small) is erased and the cut-in image (B) in which the ally character "Jam" is displayed is displayed, the screen is displayed as shown in Figure 11-61(F). , continue the introductory part.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the remaining time meter whether it is determined to display the cut-in image (A) or when it is determined to display the cut-in image (B). If no operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining amount reaches 0, the operation promotion image (small) is deleted while the middle part of the introduction part continues to be played, as shown in Figure 11-61(E). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-61(F), the continuation of the introduction part is executed.

[About operation promotion performance D]
FIG. 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of the operation promotion effect D.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion performance D that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it is determined that the operation promotion image (small) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a button that imitates the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (B). An operation promotion image (small) consisting of a button image (small) and operation promotion characters (small) "Press!" urging operation of the push button 31B is displayed.

In addition, when it is determined that the operation promotion image (large) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B at the end of the introduction part, as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (A) and (G). Displays an operation promotion image (large) that is a simulated image and consists of a button image (large) that is larger in size than the button image (small) and operation promotion characters (large) that prompt the user to operate the push button 31B, ``Press!'' let At this time, unlike the case where the operation promotion image (small) is displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a plurality of button images (large) whose backgrounds are transparent, and these button images (large) are combined into one button. After performing a promotional introduction effect that is organized into images (large) (see Figure 11-60 (B)), a button image (large) and operation promotion characters (large) urging the user to operate the push button 31B are made, ``Press!'' Display the operation promotion image (large).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot is reached if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining amount of the remaining time meter reaches 0, or the remaining amount of the remaining time meter becomes 0, the performance control CPU 120 performs As shown in 11-62 (C) and (H), a rainbow effect is performed in which a rainbow-colored pattern swirls over the entire display area while the operation promotion image (small) or operation promotion image (large) gradually disappears, and then , as shown in FIGS. 11-62(D) and (I), a jackpot is announced as a performance result.

On the other hand, in the case of a deviation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation promotion image (small) or the operation promotion image (large), as shown in FIGS. 11-62 (E) and (J). A darkening effect is executed to darken the entire display area, and then, as shown in FIGS. 11-62(F) and (K), a failure is notified as a result of the effect.

[About operation promotion images]
FIG. 11-63 is a diagram showing a display mode of the operation promotion image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation promotion image (small) and the operation promotion image (large) while alternately and continuously moving in the left and right directions, as shown in FIG. 11-63 (A). At the same time, the button is displayed while continuously changing between a state in which the button is not pressed and a state in which the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves in the horizontal direction and the interval at which the button changes from not being pressed to being pressed are different, and the button image The motion of moving in the left-right direction and the motion of changing the state in which the button is not pressed and the state in which the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complicated movement.

[About the jackpot start performance]
FIG. 11-64 is a diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), the production control CPU 120 stops the decorative pattern (large) in the jackpot mode, and then issues a jackpot start designation command that specifies display of a production image indicating the start of the jackpot game state. When received, a jackpot start effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that moves like a flickering flame as the background during the jackpot start effect, as shown in FIGS. As shown in Figure 11-64 (B), first the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" of the jackpot title character "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" is displayed in an enlarged size, and then As shown in C), the first half of the title character "BIG (REG)" is gradually reduced to a reduced size that is visible in its entirety in the display area, and is displayed at a fixed position above the center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the second half of the title characters "BONUS" of the title characters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" of the jackpot title in an enlarged size. After that, as shown in Figure 11-64 (E), the second half of the title character "BONUS" is gradually reduced to a reduced size that makes it visible in its entirety in the display area, and then moved to a fixed position near the center of the display area. Display it at the bottom (below the first half of the title "BIG").

In this embodiment, when starting a jackpot game state where the jackpot type is 6 rounds, "REG BONUS" is displayed as the title character, and when starting a jackpot game state where the jackpot type is 10 rounds, Display "BIG BONUS" as the title text.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the entire title character "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, and then gradually enlarges the title character "BIG BONUS". Then, as shown in FIG. 11-64(H), the jackpot performance is started and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the production control CPU 120 starts the jackpot production, first, as shown in FIG. Display the hitting promotion image (small).

The right-hitting promotion image (small) is composed of a message "Right-hitting" (small) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction, and is used for production control. As shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I), the CPU 120 displays a right-hand hitting promotion image (small) from the upper right of the display area over a period from the start of the jackpot performance until the end of the jackpot game state. Display it at the position.

The right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is a message that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right playing area 2R, and the message "Right-handed hitting" (large), which is larger than the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), and the right It is an arrow that indicates a direction and is composed of an arrow image (large) that is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the performance control CPU 120 is configured to detect the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 11-64 (H) and (I). A right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a manner of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area only for the first certain period of time after the start of the medium performance until the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, it is switched to the jackpot middle performance, and the operation method for the jackpot game state (operation method for launching the game ball toward the right game area 2R) ) A right-handed hitting promoting image (small) and a right-handed hitting promoting image (large) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 is operated on the main board 11 side at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which control is performed that is advantageous by operating the game ball in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Switch to the jackpot performance and display a right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and a right-handed hitting promotion image (large). For this reason, it is advantageous to operate the game ball in an operation method that launches the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R after a predetermined period of time has passed since the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) were displayed. Control will be implemented.

In addition, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the title in the title display part of the super reach performance when the jackpot start performance is ended, the title character is deleted, and the next performance is switched. To erase the title characters of a jackpot start performance and switch to the next performance in a shorter time than when the title characters are erased during the end period.

In particular, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the mid-jackpot performance in one frame (minimum unit of image update), and displays a right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and a right-handed hitting promotion image. (Large) is displayed. In the title display part of the super reach performance, the title end period is set instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain amount of time. , and when displaying an image promoting right-handed hitting (small) and an image promoting right-handed hitting (large), if the title character is similarly configured to be erased over a certain amount of time, the title character will be erased. During some period of time, there is a risk that the operation method will be used to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, but if you launch the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 2R at this timing, the game ball may still be launched toward the right gaming area 2R. Since the control that is advantageous by operating with the operating method of launching the ball toward the area 2R has not started, the game ball will be wasted. On the other hand, after the title character is displayed in the jackpot start performance, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the mid-jackpot performance in one frame (minimum unit of image update), and displays the right-hitting promotion image (small) and the right-hitting promotion image (small). Since the promotion image (large) is displayed, it is possible to suppress the generation of useless game balls.

[About the display of the number of remaining spins until play time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low accuracy state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy control is performed. The time saving state B is controlled to be performed 1100 times (in this embodiment, the play time is reduced 1100 times).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times to reach rescue time saving (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until play time) 131SG005Z, which is the remaining variable display number until the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). (See Figure 11-1) can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the normal reach performance, low base weak reach performance A and B performance, low base strong reach performance A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance in the normal state. If the game is not running, the number of remaining play times is displayed at the top left of the display area. The remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a numerical value from 0 to 900 depending on the remaining number of times). At this time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900, the number of times remaining until play time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z even during the execution of the normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) is in the ready-to-reach mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65(C), when the normal reach performance develops into the low base weak reach performances A and B, the performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance during execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B. Continue to display the remaining number of times until the time 131SG005Z. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (D) and (E), when a loss is reported as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base weak reach A. , The remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed even after the B effect ends.

In addition, the configuration is such that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the low base weak reach A and B The remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is continuously displayed until the performance ends, and the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A and B performances. Incidentally, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z may be erased at the time when content that confirms a jackpot is displayed as a result of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65 (F), the performance control CPU 120 is configured to control the performance when the normal reach performance, low base weak reach A, B performance develops into low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance. Then, with the start of the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased. At this time, the production control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z at the timing when the selection production starts when the production progresses from the normal reach production, and when the production progresses from the low base weak reach production A and B. , If it is a low base strong reach effect A to C, during the prologue display period of the title display part, the remaining number of play times 131SG005Z will be erased along with the pending display and active display, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the title will be displayed. At the start of the part, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased.

In addition, when developing from the low base weak reach effects A and B, the hold display and activation will occur at the timing when the falling effect starts (timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)) as the operation promotion effect B is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is erased along with the display. As a result, regardless of whether it develops into a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the timing for erasing the stay display, active display, and number of remaining times until play time 131SG005Z can be made the same. .

Thereafter, when a failure is reported as a result of the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base reach performance as shown in FIGS. 11-65 (G) and (H). After the strong base reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance are finished, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed again. On the other hand, when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base strong reach A to C performances or the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the next time as shown in FIGS. 11-65(I)(J). , the remaining number of play times 131SG005Z remains erased until the normal state is reached.

In addition, if operation promotion performance A is configured to develop into low base strong reach performances A to C and low base strongest reach performance according to the operation of the push button 31B, during execution of operation promotion performance A, the play time It is sufficient to continue displaying the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z and erase the remaining number of times until the play time 131SG005Z with the start of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In such a configuration, in the operation promotion performance A, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is displayed, while the subsequent operation promotion performances in the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance In C and D, the remaining number of times until play time 131SG005Z is not displayed.

[About play time start performance]
The game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time saving state B (play time) when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled by jackpot in a low probability state. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-66(C), the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-handed lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-handed LED lighting notification command, and then the performance control CPU 120 As shown in Figures 11-66 (A) and (B), when the variable display stops when the remaining number of play times is 0, and the right-hand hit LED lighting notification command is received, Figure 11-66 (C) As shown in , a right-hitting promotion image (small) is displayed that prompts the user to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R. The timing of lighting up the right-handed playing lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right-handed playing promotion image (small) are almost the same time, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right-handed playing lamp 131SG132 and then displays the right-handed playing promotion image (small). The LED lighting notification command is sent, and the performance control CPU 120 accordingly displays the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), so the right-handed hitting lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) is displayed. becomes.

When starting the time saving state B (play time), the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-handed lamp 131SG132 lit until the time saving state B (play time) ends. In addition, the right-hitting promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right-handed hitting" (small) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in FIGS. 11-66 (C) to (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-handed hitting promotion image when the time-saving state B (play time) starts, until the time-saving state B (play time) ends. (Small) is displayed in a position closer to the upper right of the display area.

When the variable display stops when the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 and the performance control CPU 120 receives a game state designation command that designates the time saving state B (play time), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance changes from FIG. 11-66 (D) to As shown in (G), a play time start effect is executed.

The play time start effect includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Enter play time" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed at a fixed position, and a title character "Enter play time". The title display period includes a title display period in which the title characters "Run in" are displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters "Enter in play time" which had been displayed in the fixed position disappears and the display switches to play time production.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title character "6" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the play time start performance, and the title display period, title display period, and title end period of the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance. The title character ``Enter play time'' is displayed in the same manner as when displaying ``Catch Bakushu with people!''.

Specifically, during the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Enter play time" to an enlarged size such that only some of the characters are visible in the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D). Display it in . At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display area to be displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is completely filled with a part of the title characters "Enter play time". After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-66(D) and (E), the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title character "Enter play time" so that all characters of the title character "Enter play time" are displayed in the display area. The title characters ``Enter play time'', which have been reduced in size and become visible, are made to stand still in a fixed position.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Enter play time" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then shifts the display to the title display period. During the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 causes the title characters "Enter play time" to remain displayed at a fixed position as shown in FIGS. 11-66(E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 shifts the display to the title end period. During the title end period, the production control CPU 120 replaces the title characters "Enter play time" displayed in the reduced size at the regular position as shown in FIGS. Expand the display area until the display area is completely filled by a part of "Rush". In this case, instead of being enlarged and displayed in the opposite manner to the case where the title character "Enter play time" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, the title character "Enter play time" is displayed in a reduced size during the title start period. In a manner different from the reverse aspect, the title character "Enter play time" is enlarged until the display area is entirely filled with a part of the title character "Enter play time". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title character takes during the process of shrinking the title character "Yu-time rush" in the title start period is the same as the trajectory that each part of the title character takes as the title character "Yu-time rush" expands during the title end period. is different. For this reason, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Enter play time" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the background of the play time effect is switched to and the play time effect is started.

During the play time start performance, the production control CPU 120 displays a right-handed promotion image (large) that urges an operation to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, in addition to the right-handed promotion image (small), and An image to warn people against getting addicted (message "Beware of getting addicted!") is displayed at the bottom of the display area.

The right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is a message that prompts the user to launch the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and the message "Right-handed hitting" (large), which is larger than the right-handed hitting promotion image (small), It is an arrow indicating a direction and is composed of an arrow image (large) which is larger in size than the arrow image (small), and the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. A right-handed hitting promotion image (large) is repeatedly displayed in a manner of moving from the left side to the right side of the display area over the period in which the play time start effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time saving state B, and when the variable display result is off, it selects the variation pattern PA1-4 with a special figure variation time of 500 ms. A variable display is performed, and the time saving state B is controlled, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, a variable pattern PB1-18 with a special figure fluctuation time of 500 ms + 15000 ms is selected to perform a variable display, and the production control CPU 120 is configured to execute the play time start effect during the period in which the variable display based on these variable patterns is performed when the time saving state B control starts, but the game control microcomputer 100 In the first variable display controlled to , that is, after controlling to time saving state B, the variable display result is based on the game ball winning in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. In this case, the time saving B start variation pattern which has a longer variation time than the variation pattern PA1-4 and which has a variable time corresponding to the play time start effect is selected to perform variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 sets the time reduction state. In the first variable display controlled by B, the play time start effect may be executed during the period when the variable display according to the time saving B start variation pattern is being performed. In addition, in such a configuration, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the first variable display controlled to the time saving state B, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the special figure variation time to the variation pattern PB1-18 of 500ms+15000ms. In addition to performing a variable display, the performance control CPU 120 may stop the decorative symbol (large) in a jackpot mode without executing the play time start performance.

[About title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the explanatory characters of the explanatory text display performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion performance (small), and the operation promotion performance (small). It is a figure which shows one form of the relationship of the operation promotion character (large) in large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a still image (low base strong reach B, C effect, low Strongest base reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) or action image (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A performance). In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the super reach effect is 7 to 13 characters, and the display time of the title character of the super reach effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least part of the character string is The time until it disappears) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the explanatory characters are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6 characters, and the display time of the explanatory character (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) (all the character strings that make up the explanatory character are displayed) The time from when at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LS, the font size of the explanatory character is FS, and the explanatory character (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) is displayed. The display area size is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is the moving image. In addition, the number of characters in the title character of the jackpot start effect is 8 characters, and the display time of the title character of the jackpot start effect (after all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed, at least a part of the character string is not displayed) The font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters for the operation promotion characters (small) is 3 characters, and the display time of the operation promotion characters (small) (operation promotion characters (small) are displayed without push button 31B being operated) period) is L1P, the font size of the operation promotion characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a moving state, and the background image at that time is a moving image. In addition, the number of characters for the operation promotion characters (large) is 3 characters, and the display time of the operation promotion characters (large) (the operation of the push button 31B is enabled when the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated). period) is L2P, the font size of the operation promotion characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the operation promotion letter (large), Figure 11-67 (B) As shown, the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start performance is longer than the display time LR, LS, L1P, and L2P of the title character, explanation character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large) of the super reach performance. The display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display time LS, L1P, L2P of the explanation character, operation promotion character (small), operation promotion character (large), and the operation promotion character (small), The display times LS and L1P of the operation promotion characters (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory characters. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the operation promotion letter (large) all constitute the explanatory text display effect. The display time is set longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters to be displayed. Moreover, these display time relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach performance.

In this form, when comparing the font sizes of the title text, explanatory text, title text of the jackpot start performance, operation promotion text (small), and operation promotion text (large) of the super reach effect, Figure 11-67 (C) As shown, the font size F2P of the operation promotion text (large) is larger than the font size FR, FS, FB, F1P of the title text of the super reach effect, the explanation text, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion text (small). Also has a large font size. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the explanation character, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), and the operation promotion character ( The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the character (large).

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super reach performance. In addition, the title characters "BIG BONUS" for the jackpot start effect will first display the first half "BIG" at the top of the regular position, then the second half "BONUS" will be displayed at the bottom of the regular position, and then the title characters "BIG BONUS" The display is gradually enlarged, and when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters that make up the title characters "BIG BONUS" becomes the smallest. In such a configuration, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the regular position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, the size of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the same as the title character of the super reach effect, and the description The size of the characters is larger than that of the operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the regular position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is Super Reach. The size is larger than the largest size of the characters constituting the title character, explanatory character, operation promotion character (small), and operation promotion character (large) of the performance.

Further, the font size FR of the title characters of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation promotion characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest size of the characters that make up the title text of the super reach effect is larger than the size of the largest size of the letters that make up the explanatory text and operation promotion text (small). .

Further, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation promotion characters (small). Further, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size relationships and character size relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title text, explanatory text, title text of the jackpot start production, operation promotion text (small), and operation promotion text (large) of the super reach effect, Figure 11-67 (D) As shown in , the display area size E2P of the operation promotion text (large) is the same as the display area size ER, ES, EB of the title text of the super reach effect, the explanation text, the title text of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion text (small). , E1P. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation promotion characters (small) of the super reach performance. Furthermore, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation promotion characters (small). Further, the relationship between these display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[About title characters etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 shows the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion performance (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) in the operation promotion performance (large). ), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of times characters configuring the remaining number of times until the play time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the super reach effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the super reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the super reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title character of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the operation prompting character (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P. , the font size of the operation promotion characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompting character (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P. , the font size of the operation promotion characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title character of the play time start effect (the time from when all the character strings that make up the title character are displayed until at least part of the character string is no longer displayed) ) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the play time start effect is FY, and the display area size in which the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the characters for the number of times remaining until play time is FZ, and the display area size in which the characters for the number of times remaining until play time are displayed is EZ.

In this form, the font size of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), the operation promotion letter (large), the title letter of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time is changed. When compared, as shown in Figure 11-68 (B), the font size F2P of the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion character (small), The font size is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the play time start effect and the remaining number of times until play time characters. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) is the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), and the title character of the play time start effect. , is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters (remaining XXX times (X is a number from 0 to 900)) that make up the number of remaining times until play time character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (large) constitutes the remaining number of times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start performance, the title character of the super reach performance, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start performance, the font size of the remaining number of characters until play time FR, F1P, It is larger in size than FY and FZ. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start performance is the title character of the super reach performance, the operation promotion character (small), the title character of the play time start performance, and the number of times remaining until play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the character. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect is the number of characters remaining until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

In addition, the font size FY of the title text of the play time start effect is larger than the font size FR, F1P, FZ of the title text of the super reach effect, operation promotion text (small), and remaining number of times until play time. be. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title text of the play time start effect is the same as the size of the letters that make up the title text of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), and the remaining number of characters until play time. The size is larger than the size of the largest font among them. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the play time start effect is the number of characters remaining until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the constituent characters.

Further, the font size FR of the title characters of the super reach effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation promotion characters (small) and the remaining number of times until play time characters. In addition, the size of the smallest size of the letters that make up the title letters of the super reach effect is the size of the operation promotion letters (small), and the size of the largest size of the letters that make up the number of remaining until play time letters. It is larger in size. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title character of the super reach effect constitutes the number of remaining times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the font size FZ of the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the remaining number of times until play time characters. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation promotion characters (small) constitutes the remaining number of times until play time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until play time is 0 to 900. The size is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters.

Furthermore, these font size relationships and character size relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this form, the display area size of the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, the operation promotion letter (small), the operation promotion letter (large), the title letter of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time As shown in Figure 11-68 (C), the display area size E2P of the operation promotion characters (large) is different from the title character of the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect, and the operation promotion character (small). ), the display area size of the title character of the play time start effect, and the display area size of the remaining number of times until play time characters ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is the display area size ER of the title character of the super reach effect, the operation promotion text (small), the title character of the play time start effect, and the remaining number of characters until the play time, The display area size is larger than E1P, EY, and EZ. In addition, the display area size EY of the title text of the play time start effect is larger than the display area size ER, E1P, and EZ of the title text of the super reach effect, operation promotion letters (small), and remaining number of play time letters. It is the area size. Further, the display area size ER of the title characters of the super reach performance is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation promotion characters (small) and the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the display area size E1P of the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until play time characters. Further, the relationship between these display area sizes holds true regardless of the type of super reach effect.

Comparing the display times of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title characters of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title character of the play time start effect is It is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters of the reach effect. Further, these display time relationships hold true regardless of the type of super reach performance.

Comparing the display formats of the title characters of the super reach effect and the title characters of the play time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-68 (E), the low base weak reach effects A, B effects, and the low base strong reach A In the ~C effects, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach performance and the play time start performance, the title characters are displayed in a reduced size from being enlarged during the title start period, and are erased while being enlarged during the title end period.

[About LED placement]
The game effect lamp 9 in this embodiment includes frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 are provided so as to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the gaming area, and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are It is provided so as to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "POWERFULII" formed on the front surface of the movable body 32. Further, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are provided at positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed in the game area 2L. Further, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are provided at positions near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

Frame LEDL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are full-color LEDs consisting of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light emitting elements, and logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit monochromatic red light. The decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are red LEDs, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting monochromatic white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 transmits brightness data for lighting/blinking/turning off one or more of the plurality of LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Output to the LED driver (also called lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending effect to notify the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the low probability high base state (time saving and a time-saving background luminance data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states, such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the priority when used is increased in the order of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table.

For example, if a super reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on a normal background brightness data table in a normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs an SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect. It is used preferentially over the normal background brightness data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, if the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and a super reach effect develops, the super reach effect will be supported based on the SP reach brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp controlled in this manner. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but after the super reach effect ends, When the normal state returns, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the normal background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. is output to.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when a super reach effect develops, the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect is used preferentially than the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. do. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the super reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table during a super reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP It is used preferentially over the reach brightness data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game is played in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. The effect lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but once the error is cleared, the super reach effect will resume. When returning to the medium gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the super reach performance that is being controlled, and controls the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 include "unlit,""substantiallyunlit,""lit," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED lights in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the LED in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "0", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of R is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the W (white) data defined as the brightness data of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "0", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "extinguished". Furthermore, when the brightness data (data of W) of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a state other than "turning off" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. The two differ from each other in that blinking is that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

[Explanation regarding game effect lamp]
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11-71 to 12-36.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the image data (video data, The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the animation data). The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary (alphanumeric characters)) and transmits the extended command to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123.

FIG. 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, an expansion for specifying the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance is performed. A command (B421) is sent to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are the targets of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, and which are referenced during lamp control, corresponding to the lamps that are the targets of lamp control. The information that specifies the child table for which lamp control is performed and the information that specifies the maximum time for which lamp control is performed are stored. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, the lamp control targets are frame LEDL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decoration LEDS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), Tacker lamp LA1 ~LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) is specified. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and the logo LEDLL1 to Child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to LL4, 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and lamp control by this child table is specified. 600000ms (600000/10) is specified as the maximum time for this to occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time. If so, the counter is decremented by 1 every 10 ms to measure the 600,000 ms (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In addition, if the production control CPU 120 receives another extended command before timing a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving the extended command, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the lamp control that is currently being executed, and restarts the lamp control. The lamp control of the target lamp is performed using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the extended command received. Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). Therefore, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can continue for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table contains information specifying a grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the execution time is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: Execution time for ramp control by table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table Lamp control is performed by An execution time of 600000 ms is specified in the order in which the lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

Furthermore, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: This Execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control by grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: 2 and this Execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600000ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), grandchild table: 2 and Execution time for ramp control using this grandchild table: 500ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230ms, execution time for ramp control using grandchild table: 600000 ms is specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when controlling a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, the production control CPU 120 uses, for example, the first specified grandchild table to control the target lamp. After performing lamp control for the target lamp and measuring the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, the process of performing lamp control for the target lamp using the specified grandchild table is performed using all specified grandchild tables. are to be performed in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, lamp control is performed using the grandchild table: Perform ramp control using table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, then perform ramp control using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230ms is clocked, then perform ramp control using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600000ms is clocked. . Although it is not assumed that 600,000 ms is required for the production display (production scene), the maximum time for lamp control using the grandchild table specified at the end is 600000ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the production display (production scene). By setting, even if the production control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, the lamp control being executed can be continued for a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes).

In addition, in the child table, when the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, the child tables corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are set as shown in FIG. 11-75, for example. As shown in Figure 11-75, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 may be specified, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 may be specified. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as a grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the production control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to set the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame The same lamp control is performed for both LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, if two grandchild tables are specified as grandchild tables corresponding to frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the production control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to frame the frame. Lamp control is performed for LEDLWL1 to LWL12, and lamp control for frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 is performed using the other grandchild table. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, common lamp control is performed for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed in the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12.

The grandchild table specifies the brightness data to be referenced during lamp control and the execution time for performing lamp control for each lamp (lit location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9. information is stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x00 corresponds to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1). 0000, 0x000000, lamp according to this brightness data Execution time for control: 100ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x 000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA , 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time: 40 ms for performing lamp control using these brightness data is specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, this Execution time for lamp control using brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms , brightness data: 0xAAAA, and execution time for performing lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 100ms, brightness data: 0x00000, this Execution time for lamp control using brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120ms , brightness data: 0x66666, and execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control based on these brightness data is performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, Execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120ms, Brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, Based on this brightness data An execution time for lamp control: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and an execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is performed.

In the luminance data of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the values of frame LEDLWL1 The values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frames LEDLWL2 and LWR2, which correspond to numbers 3 and 4. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 are the values of the frames LEDLWL4 and LWR4. This indicates the RGB value, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, and the data corresponding to No. 5 and 6 The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the frames LEDLWL6 and LWR6, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the frames LEDLWL7, It shows the RGB values of LWR7, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to No. 7 and No. 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Also, like the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified in the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 ( XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 ), the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWL1, and the lower 1 digit of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL1. The values of the 3rd to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL2, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL3, The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 The value of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWL6, and the values of numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWL5. The values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to the number indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL7, and the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the frame LEDLWL8. It indicates the RGB value, and in the luminance data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR2. Yes, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR3, and the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to Nos. 3 and 4 The value of indicates the RGB value of frame LEDLWR4, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of frame LEDLWR5. The values of the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, and the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 are the values of the frame LEDLWR6. It shows the RGB values of LEDLWR7, and the values of the first to third lower digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 show the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In addition, in the brightness data of logo LEDLL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value of the lower fourth digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LEDLL1, and the value of the lower third digit indicates the value of R (Red) of logo LEDLL1. The value of R of logo LEDLL2 is shown, the value of the second lower digit shows the value of R of logo LEDLL3, and the value of the fourth lower digit shows the value of R of logo LEDLL4.

In addition, in the luminance data of the decorative LEDs 1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) of the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value of the fourth lowest digit indicates the value of W (White) of the decorative LED LS1, and the value of the third lowest digit indicates the value of W (White) of the decorative LED LS1. The value of W of the decoration LEDLS2 is shown, the value of the second lower digit shows the value of W of the decoration LEDLS3, and the value of the fourth lower digit shows the value of W of the decoration LEDLS4.

In the brightness data of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values of the lower 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 are the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA1. The lower 1st to 3rd digit values of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA2, and the lower 4 values of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the attacker lamp LA2. The values in the 1st to 6th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA3, and the values in the lower 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to the 3rd and 4th digits indicate the RGB values of the attacker lamp LA4. It is.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", but the luminance data for each element is Corresponds to the current value output for. Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and a current of "1" flows to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can emit light in various colors by flowing currents corresponding to the luminance data to each RGB element. Furthermore, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 can be lit in colors corresponding to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. Further, data "F0F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. In addition, the data "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by flowing a current corresponding to the brightness data to the R (Red) element, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 can emit light in red with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data. By uniformly flowing currents corresponding to the luminance data to the three elements R, G, and B, it is possible to emit white light with a luminance corresponding to the luminance data.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when performing lamp control on a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, for example, the production control CPU 120 outputs the initially specified brightness data to the LED driver. After measuring the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, the process of outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver is performed for all the specified brightness data in the specified order. There is. For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is LE until the first 100ms is measured. to D driver Output brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver until the next 120ms is counted, then brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0 until the next 120ms is counted. x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 , Output 0x000000 to the LED driver, then output brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver, and then output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA until the next 40ms is counted. , Output 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10 ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11-72 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in the child table: 500ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230ms is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed in the third, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, 600000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the brightness data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499 388, 0x4995AA" is specified to be executed at 100ms intervals. For convenience of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms will be referred to as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms will be referred to as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms will be referred to as data 4. .

When performing lamp control for the second designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: The luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on :XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until reaching 500 ms, but after outputting data 1 to data 4, the time is still 500 ms. If the luminance data has not been reached, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 500ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that point, and outputs the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 specified by the child table. Start.

In addition, when performing lamp control for the fourth designated grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: Until the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the luminance data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 are output to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on : If the time has not reached 600000 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order starting from the first data 1. When the time measurement reaches 600000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 at that time. At this time, since the next grandchild table is not specified in the child table, output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: In this case, the time measurement never reaches 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extended command from the display control unit 123 before the time measurement reaches 600,000 ms, the parent table/child table/child table specified by the newly received extended command is displayed. Output of luminance data based on the grandchild table will start.

As shown in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum lamp control time by the child table, and the 10 minute data in such a parent table is used for troubleshooting purposes. Responsible for That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the main board 11, but if some malfunction occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production Even if the control CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so different lamp control is performed one after another from the point where a problem occurs. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the lamp control execution time by the grandchild table specified at the end, and the 10 minute data in such a child table is , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the ramp control by the grandchild table specified at the beginning of the child table will be performed again because the timer of the parent table still remains. play the role of prevention.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that refers to the last specified luminance data. With this configuration, 10 minutes in the luminance data When the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so lamp control is performed again using the luminance data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table. This will play a role in preventing things from being put away. In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

[About the brightness data table used for super reach effect 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used for the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 when executing the low base weak reach A performance Also, when executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses a common weak reach system common title that defines the luminance mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is carried out using.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A and B performances, the production control CPU 120 executes a title color change production in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, the low base weak reach A Whether it is the title display part of the production or the title display part of the low base weak reach B production, a common brightness data table that defines the lighting mode when changing the title character to red in the title color change production is used. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using title common chance up red, executing a title color change effect in the title display part, and changing the title letters to gold, display the title with a low base weak reach A effect. Whether it is a part or a title display part of a low base weak reach B production, a brightness data table is used to define the lighting mode when title characters are changed to gold in a title color change production. Common title common chance increase. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using money.

The execution time of the introduction part is different between the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when executing the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data table is When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach type weak reach A introduction which has defined the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the introduction In the part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the weak reach type weak reach B introduction which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 In the title display part, when executing the reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the low base strong reach A effect is displayed as a brightness data table in the title display part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title that defines the light emitting mode of the title display part of the ~C performance.

The execution time of the introduction part is different for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when performing the low base strong reach A performance, In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach type strong reach A introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach B effect. When executing, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach B introduction which defines the light emission mode peculiar to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table. In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach type strong reach C introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing the low base strongest reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 uses the title display part and the introduction part as a brightness data table from the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance to the introduction part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes up to.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, the high base reach B performance, the high base reach C performance, and the high base reach D performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 The title is displayed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect. In this part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title which defines the light emission mode of the title display part of high base reach A to D effects as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, high base reach A performance When executing, in the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach type reach A introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect as a brightness data table, and When executing the base reach B effect, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the high base reach system reach B introduction, which has a luminance mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach B effect as a brightness data table. When executing the high base reach C effect, the introduction part uses the high base reach type reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode unique to the introduction part of the high base reach C effect as a brightness data table. 9, when performing the high base reach D effect, the introduction part uses the high base reach system reach D introduction which defines the luminous mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect as a brightness data table. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed.

In this way, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title display part uses the common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to improve the game effect. Since the lamp 9 is controlled, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, but in the introduction part, there are separate cases when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the introduction of weak reach system weak reach A and the introduction of weak reach system weak reach B, the respective performance contents are changed in the introduction part of low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance. It becomes possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes depending on the situation, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the introduction part up to the introduction of the performance result in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common weak reach common title is used as a brightness data table in the title display part, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. However, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title starts from when a part of the title characters are displayed until it is displayed at the fixed position. A display control unit includes a weak reach title start that defines a light emission pattern specific to a period, and a weak reach title display that defines a light emission pattern that is unique after a title display period in which title characters are displayed in a fixed position. 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the start of a weak reach title, the performance control CPU 120 can display the brightness data table: The display control unit 123 controls the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the weak reach title start, and the display control unit 123 displays the title in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the display period, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the weak reach title display, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach title display to display the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and Lamp control may be performed for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, one of the brightness data table: weak reach title start or weak reach title display. A common brightness data table may be used for the first and second brightness data tables, and separate brightness data tables with individual contents may be set for the other.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, when executing the title color change effect in the title display part, even if it is the low base weak reach A effect, it is the low base weak reach B effect. Also, since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the common title common chance up red (title common chance up money) as the brightness data table, the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

Also, when executing the low base strong reach A effect, when executing the low base strong reach B effect, and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, the brightness data table is common in the title display part. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system common title of , the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. When executing the B effect and when executing the low base strong reach C effect, game effects are achieved by introducing separate strong reach type strong reach A, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, and strong reach type strong reach C introduction. Since the lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 is set in different light emission modes according to the content of each performance in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect in the introduction part up to the introduction of the performance result in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display part is The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the prologue display period and title characters are A strong reach title start with a unique light emitting pattern during the title start period from when a part is displayed until it is displayed in a fixed position, and a unique light emitting pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. A strong reach title display with a defined pattern, and an extension that specifies the start of a strong reach title when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. By transmitting the command, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Strong reach title start, and displays the display control unit 123. However, when starting the display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performances, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the strong reach title display, the performance control CPU 120 Luminance data table: The lamp control of frames LEDL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 may be performed using a strong reach type title display. In addition, in such a configuration, the brightness data table: Strong reach title is set depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance. A common brightness data table may be used for one of the start and strong reach title displays, and separate brightness data tables may be set with individual contents for the other.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the strong reach prologue has a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and part of the title characters are displayed before being displayed in a fixed position. It is equipped with a strong reach title start that has a unique light emitting pattern for the title start period up to and a strong reach title display that has a unique light emitting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, by transmitting an extended command specifying the strong reach prologue, the effect control CPU 120 controls the brightness. Data table: Lamp control of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the strong reach system prologue, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. When starting display control for the title start period, by transmitting an extended command that specifies the start of a strong reach title, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: start of a strong reach title to display frames LEDLWL1 to When the display control unit 123 performs lamp control of the LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C effects, By sending an extended command that specifies strong reach title display, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach title display to display frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Lamp control may also be performed. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach system prologue A common brightness data table may be used for at least one of , strong reach title start, and strong reach title display, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables in which individual contents are set.

In addition, among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the strong reach prologue has a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and part of the title characters are displayed before being displayed in a fixed position. A strong reach title display that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title start period up to, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. , by sending an extended command that specifies the strong reach prologue, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue to adjust the lamps of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts the display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command specifying the strong reach title display. The performance control CPU 120 may control the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. In addition, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach system prologue , a common brightness data table may be used for one of the strong reach title displays, and a separate brightness data table in which individual contents are set for the other.

Also, when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, when executing the high base reach C effect, and when executing the high base reach D effect, In the title display part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, the high base reach A production , high base reach B effect, high base reach C effect, and high base reach D effect. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled by introducing system reach B, high base reach system reach C, and high base reach system reach D, high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C In the introduction part of the high base reach D performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have a different light emission mode according to the content of each performance, increasing the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high base reach D effect is executed when executing the high base reach A effect, when executing the high base reach B effect, and when executing the high base reach C effect. In this case, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table, but the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is Among them, a high base reach title start that has a unique light emitting pattern during the title start period from when a part of the title text is displayed until it is displayed in a fixed position, and a title display where the title text is displayed in a fixed position. A high base reach title display that has a unique light emission pattern after the period is provided, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the high base reach title display By sending an extended command that specifies the start of a series title, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: High base reach series title start to set the lamps of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command specifying the high base reach title display. The performance control CPU 120 may perform lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach type title display. In addition, in such a configuration, the brightness data is adjusted depending on whether it is a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance. Table: A common brightness data table may be used for one of the high base reach title start and high base reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other.

In addition, when executing a low-based strongest reach effect whose execution time for the title display part does not share with other super reach effects, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect can be used as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. Since the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from to the introduction part, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common weak reach common title is used as the brightness data table in the title display part, both when executing the low base weak reach A effect and when executing the low base weak reach B effect. However, when executing the low base weak reach A effect, the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the determined weak reach type weak reach A title and executing the low base weak reach B effect, the title of the low base weak reach B effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a weak reach system weak reach B title that has a lighting mode specific to the display part, and thereby, a low base weak reach A effect and a low base weak reach B effect. In the title display part, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emitting modes according to the content of each performance, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title display part is The game effect lamp 9 is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table, but when executing the low base strong reach A effect, the low base is used as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach type strong reach A title that has a lighting mode specific to the title display part of the strong reach A performance, and executing a low base strong reach B performance, the title display part Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach B title that defines the light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table, and the low base strong reach C effect is executed. In this case, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach type strong reach C title that defines a light emitting mode peculiar to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as a luminance data table of the title display part. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in a different manner in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance according to the content of each performance. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the title display part in super reach performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the high base reach D performance is executed when the high base reach A performance is executed, when the high base reach B performance is executed, and when the high base reach C performance is executed. Even when performing a high base reach A effect, the title display part is configured to control the game effect lamp 9 using a common high base reach common title as a brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach system reach A title that defines the light emitting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table of the display part, and the high base reach B performance is executed. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach type reach B title which has a luminance mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part, and When executing the reach C effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach type reach C title that has a luminance mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing a high base reach D effect, a high base reach type reach D title that has a luminance mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach D effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part to improve the game effect. The lamp 9 may be controlled, so that the title display part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance can be controlled according to the content of each performance. It becomes possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emission modes, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect is defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. Although the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title, when executing the low base strongest reach effect, the low base strongest reach effect is used as the brightness data table of the title display part Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strongest reach system strongest reach title that has a lighting mode specific to the title display part, and a lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect is determined as the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the strongest reach system.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base weak reach A and B effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common weak reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the introduction The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the introduction of weak reach system weak reach A and the introduction of weak reach system weak reach B as the part brightness data table, but when executing the low base weak reach A effect, , In the title display part and the introduction part, a series of light emission modes from the title display part of low base weak reach A to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table. Using the weak reach system weak reach A title introduction, the game effect lamp 9 is When performing lamp control and executing the low base weak reach B effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part of low base weak reach B to the introduction part are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled by using the weak reach type weak reach B title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common strong reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part. As part of the brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach type strong reach A introduction, strong reach type strong reach B introduction, and strong reach type strong reach C introduction. When executing Reach A performance, a strong reach type strong reach A title that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the introduction and executing the low base strong reach B effect, in the title display part and the introduction part, it is introduced from the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach type strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes up to the part, and executing a low base strong reach C effect, in the title display part and the introduction part. , Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the strong reach system strong reach C title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table. When executing the strong reach D effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D effect is defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using the title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing high base reach effects A to D, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part. Lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach type reach A introduction, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, and high base reach type reach D introduction as part brightness data table. Regarding the configuration, when executing the high base reach A performance, in the title display part and the introduction part, a high base reach A performance that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part as a brightness data table. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using base reach type reach A title introduction and executing high base reach B effect, the title of high base reach B effect is displayed as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the high base reach system reach B title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from the display part to the introduction part, and execute the high base reach C effect, the title display part and In the introduction part, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the high base reach system reach C title introduction which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part of the high base reach C performance to the introduction part as a brightness data table, When executing the high base reach D effect, a series of light emitting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach D effect are defined as a brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using the title introduction, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[About the brightness data table used for super reach effect 2]
Below, the setting contents of the brightness data table used for the super reach effect will be explained. As mentioned above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table explained below, some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table In some cases, only the following tables are shown and other tables are omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
FIG. 11-74 shows the brightness data table: Weak reach used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B421 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach series common title, and FIGS. 11-76 to 11- 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of weak reach common title.

When receiving the extended command B421, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the weak reach common title based on the extended command B421. In the parent table of the weak reach common title, as shown in Figure 11-74, it is set to perform lamp control by referring to the child table: Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it refers to the child table: conduct.

In the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, as shown in FIG. 11-75, grandchild tables and execution times of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are set in the reference order.

The production control CPU 120 first performs lamp control with reference to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (FIG. 11-76) which is initially set in the child table: As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned on in blue for 160 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue-based colors, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

After that, the production control CPU 120 measures 500ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, some of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are turned off, and the rest are turned on in blue, and the parts that are turned off and the parts that are turned on change every 30 ms or 20 ms.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 measures 230ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, and executes the grandchild table: Please refer to the lamp control conduct. As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue-based colors, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. Switch to lamp control using the brightness data table based on the extended commands. As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 continue to light up in a blue color until a new extension command is received, and the brightness continues to change every 100ms, and at the same time, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 continue to change in brightness every 100ms. By doing so, the light emission mode is switched to the one based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table of common weak reach titles has child tables that also refer to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. In the child table, grandchild tables etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and in these grandchild tables, brightness data etc. to be referred to are set in the order of execution, and the production control CPU 120 is Refer to the specified child table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild table and use the same procedure as above to set the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4. Performs lamp control.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 change from off to red until 500ms have passed, then stay on in red until 500ms have passed, and change their brightness every 100ms, and then go from red to almost off until 230ms have passed. After that, it lights up in red again, and then it continues to light up in red until a new extension command is received, and the brightness changes every 100ms.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white until 500ms have elapsed, then turn on in white until 500ms have elapsed, and change the brightness every 100ms, and then go from white to almost off until 230ms have elapsed. After that, it lights up in white again, and then it continues to light up in white until a new extension command is received, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

In addition, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from the off state to blue until 500ms elapse, then turn on in a blue color until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms, and then change from blue to almost blue until 230ms elapse. After going through the off state, it turns on again in blue, and then continues to turn on in blue color until a new extended command is received, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (A), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: common title for weak reach systems, so that the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward the fixed position. During the title start period (period from the start of the title display part until 500ms elapse), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 change from off to blue, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 turn off. The state changes to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from the off state to white (lamp control by the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, during the title display period in which the title characters remain stationary at a fixed position and the title end period in which the title characters move toward the right from the fixed position (the period from the start of the title display period to the end of the title display part), the frame LEDLWL1 ～LWL12, frame LEDLWR2～LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1～LA4 are lit in blue color until 500ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100ms (Lamps according to grandchild table (2) specified by child table in Figure 11-75) Control), then after 230 ms have passed, the lamp goes from blue to almost off and then turns on again in blue (lamp control by the grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns on again in the blue color system. However, the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then until 230ms elapse. The lamp goes from red to almost off, then turns red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns red again, and the brightness changes every 100ms. The state continues (ramp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white until 500ms elapse, and the brightness changes every 100ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then until 230ms elapse. The lamp goes from white to almost off, and then turns white again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then turns white again, and the brightness changes every 100ms. The state continues (ramp control by the grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach system common title is completed, and the lamp control is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it performs lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title based on the extended command B421, thereby controlling the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2. ~LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 are used during the title start period when the title character moves from the left side of the display area toward the regular position, and when the title character moves from the regular position to the right side. The light emitting color and light emitting mode change depending on the end period of the moving title.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
FIG. 11-79 shows a luminance data table: title used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B511 transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to red. FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of common chance up red, and FIG. 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: title common chance up red, and FIGS. -83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: title common chance up red grandchild table.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing at which title characters are changed (title display part The extension command 511 is transmitted at a timing when 1300 ms has passed after the start.

When receiving the extended command B511, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-79) of title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and the child table (FIG. 11-79) specified by the parent table. -80), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-81 to 83), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (Figures 11-81 to 83). ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have passed, and then turn on in red until 1200ms have passed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals. changes, and then gradually turns off from red in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off until 200ms have elapsed, then turn on in red until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, then gradually turn off from red in 280ms, and the new expansion The light remains off until a command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200ms have elapsed, and change their brightness at 20ms intervals, and then gradually change from white to white at 280ms. The light goes out and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing a title color change effect that changes from white to red, the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have passed after the start of the title display period, and then the title characters are displayed in red. , and after another 1200 ms has elapsed, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extension command B511 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, so that the title characters shine. During the period in which it is displayed in a manner that looks like this (the period until 200 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B511), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 blink in white. The light goes out, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (a period from 200 ms after receiving extended command B511 to 1200 ms), frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white. Then, the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-80). In addition, during the title end period (period after 1400 ms has elapsed after receiving the extended command B511) when the title characters move from the regular position to the right and disappear, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually turns off from red, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 gradually turn off from red, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (Lamps by grandchild table (7) specified by child table in Figure 11-80) control).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is sent when starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red is completed, and it is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
FIG. 11-84 shows a luminance data table: title used when the display control unit 123 receives an extended command: B512, which is transmitted when performing display control of a title color change effect that changes title characters from white to gold. FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the common chance up gold, and FIG. 11-85 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and FIGS. -88 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of title common chance up money.

The display control unit 123 controls the timing at which title characters are changed (title display part The extension command 512 is transmitted at a timing when 1300 ms has passed after the start.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B512, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-84) of title common chance up money based on the extended command 512, and the child table (FIG. 11-84) specified in the parent table. -85), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-86 to 88), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 with reference to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

As a result, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 flash in white at intervals of 40ms until 200ms have elapsed, and then turn on in yellow until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness increases at intervals of 20ms. changes, and then gradually turns off from yellow in 280 ms, and remains off until a new extension command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off until 200ms have elapsed, then turn on in red until 1200ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, then gradually turn off from red in 280ms, and the new expansion The light remains off until a command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 blink white at 40ms intervals until 200ms have elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200ms have elapsed, and change their brightness at 20ms intervals, and then gradually change from white to white at 280ms. The light goes out and remains off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in FIG. 11-152 (B), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period of 500 s from the start is the title start period, and after that, the period of 2200 ms is the title display period, After that, a period of 300 ms is the title end period. In addition, when executing a title color change effect that changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow for 200 ms at the timing of 800 ms after the start of the title display period, and then the title characters change to gold. , and after another 1200 ms has elapsed, the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extended command B512 is received at the timing of executing the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money, so that the title characters shine. During the period in which the frame is displayed in a manner that looks like this (the period until 200 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B512), the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 blink in white, and the logo LEDs L1 to LL4 blink in white. The light goes out, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash in white (lamp control by the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title ends (period from 200ms after receiving extended command B512 to 1200ms), frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, Attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and the brightness changes at 20ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and brightness changes at 20ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white. Then, the brightness changes at intervals of 20 ms (lamp control by the grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-85). In addition, during the title end period (period after 1400 ms has passed after receiving the extended command B512) when the title characters move from the regular position to the right side and disappear, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 gradually turns off from yellow, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 turn off from red and gradually turns off, and decoration LEDs LS1 to LS5 gradually turn off from white (Lamps by grandchild table (10) specified by child table in Figure 11-85) control).

In addition, after 3000 ms have passed after the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) that is transmitted in conjunction with starting the display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. As a result, the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up money is completed, and the lamp control is switched to the lamp control based on the brightness data table according to the introduction part in the low base weak reach A and B effects.

[Modified example of brightness data table used in title color change effect]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title to frame the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B productions, regardless of whether or not title change production is performed. If you control the lamps of LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and do not perform a title change effect, use the brightness data table as is: Using the weak reach common title, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 ~LWR12, when controlling the lamps of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 and performing a title change effect, the title common chance up red or By receiving an extended command that specifies title common chance up money, the color of the title text changes.Brightness data table: Frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 using title common chance up red or title common chance up money. ~LWR12, the configuration was to perform lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table is set with the brightness data when title change effects are not performed: Weak reach common title (white) , In the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, a brightness data table with brightness data set when performing a title change performance in which the title characters change to red: Weak reach system common title (red) and title The display control unit 123 includes a brightness data table in which brightness data is set when performing a title change effect in which the characters change to gold: Weak reach common title (gold), and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the title display part, if the title change effect is not performed, the effect control CPU 120 can change the brightness data by sending an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (white). Table: Lamp control of frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the weak reach system common title (white), and the display control unit 123 displays the titles of low base weak reach A and B effects. When starting the display control of the display part, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to red, by sending an extended command that specifies a weak reach common title (red), the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) to control the frames LEDL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 controls the low base weak reach A, When starting the display control of the title display part of the B effect, if you want to perform a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold, by sending an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (gold), The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: Weak reach common title (gold).

As a result, the performance control CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold when performing a title change performance that changes the title characters to red when not performing the title change performance in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B performances. It becomes possible to control the lamps of the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 in a light emission mode according to each situation when performing a title change effect.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base weak reach A production]
FIG. 11-89 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B400 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A production: Weak reach system Weak reach FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing A, and FIG. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table for introducing brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A, and FIGS. 11-91 to 11 -95 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach type weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B400, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-89) for introducing the weak reach type weak reach A based on the extended command B400, and the child table (FIG. 11-89) specified in the parent table ( 11-90), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-91 to 95), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. are set, and furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-91 to 11-95, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene of the performance are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
FIG. 11-96 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B40F that is sent when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance: weak reach system weak reach FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for introducing B, and FIG. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table for introducing brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B, and FIG. 11-99 to FIG. -103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of weak reach type weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-96) for introducing the weak reach type weak reach B based on the extension command B40F, and the child table (FIG. 11-96) specified in the parent table ( 11-97), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-98 to 103), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the luminous color according to the scene of the production, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-98 to 11-103, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
FIG. 11-104 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B517 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects: strong reach FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title. 109 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of the strong reach common title.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the extension command B517, and the child table (Fig. 11-105) specified in the parent table. -106), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-107 to 109), and the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDLS1 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table ~LS5, performs lamp control of attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, in the child table shown in Figure 11-106, the scenes of the production such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, title end period, etc. that constitute the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C production are switched. A grandchild table is set for the execution time according to the time, the luminous color and the light emission mode according to the scene of the production, and furthermore, the grandchild table shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 includes characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production. Luminance data that corresponds to the luminous color and luminous mode are set.

As a result, frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are used to display the scene of the production in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production, characters appearing, etc. The color and mode of emitted light change accordingly.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of low base strong reach A production]
FIG. 11-110 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B500 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A effect: strong reach system strong reach FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of A introduction, and FIG. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and FIG. 11-112 to FIG. -117 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of strong reach type strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B500, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-110) for introducing the strong reach type strong reach A based on the extended command B500, and the child table (FIG. 11-110) specified in the parent table ( 11-111), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-112 to 117), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 includes the execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the grandchild table that becomes the luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-112 to 117, brightness data for the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene are set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect]
FIG. 11-118 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B504 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B effect: strong reach system strong reach FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of B introduction, and FIG. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and FIG. 11-120 to FIG. -124 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of strong reach type strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B504, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-118) for introducing the strong reach system strong reach B based on the extended command B504, and the child table (FIG. 11-118) specified in the parent table ( 11-119), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-120 to 124), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 includes an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, a grandchild table with the luminescent color and luminous mode according to the production scene. are set, and furthermore, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-120 to 124, luminance data that is the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the performance scene is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect]
When the display control unit 123 receives the extended command B505 that is sent when controlling the display of the introduction part in the low base strong reach C performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a strong reach type strong reach based on the extended command B505. Specify the parent table (not shown) for introducing C, and refer to the child table (not shown) specified in the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed for the frames LEDL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table of strong reach type strong reach C introduction will have an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, and a luminescent color and luminous mode according to the production scene. A grandchild table is set up, and the grandchild table that introduces strong reach type strong reach C will have a luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production. Brightness data is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDS1 to LS5 are set according to the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C production, the characters appearing, etc. The luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in low base strongest reach performance]
FIG. 11-125 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B600 transmitted when performing display control of the low-base strongest reach effect: the parent of the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the table, and FIG. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and FIGS. 11-127 to 11-135 are Brightness data table: This is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table for the introduction of the strongest reach system strongest reach title. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B600, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (Figure 11-126) for introducing the strongest reach title based on the extended command B600, and the child table (FIG. 11-126) specified in the parent table ( 11-127), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-128 to 135), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 contains the execution time corresponding to the time when the scenes of the production change from the title display part of the low-base strongest reach production to the end of the introduction part, the luminous color according to the production scene, and the luminous emission color. A grandchild table is set as a mode, and further, in the grandchild table shown in FIGS. 11-127 to 135, luminance data is set, which is a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production. .

As a result, frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and decoration LEDS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach production, the characters appearing, etc. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
FIG. 11-136 shows the brightness data table: High base reach used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B605 transmitted when controlling the display of the title display part in high base reach A to D productions. FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the series common title, and FIG. 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach common title, and -140 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of the high base reach common title.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B605, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and the child table (Fig. 11-136) specified in the parent table. 11-137), grandchild table specified in the child table (Figures 11-138 to 140), frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table Performs lamp control for LEDs LS1 to LS5 and attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 shows the execution according to the time when the scenes of the production, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period, which constitute the title display part in the high base reach performances A to D, change. A grandchild table is set that has a luminous color and a luminous mode according to the time and scene of the production, and the grandchild table shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 has a luminous color that corresponds to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the production. , luminance data that is a light emission mode is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are used for the production scenes, appearing characters, etc. in the title display part of high base reach A to D productions. At the same time, the luminescent color and luminescent mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach A performance]
FIG. 11-141 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B606 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance: high base reach type reach A FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the introduction, and FIG. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach system reach A introduction, and FIGS. 145 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: grandchild table of high base reach system reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When receiving the extended command B606, the production control CPU 120 specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-141) for introducing high base reach type reach A based on the extended command B606, and the child table (FIG. 11-141) specified in the parent table ( 11-142), the grandchild table specified in the child table (Fig. 11-143 to 145), the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, Controls the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach A production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. Further, in the grandchild tables shown in FIGS. 11-143 to 145, brightness data that is the luminous color and luminous mode corresponding to the characters appearing in the scene of the performance is set.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach A production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach B effect]
FIG. 11-146 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B607 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach B performance: high base reach type reach B FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach B introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B607, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-146) for introducing the high base reach type reach B based on the extension command B607, and the child table ( 11-147), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the child table (not shown), , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach B production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of the high base reach system Reach B introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters, etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. has been done.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach B production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach C effect]
FIG. 11-148 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B608 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach C performance: high base reach system reach C FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach C introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B608, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-148) for introducing high base reach type reach C based on the extension command B608, and the child table ( 11-149), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the grandchild table (not shown) and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table. , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach C production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of high base reach type reach C introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach C production. has been done.

As a result, the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach C production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach D effect]
FIG. 11-150 shows the brightness data table used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B609 transmitted when controlling the display of the introduction part in the high base reach D performance: high base reach type reach D FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of introduction, and FIG. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of brightness data table: high base reach system reach D introduction. Note that the child tables are omitted except for some setting contents, and the grandchild tables are all omitted.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the extension command B609, it specifies the parent table (FIG. 11-150) for introducing high base reach system reach D based on the extension command B609, and the child table (FIG. 11-150) specified in the parent table ( 11-151), the grandchild table (not shown) specified in the child table, the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the logo LEDLL1 to LL4, and the decorative LEDS1 to LS5 by referring to the brightness data specified in the grandchild table (not shown). , performs lamp control of the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 includes a grandchild table that has an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the production changes in the introduction part of the high base reach D production, a luminous color according to the scene of the production, and a luminous mode. In addition, the grandchild table of the high base reach type reach D introduction is set with luminance data that becomes the luminous color and luminous mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the scene of the production in the introduction part of the high base reach D production. has been done.

As a result, frame LEDs WL1 to LWL12, frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will emit light in accordance with the scene of the production, the characters appearing, etc. in the introduction part of the high base reach D production. The color and luminescence mode change.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the super reach effect, and in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach mode. let By doing this, when a decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and it is possible to draw more attention to the title characters.

In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced to a smaller size decorative pattern (small), The title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the reduced decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reduced size to attract the player's gaze, and the display position of the reduced decorative pattern (small) is used to display the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By displaying the title characters, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title characters.

Also, in the title display part of the super reach effect, at the timing when the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode is displayed, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect will be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode. This makes it easier to draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than low base weak reach A and B performances, and low base weak reach A. , The title characters corresponding to the B effect and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear in a state where they overlap with one of the decorative symbols in reach mode (the left decorative symbol). Therefore, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the super reach effect includes the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach effects A to C. Since it appears in a state where it overlaps with the pattern (decorative pattern on both sides), it is possible to display the title character corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach effects A to C, and the title letters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect are the same as those of the decorative pattern that has become a reach mode. After appearing in a state overlapping one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left side) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides), it is displayed in the fixed position, and even during the period when it is displayed in the fixed position, it is in reach mode. Since the title character is displayed overlapping a part of the decorative pattern on both sides, it is easy to draw attention to the title character even after the title character is displayed in a fixed position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the reach mode. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Then, when an odd number of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display position of the odd number of decorative symbols in the reach mode is used in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed, and an even number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title display will be In the part, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed using the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. When odd-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in reach mode, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to low base strong reach A to C effects are used to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are in reach mode. If an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in a low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern in a reach mode in the title display part. Title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed as if used. By doing this, when the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has become the reach mode, but the low base weak reach A, B effect, the low base To display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances using the display position of the decorative pattern in the reach mode in the title display part of the strong reach A to C performances. In this way, the title characters can be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and the title characters can also draw more attention.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes the reach mode, the performance control CPU 120 controls the low base weak reach A and B performances, the low base strong reach A to C performances, and the low base strongest reach. It is possible to perform the performance. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the production result is announced. It is composed of both. Then, when an odd number of decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B productions, the display position of the odd number of decorative symbols in the reach mode is used in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed, and an even number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title display will be In the part, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed using the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. When odd-numbered decorative patterns are displayed in reach mode, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to low base strong reach A to C effects are used to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbols that are in reach mode. If an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode before the title display part in a low base strong reach A to C production, the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern in a reach mode in the title display part. If the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach effects A to C are displayed, and an odd number of decorative symbols are displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, then in the title display part , the title character corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect is displayed using the display position of the odd numbered decorative pattern that is in the reach mode, and the even numbered decorative pattern is in the reach mode before the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. When displayed, in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed so as to use the display positions of even-numbered decorative symbols in the reach mode. By doing this, when the decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has become the reach mode, but the low base weak reach A, B effect, the low base Strong reach A to C production, low base weak reach A to B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base using the display position of the decorative pattern that became reach mode in the title display part of the low base strongest reach production By displaying title characters corresponding to the strongest reach effect, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that became a reach mode is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode, the player can select either ornament. This draws attention to whether or not the design is in a reach mode, and it is possible to draw more attention to the title characters.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Then, a decorative pattern is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in the super reach effect, and in the title display part, title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed using the display position of the decorative pattern in the ready-to-reach mode. let By doing this, when a decorative symbol becomes a ready-to-reach mode, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol caused the ready-to-reach mode. By displaying the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative pattern, the title characters can also be naturally drawn to attention, and as a result, the title can be displayed suitably.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach B performance. The low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B production, the ally character "Yumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yumemu" announces that there will be a jackpot, and in the low base strong reach B production, Allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are used, and the allied characters "Jam" and "Nana" notify that the jackpot will be won. In the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the display starts with the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" placed in the front and the enemy character "Robo" in the back, and the low base weak In the introduction part of Reach B production, the ally character "Mumemu" is arranged so that the enemy character "Boingo" is not on the front side and the enemy character "Boingo" is on the back side (the ally character "Mumemu" and the enemy character "Boingo" are on the left and right) Start displaying in a facing manner). By doing this, for the low base weak reach B performance where the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, the friendly characters "Jam" and "Nana" who will be notified of the jackpot will be on the front side, and the enemy character "Robo" will be on the front side. By starting from an arrangement where ``'' is on the back side, the player can empathize with the game, and it becomes easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, ally characters are characters that are given benefits when they win in battle, and enemy characters are characters that are not given benefits when they win in battle. ” and “Nana” are displayed in the front position with their backs turned, the enemy character “Robo” is displayed in the back position with their backs facing you, and the ally characters “Jam” and “Nana” and the enemy character “Robo” are displayed in the back position. '', and the low base strong reach B effect, which has relatively high expectations, has the player facing the same direction as the ally characters ``Jam'' and ``Nana'', so the player It becomes easier to make the player empathize with the player, and it becomes easier to make the player realize that the player has a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

Also, in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B production, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part. Therefore, when the title characters disappear, the player who has been paying attention to the title characters naturally starts to look at the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo."

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 is configured to control the low base weak reach A, B production, the low base weak reach A, B production, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and the low base weak reach A, B production, which has a longer production time. It is possible to perform strong base reach A to C performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Also, dialogue subtitles are used for both the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances. In the low base weak reach A and B productions, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part continue to be displayed, while the low base In the strong reach A to C effects, title characters are displayed without dialogue subtitles in the title display part. By doing this, the low base strong reach A to C productions that have a relatively high expectation of a jackpot and a long execution time are displayed so that the title characters and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, and the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high. In the case of low base weak reach A and B productions with low intensity and short execution time, even if the display of dialogue subtitles and title characters overlap, by finishing the display of title characters first, attention will also be paid to dialogue subtitles. This makes it possible to suitably provide the title characters and dialogue subtitles to the player, and as a result, it is possible to suitably display the title.

In addition, if title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, in the subsequent introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed at the same time as the title characters will be displayed until the display ends. Since the scene does not change, you can draw attention to the title text and then the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, but the audio corresponding to the title characters is not output. It becomes easier to hear the audio that corresponds to dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display for the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D is composed of multiple characters (``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B ~ D)''). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach effect A to D, the display of title characters is started at an enlarged size where only part of the multiple characters is visible, and from the enlarged size The display size is gradually reduced, and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all the multiple characters can be seen.By doing this, the title display for the strongest low-base reach effect and the high-base reach effect A to D is displayed. In the part, multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only part of them can be seen, and then gradually become smaller and displayed at a reduced size where all characters can be seen, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the title characters. can.

In addition, before the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect is started, the movable body 32 is moved so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and after the movable body 32 is operated, the movable body 32 is moved to the initial stage. A background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period during which the falling effect is executed until returning to the position, and when the movable body 32 returns to the initial position, all of the plurality of characters forming the title character are not visible. , and starts displaying title characters in an enlarged size that fills the display area and makes the background invisible, and then displays title characters in a reduced size and a background dedicated to displaying the title. By doing so, it is possible to create an impact with the display method of the title characters, and at the same time, the background can be switched without any discomfort, and the title characters can be suitably shown to the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and high base reach A is controlled. ~In the introduction part of the D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (introducing high base reach type reach A, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode depending on the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (luminance data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display for the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach performance A to D is composed of multiple characters (``Catch the Bakushu with 6 people!'', ``Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B ~ D)''). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and high base reach A to D performance, the title display part is ended by expanding and displaying multiple characters from the state where multiple characters are displayed, Display the background at the start of the introduction part.By doing this, the player is paying attention to the title characters in the title display part, and using the title characters appropriately, the background corresponding to the next introduction part is displayed. You can switch between the two without feeling any discomfort.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and high base reach A is controlled. ~In the introduction part of the D production, use the brightness data table for the introduction part (introducing high base reach type reach A, high base reach type reach B introduction, high base reach type reach C introduction, high base reach type reach D introduction) to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (the brightness data table composed of the brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach performances A and B, and low base strong reach performances A to C. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. Also, the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances (T1-1 to 2) is different from the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances (T2-1 to 3). , in both title display parts, the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of the title end period until the end of the title. In addition, both in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. To display title characters so that the period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title display period displayed at the fixed position can be made the longest. By doing this, you can draw attention to the type of title characters. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title start period until it is displayed at the regular position will be displayed from the regular position display. By setting the time period until the end of the title to be longer than the title end period, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period is the same. By doing this, you can make the title display part easier to understand.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance both in a normal state and in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Also, the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the variable probability state. , in both title display parts, the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of the title end period until the end of the title. In both the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is the title end period. Display the title character so that it is longer than . By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part is different between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable probability state, the title display part can be displayed by making the title display period displayed at the fixed position the longest. It can draw attention to the type of characters. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the variable state, the title start period until it is displayed in the fixed position is changed from the display in the fixed position to the end of the display. By setting the time period to be longer than the title end period, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period can be made the same. , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state is longer than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance executed in a variable probability state is relatively short, it is possible to proceed with the game in a variable probability state at a good tempo, while the title display part in the super reach performance executed in a normal state Since the execution time of the part is relatively long, it can be thoroughly stimulated.

In addition, regardless of the type of super reach performance executed in the variable probability state, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have lower jackpot expectations among the super reach performances executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part in the super reach performance is high and the probability is variable, and the execution time of the title display part is relatively short, the expectation of a jackpot can be made just by executing the super reach performance.

In addition, the execution time of the super reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of super reach effect executed in the variable probability state, but among the super reach effect executed in the normal state, The expected jackpot is higher than the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a low jackpot expectation, and the execution time of the super reach performance and the execution time of the title display part, regardless of the type of super reach performance executed in the variable probability state. Even if it is the same, you can expect a big hit just by executing the super reach effect.

Also, among the super reach performances executed in normal conditions, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B, is the same as the low base weak reach performances. The execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in the AB performance, and has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performances A to C. It is set longer than the execution time of the title display part in A to C performances. By doing this, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer for a super reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be more strongly promoted.

Also, among the super reach performances executed in normal conditions, the title display period during which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The execution time is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB production, and the title display period in the low base strongest reach production, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C productions. The execution time is set longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the longer the execution time of the title display period, so that the excitement can be firmly promoted.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display part includes the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the fixed position, the title display period when it is displayed at the fixed position, and the time when the display ends from the display at the fixed position. It consists of a title end period up to. In the title display part, title characters are displayed such that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing so, the type of title character can be drawn to the attention by making the title display period displayed at a fixed position the longest. Further, by setting the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position to be longer than the title end period from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, it is possible to influence which title characters are displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period can be made the same. , the title display part can be made easier to understand.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C and low base strongest reach performance. The low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the low base strong reach effect A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in white, and in red, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the white mode. It is possible to display it in various ways. In the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach performance A to C, the corresponding expectation level suggestion display is displayed, and then the title characters are displayed in a larger size than the expectation level suggestion display. At this time, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in a common manner. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect and the low base strong reach effect A to C are larger in size than the expectation level suggestion display, and their appearance suggests the level of expectation. Therefore, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation level suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the expectation level suggestion first. In addition, since the expectation level suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, attention can be drawn to the subsequent appearance of the title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B performance. The low base strong reach B and C effects include both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B production, and in the second mode (4 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach C production. ) to display the expectation level suggestion display. At this time, the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance are highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, even when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the first mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part in the low base strong reach C production. Even when displaying the expectation level suggestion display, the development cost can be reduced by making the highlighted display a common mode.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B production, the expectation level is suggested by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, In the low base strong reach C performance, the level of expectation is suggested by N+1 (4) objects, and each star-shaped object is highlighted, and even when one object is highlighted, the level of expectation is 0. Even when five objects are highlighted, the highlighting is done in a common manner. By doing this, whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting is done in a common manner. This can reduce development costs.

Furthermore, in the expectation level suggestion display, the time during which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are common. By doing this, the time for highlighting one star-shaped object and the time for highlighting 0.5 star-shaped objects are made the same, thereby reducing development costs. I can do it.

In addition, in the expectation level suggestion display, a common expectation level suggestion sound is output both when one star-shaped object is highlighted and when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. . By doing this, a common expectation level suggestion sound is output whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. This can reduce development costs.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for strong base systems), and the low base strong reach In the introduction parts of B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base system common title) in the title display part, but in the low base strong reach B performance In the title display part, a brightness data table for displaying the title in the low base strong reach B performance (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance (strong reach type strong reach B title) )) to control the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach type strong reach C title) that is configured with brightness data corresponding to the low base strong reach. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display in the title display part of the B performance and the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the appropriate light emission according to the title display is performed. The game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light depending on the mode, and as a result, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C, low base strongest reach performances, and high base reach performances A to D. For the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production, the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced are all It is also composed of Further, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach performances A to C, the low base strongest reach performances, and the high base reach performances A to D, an expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects can be displayed. In the expectation level suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the second star-shaped object is highlighted while continuing to highlight the first star-shaped object. After that, the highlighting for the first star-shaped object ends, and the highlighting for the third star-shaped object is performed. By doing this, in the expectation level suggestion display, the highlighting for the second star-shaped object starts before the highlighting for the first star-shaped object ends, but the highlighting for the third star-shaped object ends. Since the highlighting of the objects does not start until the highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, it becomes easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the expectation level suggestion display, an expectation level suggestion sound is output every time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation level suggestion sound for the first star-shaped object is finished, the next star-shaped object is highlighted. A sound indicating the expectation level of highlighting for the object is output. By doing so, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object does not overlap with the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that indicate the degree of expectation.

In addition, the expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects and the characters "expectation level" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the level of expectation. '' is carried out in a size that overlaps with the above. By doing so, by highlighting the star-shaped object, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the level of expectation. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when highlighting some of the star-shaped objects among the plurality of star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is changed to text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. Although this is a superimposed configuration, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighted display for the star-shaped object may be superimposed on the text indicating that the star-shaped object indicates the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C, low base strongest reach performances, and high base reach performances A to D. For the low base strong reach A to C production, the low base strongest reach production, and the high base reach A to D production, the title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and the introduction part until the production result is announced are all It is also composed of In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not started yet, and multiple hold displays can be displayed in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach effects A to D. It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of star-shaped objects. Then, in the title display part of the low base strong reach performance A to C, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach performance A to D, the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple objects is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the low base strongest reach effects, and the high base reach effects A to D. Since the pending display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, it is possible to prevent the pending display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation level suggesting display.

In particular, the maximum number of active displays corresponding to pending displays and variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star objects that make up the expectation suggestion display, but the maximum number of pending displays and active displays will be Even if low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach effects A to D are executed in the displayed situation, the pending display and active display constitute a star-shaped object that constitutes an expectation level suggestion display. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the maximum number of is displayed.

Further, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect in which the display area is displayed in a single color is executed before the start of the title display part, the hold display can be ended without any discomfort.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, the brightness data table for title display (strong base common title, high base, high base reach type Common title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, the brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach system strong reach A introduction , introduction of strong reach system strong reach B, introduction of strong reach system strong reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the high base reach A to D performances, the game uses a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. Since the effect lamp 9 is controlled, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the brightness data table for title display (luminance data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach system strongest reach title) ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the introduction part (luminance data composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect) The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction), and with such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness for the introduction part Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the data table, the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display, and these results The title can be suitably displayed as follows.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach performances A to C and high base reach performances A to C. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the high base reach A to C performances are comprised of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A production/high base reach A production, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of the first number (3) star-shaped objects, and the low base strong reach B production/ In the title display part of the high base reach B performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the first number, and a low base strong reach C performance/high In the title display part in the base reach C performance, it is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display composed of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects, which is larger than the second number. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4) (0.5 ), and the expected jackpot when the low base strong reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4)/high base reach C performance is executed and the low base strong reach corresponding to the second number (3.5) The difference from the jackpot expectation level when the B performance/high base reach B performance is executed is when the low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. It is larger than the difference between the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), and the second number ( 3.5) to the third number (4), the increase in the number of star objects is the same, but it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation is larger when the number increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when the number of star objects increases. While it is possible to make the user expect a jackpot more than the number of objects, it does not make the player expect an excessive jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance, and the number of title display parts in the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance is greater than the third number (4). It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5), and the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) (0.5 ) is smaller than the difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and is the lowest base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance corresponding to the fourth number (4.5). The difference between the jackpot expectation level when the is executed and the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is the third number (4). ) corresponding to the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance when the jackpot expectation level is executed and the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to the first number (3)/high base reach B performance is executed. This is larger than the difference between the expected jackpot and the expected jackpot. By doing this, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). The increase in the number of star-shaped objects is smaller when increasing from the first number (4.5) to the fourth number (4.5), but the increase in the number of star objects is smaller than when increasing from the first number (3) to the third number (4). The amount of increase in the jackpot expectation is greater when increasing from (4) to the fourth number (4.5), so the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the smaller the number of star-shaped objects increased. But you can expect to hit the jackpot.

Also, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1. Yes, the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation level suggestion display in the title display part increases by 1 from the first number (3) to become the third number (4). If the number is increased by 0.5 to the fourth number (4.5), it can be expected to be an even bigger hit.

In addition, the jackpot expectation level and the high base reach B corresponding to the second number (3.5) when the high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The difference between the jackpot expectation level when the performance is executed is the difference between the jackpot expectation level and the second number (3.5) when the low base strong reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state. ) is larger than the difference from the jackpot expectation level when the low base strong reach B performance corresponding to the above is executed. By doing this, it is possible to make people expect that the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, will hit the jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases. can.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B. While the expectation level suggestion display is displayed, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have relatively high expectations, is better than the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have relatively low expectations. In addition, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B. It is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the strong base reach performances A to C than for the low base weak reach performances A and B.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), The title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances has no prologue display period and consists only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances does not have a prologue display period. is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. Also, it is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the low base strong reach performances A to C than the low base weak reach performances A and B.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, and the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is , consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period (title start period, title display period, title end period) in which title characters are displayed, and the title display part in the low base strongest reach production is It consists only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach performance A to C. . By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, so It is possible to make the user realize that the level of expectation is higher for the strongest base reach performance than for the low base strong reach performances A to C.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B performances and low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. . The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Ru. In addition, in the low base weak reach performances A and B, there are cases where a jackpot is not announced as the performance result, there are cases where a loss is announced as the performance result, and there are cases where it develops into other super reach performances. In the low base strong reach A to C performances, there are cases where a jackpot is announced as a result of the performance, and there are cases where a miss is reported. Then, the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach performances A to C, while the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, while the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances that may directly notify that there will be a jackpot, it will also directly notify that there will be a jackpot. Since the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances that are not reported, it is possible to prevent the low base weak reach A and B performances from creating an excessive sense of expectation. .

In addition, in the title display part of low base weak reach performances A and B, it is possible to display title letters in a golden form that is sure to develop into other super reach performances, so the expectation level suggestion display is Even the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances that is not displayed can draw the attention of the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach effects A to C and low base strongest reach. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach are composed of both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach may be executed via a selection effect using title characters that correspond to multiple super reach effects, and the low base strong reach effects A to C It is possible to display an expectation level suggestion display together with the title characters in the performance, the title display part of the lowest base strongest reach, and the selected performance. Then, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C production and the low base strongest reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, When displaying the expectation level suggestion display in a selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display constituted by a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C production and low base strongest reach, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects will be displayed. However, when displaying the expectation level suggestion display in the selection performance, the expectation level suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so only the title display part is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the step-by-step display of the expectation level suggestion display even in the previous selection performance.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes step by step from a super reach performance with a low jackpot expectation to a super reach performance with a high jackpot expectation by operating the push button 31B, and it takes the amount of time it takes to change one stage in the selection performance. The time, that is, the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect, is displayed in one step in the expectation level suggestion display of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the low base strongest reach effect. In some cases, this time is shorter than the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to gold after being highlighted, and it is possible to give a sense of speed to the gradual changes in the selection effect.

In addition, the selection performance is a performance that changes at each stage to a super reach performance that has a higher expectation of jackpot than the current super reach performance, and each time it changes by one stage, it is necessary to change to the next stage. The number of times the push button 31B is operated increases. By doing this, it is possible to irritate the player as the expectation level of the jackpot in the super reach effect increases.

Furthermore, when the low base strong reach performance A to C performance or the low base strongest reach performance is selected as the selection performance, the game starts from the title display part of the super reach performance. By doing this, even if the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effects are executed via the selection effects, it will start from the title display part, so which super reach effect will be executed in the end. It is easy for the player to determine whether the

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters of the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation where the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect. This is a situation after it has already been announced that a jackpot will be won, and by moving the title characters of the jackpot start performance more widely, it is possible to celebrate that the game will be controlled into a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the super reach performance, it is possible to congratulate the control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the super reach effect, when displaying title characters, a background dedicated to title display is displayed (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D). The background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the super reach effect. By doing this, the background of the title characters of the jackpot start effect can be moved more greatly to congratulate the control of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach performance is a static image, but the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach performance may be a moving image. By displaying the background of the title characters of the start performance in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to title display in the super reach performance, it is possible to congratulate the control to a jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) displayed in the introduction part encourage the player to move (operate), and should be moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part. This allows the player to intuitively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, in the operation promotion performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, the player is prompted to operate the push button 31B, and operation promotion characters (small) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion characters (small) are also used. (Large) can be displayed, and both the operation promotion characters (small) and operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, whether the operation promotion characters (small) or operation promotion characters (large) are moved larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, players can intuitively Actions (operations) can be encouraged.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the operation promotion letters (small) in a manner that moves more than the title letters of the super reach performance, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to perform an operation (operation). In addition, even in such a configuration, both the operation promotion characters (small) and the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, so that the operation promotion characters (small) or operation prompting characters (large), by moving them larger than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, the number of characters (3) of the operation promotion characters (small)) is smaller than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title characters of the super reach effect, so even if you move the operation promotion characters (small)) greatly, the content of the characters will not change. It can be recognized.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in the title display part of the super reach effect, explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach effect can be displayed. At this time, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory characters are added in addition to the title characters. can.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory text in a manner with greater movement than the title text in the super reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the explanatory text is added in addition to the title text. .

Furthermore, since the explanatory text suggests that the super reach performance is advantageous, the fact that the explanatory text is added can draw further attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach performances A and B, and the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach performances A to C are displayed in a larger size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have relatively high expectations, are better than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B, which have relatively low expectations. Since the font size is displayed larger than the title, you can experience that the expectation of jackpot is higher in the low base strong reach A to C effects than the low base weak reach A and B effects just by looking at the title text. It can be recognized.

In addition, the number of characters (10) that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B is greater than the number of characters that make up the title characters (7, 8) that correspond to the low base strong reach performances B and C. The display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C performances is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach performances A and B. By doing this, the display area size of one character for the title character corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger, so the low base strong reach B and C effects are better than the low base weak reach. It is possible to make the player realize that the expectation level of jackpot is higher than that of performances A and B.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances, the brightness data table for each title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems). Control the game effect lamp 9 using the game effect lamp 9 using The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by using A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances, a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part is used. Since the game effect lamp 9 is controlled, it is possible to cause the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a suitable light emission mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a ready-to-reach mode. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a ready-to-reach mode before the title display part in a super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in a ready-to-reach mode is displayed reduced to a small-sized decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the size of the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, at least one of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect will be displayed in a larger size than the reduced decorative pattern (small), drawing attention to the title character in the title display part. be able to.

Further, any characters of the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) when the reach mode is reached can be reliably recognized, and after that, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced and becomes the decorative pattern (small), and the Since each character constituting the title character is displayed in a larger size than the pattern (small), the title character can be drawn to attention in the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed, whereas the situation where the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed in the super reach effect is when it is not yet known whether or not it is a jackpot. The situation is after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the operation promotion letters (small), it is possible to celebrate that the jackpot game state is controlled. can.

In addition, the title character of the jackpot start effect consists of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS", and after "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the regular position, and then "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the regular position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the regular position gradually expand. Is displayed. "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed in the smallest font size when displayed at the top of the regular position and the bottom of the regular position, and "BIG", "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed in the smallest size. The size of the characters when displayed at the upper and lower fixed positions is larger than the size of the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect are always displayed larger than the letters that make up the operation promotion letters (small), making it even more congratulatory that the jackpot game state is controlled. be able to.

In addition, the smallest character of the character string that constitutes the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the largest character of the character string that constitutes the operation promotion character (small). By doing this, no matter which character you pay attention to, the title character of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the operation promotion character (small), so you can celebrate the control of the jackpot game state even more. I can do it.

In addition, it is possible to display special promotion characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the operation promotion characters (small), and the operation promotion characters (large) are larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect. By displaying it, the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the smallest character of the character string that makes up the operation promotion character (large) is displayed larger than the largest character of the character string that makes up the title character of the jackpot start effect. Even if the player pays attention to it, the operation promotion letters (large) are displayed larger than the title letters of the jackpot start effect, so the player can feel the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation where the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is the situation where the title text is displayed in the super reach effect. This is a situation after a jackpot has already been announced, and it is possible to celebrate that the game will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect. can.

In addition, the super reach performance includes multiple types of super reach performances with different title characters, and the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach performance, so that the jackpot game Being controlled by the state can be a blessing.

In addition, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the title letters of any type of super reach effect. Therefore, no matter which character one pays attention to, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so that the control to the jackpot game state can be more celebrated.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small) to draw attention to the title characters. I can do it.

Further, after the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects starts. By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part in a series of flows, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation promotion characters (small). It can draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the smallest character of the character strings that make up the title characters corresponding to low base weak reach (A, B effects) is displayed larger than the largest character of the character strings that make up the operation promotion characters (small). Therefore, no matter which character the user focuses on, the title character can be drawn to the viewer's attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the low base weak reach A and B performances are notified of a jackpot, the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation promotion letters (small). Make it larger. By doing this, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the low base weak reach performance A and B is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not it will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the jackpot start performance is The displayed situation is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the jackpot game state is displayed. It is a blessing to be controlled by In addition, by displaying operation promotion letters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards larger than the operation promotion letters (small). It is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, after the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, the title display part for the low base weak reach A and B effects starts, and the low base weak reach A and B effects begin. After the jackpot is announced, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed. By doing this, in a series of steps, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed to encourage operation. By displaying it larger than the letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and then after the low base weak reach A and B effects are announced to be a jackpot. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to congratulate the control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation in which the title text is displayed in the super reach effect is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the situation in which the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect is This is a situation after a jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer time than the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to control the game into a jackpot gaming state. can be blessed.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least a part of the character strings are no longer displayed is the same as the time from when all the character strings that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect are no longer displayed. This is longer than the time from when the part is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time when the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has the intention of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, whose purpose is to incite the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed. By making the length longer, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are switched to a right-hand hitting promotion image (small) and a right-hand hitting promotion image (large) that suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state. , After a predetermined period of time has passed after switching to the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large), the operation method suggested by the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) (pushing the game ball to the right) An advantageous control is performed by operating with the operating method (operation method of launching the ball toward the gaming area 2R), and the time it takes to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start effect to the right-hand hitting promotion image (small) and the right-hand hitting promotion image (large). is shorter than the time required to finish the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are switched to the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (large) in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time, the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) and the right-handed hitting promotion image (small) Advantageous control is performed by operating in the operating method suggested by the promotion image (large), so changing the operating method from the period when the title character of the jackpot start effect ends may cause disadvantages to the player. You can prevent it from becoming a profit.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Further, in operation promotion effects B and D in the introduction part of the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the super reach performance is notified that a jackpot will occur, title characters corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed, whereas the situation where the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed in the super reach effect is when it is not yet known whether or not it is a jackpot. The situation is after the jackpot has already been announced, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer time than the operation promotion letters (small), it is possible to control the jackpot game state. can be blessed.

In addition, the operation promotion text (small) will be displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time period for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time when the title text of the jackpot start effect is displayed is the operation promotion text. After (small) is displayed, the prompted operation is not performed, and the time required for the prompted operation to be valid is longer than the time elapsed. By doing this, after the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer time than the time they are displayed without the prompted operation, so that the jackpot can be won. You can celebrate being controlled in a gaming state.

Further, the time from when all the character strings constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed. By doing this, the time when the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has the meaning of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the operation promotion characters (small) whose purpose is to encourage the player to operate. This can give players a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, it is possible to display operation promotion letters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation promotion letters (small). The operation prompting characters (large) are displayed after the promotion introduction effect is executed. The time period in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is longer than the time period in which the operation promotion character (large) is displayed. By doing this, the time during which the name display of an advantageous state with the intention of blessing is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion letters (large) accompanying the promotion introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. can give.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). By doing this, the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion characters (small). can draw attention to.

Further, the time from when all the character strings forming the title characters are displayed until at least part of the character strings is no longer displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is clearly visible becomes longer than the time during which the promotional text display whose purpose is to encourage the player to take action is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title text.

In addition, it is possible to display operation promotion letters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation promotion letters (small). The operation prompting characters (large) are displayed after the promotion introduction effect is executed. The time period in which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time period in which the operation promotion characters (large) are displayed. By doing so, the time during which the title display is displayed is longer than the time during which the operation promotion characters (large) accompanying the promotion introduction display are displayed, and the title characters can be drawn to attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, in the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach effects A and B, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, after the low base weak reach A and B performances are notified of a jackpot, the title characters of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed as operation promotion characters ( small) for a longer period of time. By doing this, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the low base weak reach performance A and B is a situation where it is not yet known whether or not it will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the jackpot start performance is The situation that is displayed is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. You can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed for a longer time than the operation promotion letters (small). By displaying this, it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B productions and low base strong reach A to C production in the normal state, and high base reach A to C production in the probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. D effect can be executed. Low base weak reach A and B performances, low base strong reach A to C performances, and high base reach A to D performances in variable state are the title display part that displays the corresponding title letters and the time until the performance result is announced. It consists of both an introduction part and. In addition, low base strong reach A to C performances have higher jackpot expectations than low base weak reach A and B performances, and high base reach B to D performances have higher jackpot expectations than high base reach A performances. The high base reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances. Then, in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, high base reach A performance, and high base reach B to D performances, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed, and the title display part of the low base weak reach performances A and B. In this case, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing this, the low base weak reach performances A and B in the normal state have lower jackpot expectations than the low base strong reach performances A to C in the normal state. A degree suggestion display is displayed, but an expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances, thereby preventing excessive expectation of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B performances. On the other hand, although the high base reach A performance in the variable probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower jackpot expectation than the high base reach B to D performances in the variable probability state, it is more likely to hit the jackpot than the low base weak reach performances A and B in the normal state. Since the level of expectation is high, by displaying an expectation level suggestion display for both high base reach A performance and high base reach B to D performances, it is possible to display expectations in both high base reach A performance and high base reach B to D performance. You can also expect to hit the jackpot.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance both in a normal state and in a variable probability state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part of the super reach performance in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. By doing this, the title display part of the super reach effect in the variable probability state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, and the game in the variable probability state can be played at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency at which super reach effects are executed in a variable probability state is higher than the frequency at which super reach effects are executed in a normal state, the title display part of the super reach effect in a variable probability state is the same as the title display part of the super reach effect in a normal state. By being shorter than the display part, the game can be played with variable probability at a good tempo.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable state, the luminance data table for title display (common title for weak reach system, common title for strong reach system, high base reach The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the variable probability state, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, Introducing weak reach type weak reach B, introducing strong reach type strong reach A, introducing strong reach type strong reach B, introducing strong reach type strong reach C, introducing high base reach type reach A, introducing high base reach type reach B, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the reach type reach C introduction and the high base reach type reach D introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach performance A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach performance A to C performance. The low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Then, in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area to the center, and the title display in the low base strongest reach effect. In the part, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from being enlarged, and when the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, in the play time start performance, the play time start performance is Title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are reduced from being enlarged, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance. By doing this, when the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, in the play time start effect, the title character of the play time start effect is changed to the title of the low base strongest reach effect with relatively high jackpot expectation. Since it is displayed in the same display mode as the characters, it can be recognized that the time-saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title letters are enlarged and erased, similar to when the title letters are erased in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. Make it disappear. By doing this, even when the title characters are erased in the play time start effect, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title letters are erased in the low base strongest reach effect where the expectation of jackpot is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to make the user recognize that the time saving state B (play time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. When the time saving state B (play time) is controlled, the title characters of the play time start performance are displayed in the play time start performance, and the size of the characters constituting the title characters of the play time start performance is The size is larger than the size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the production. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach performance when it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the play time start performance is displayed in the time-saving state B ( The characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title letters that correspond to the super reach effect, so the time-saving state B (play time) is controlled. ) can be blessed to be controlled by.

In addition, the super reach effect includes multiple types of super reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are different from the characters that make up the title letters that correspond to any type of super reach effect. It's also big. By doing this, the characters that make up the title letters of the play time start effect are displayed larger than the letters that make up the title letters that correspond to any type of super reach effect, so time saving state B (play time) It is a blessing to be controlled by

Further, the smallest character of the character strings forming the title characters of the play time start effect is larger than the largest character of the character strings forming the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you pay attention to, the title character of the play time start effect will be displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, so the time saving state B (play time) will be controlled. We can celebrate our blessings even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time saving state B (play time), the title characters of the play time start performance are displayed in the play time start performance, and the display time of the title characters of the play time start performance corresponds to the super reach performance. It is longer than the display time of title characters. By doing this, the title character is displayed in the super reach performance when it is not yet known whether or not there will be a jackpot, whereas the title character in the play time start performance is displayed in the time-saving state B ( Since the title character of the play time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, it is a blessing that the time saving state B (play time) is controlled. can do.

In addition, the time from when all the character strings that make up the title characters of the play time start effect are displayed until at least a part of the character strings are no longer displayed is the time that the character string that makes up the title letters that corresponds to the super reach effect is This is longer than the time from when a part of the character string is displayed until all of the character string is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time when the title letters of the play time start effect, which has the intention of blessing, can be clearly seen is longer than the time when the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect, whose purpose is to incite the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed. The game also lasts a long time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters composing the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is larger than the size of the characters composing the remaining number of times until play time characters. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the remaining number of play times until play time, so it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. .

In addition, the super reach performance includes low base weak reach performances A and B, and low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The number of times character is displayed during the execution of the low base weak reach performances A and B, and is not displayed during the execution of the low base strong reach performances A to C. By doing this, in the low base weak reach A and B performances where the expectation of jackpot is low, the remaining number of times until play time is displayed, so it is possible to make you aware of the number of times until time saving state B (play time) On the other hand, in the low base strong reach A to C performances where the expectation of a jackpot is high, attention can be drawn to the contents of the performance by not displaying the characters of the number of times remaining until play time. In addition, in the time-saving state B (play time), since it is easier to win a jackpot which is more advantageous than in the normal state, the player's feeling of regret can be alleviated when the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (play time) is small.

In addition, if the selection effect develops to the low base strong reach A to C effects without going through the low base weak reach effects A and B, the number of remaining times until play time will not be displayed even while the selection effect is being executed. By doing so, the number of remaining times until play time will not interfere with the selection performance in which the super reach performance that is higher than the low base strong reach A to C performance is determined by the number of characters remaining until play time, and the number of times remaining until time saving state B (play time). If there are few players, the player's sense of regret can be alleviated.

In addition, when it is announced that there will be a jackpot in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the character will not be displayed again for the remaining number of times until the play time and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and the low base strong reach A to C performances will be controlled. When it is reported that the player is out of the game, the number of remaining times until the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach performances A to C are finished. By doing this, when it is announced that there will be a jackpot with the low base strong reach A to C effect, the remaining number of times until the play time will not be displayed again, and the number of times until the time saving state B (play time) will be reduced. To alleviate a player's sense of regret when the number of remaining games is small. In addition, if it is announced that you will lose in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the characters remaining until the play time will be displayed again after the low base strong reach effects A to C are finished, so the time saving state B ( If there are only a few times left until play time, it can be relieved quickly.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems, common titles for high base reach systems). In the introduction part of the super reach performance, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction, high base reach system reach A introduction, high base reach system reach B introduction, high base reach system reach C introduction, high base reach system reach D introduction) to set the game effect lamp 9. Control. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, in operation promotion effects A to D executed at timings related to the super reach effect, operation promotion characters (small) can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Further, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). The size of the characters constituting the operation promotion characters (small) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until play time characters. By doing this, the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed larger than the letters that make up the number of remaining times until play time, so you can draw attention to the operation promotion letters (small) and effectively It is possible to prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach performances A to C of the super reach performances, if the operation promotion characters (small) are displayed in the operation promotion performance A that is executed before the title display part, the play time The characters for the number of times remaining until play time are displayed at the same time, but when displaying the operation promotion characters (small) in the operation promotion effect D that is executed at the end of the introduction part, the characters for the number of times remaining until play time are not displayed. . By doing this, before the development of the low base strong reach A to C effect, the promotion text display operation promotion text (small) and the number of remaining times until the play time remain displayed at the same time, the time is saved. It is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until B (play time), and by not displaying the remaining number of times until play time in the operation promotion letters (small) in the introduction part, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot will be announced. It can draw attention.

In addition, when performing the low base strong reach A to C effects, the operation promotion effect A executed before the title display part is more advantageous than the operation promotion text (small) and the operation promotion text (small). Of the operation promotion letters (large) that are suggested, only the operation promotion letters (small) are displayed, while in the operation promotion effect D executed at the end of the introduction part, the operation promotion letters (small) are also displayed (large). ) can also be displayed, and when the operation promotion letters (large) are displayed in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the remaining number of times until play time letters are not displayed at the same time. By doing so, in addition to whether or not a jackpot will be announced, operation promotion characters (large) are displayed to draw attention to the fact that a more advantageous situation is suggested.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems), and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part of the super reach performance. In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs variable display 900 times without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls the game to a time saving state B (play time) which is more advantageous than the normal state. Further, after it is announced that there will be a jackpot due to the super reach effect, title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the remaining number of times until the play time is controlled to the time saving state B (play time). Before displaying the title characters for the jackpot start performance, the characters for the remaining number of times until play time are erased, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start performance is changed to the number of times remaining until play time. larger than the size of the characters that make it up. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is the situation after the jackpot has already been announced, and the remaining number of characters until play time is unnecessary, so the jackpot start effect is displayed. Before displaying the title characters, the remaining number of play time characters are erased, and the characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the remaining number of play time characters. Therefore, you can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, regardless of the number of times remaining until time saving state B (play time), the size of the characters that make up the remaining number of times until play time is the same, and the size of the letters that make up the title letters of the jackpot start effect is the same. The size of the characters is larger than the size of the characters forming the remaining number of times until play time character. By doing this, no matter what number of times remain until time saving state B (play time)), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect will make up the characters that make up the remaining number of times until play time. Since it is displayed larger than the text, you can congratulate yourself on being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the time saving state B (play time) in the variable display caused by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening and the second starting winning opening in the time saving state B (playing time). A variable display is performed using the time saving B start variation pattern which has a longer variation time than the variation pattern normally used. By doing so, it is possible to execute the play time start performance in the variation period according to the time saving B start variation pattern in the first variation in the time saving state B (play time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common titles for weak reach systems, common titles for strong reach systems), and the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part of the super reach performance. In the introduction part, the brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so it is possible to control the game effect lamp 9 according to the title display. The game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emission mode. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Further, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach effects A and B from white to red or gold and display them. When changing the title characters from white to red or gold in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the time when the title characters are displayed in red or gold is longer. To display title characters in white for a longer time than they are displayed. By doing this, when changing the title characters from white to red or gold in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, the red or gold color, that is, the changed color Since the title characters are displayed longer than the title characters in the white mode, that is, in the mode before the change, it is possible to reliably recognize that the color has changed from white to red or gold.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, there are cases where the title characters change from white to red or gold, and cases where they do not change from white to white. When changing the color from white to red or gold, when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white color is changed to red or gold, a specific sound is output, and the title characters are changed to white. If the mode remains unchanged, when the time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, the white mode remains unchanged and the specific sound is output. By doing this, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from white to red or gold at a specific timing, a specific sound is output, and at the same time, the title characters change from white to red or gold at a specific timing. Since the specific sound is output even when the mode remains unchanged, it is possible to expect that the mode will change to red or gold due to the output of the specific sound.

In addition, when changing the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white aspect to another aspect, a specific sound is also used when changing to a red aspect or a gold aspect. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which type of mode changes when the specific sound is output.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ), and in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems), and the low base weak reach is controlled. In the introduction parts of A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. , the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light in a suitable light emitting manner according to the title display. As a result of these, the title can be suitably displayed.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are changed from white to red, or gold to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the red color. is possible. In the title display part of low base weak reach A and B productions, in any case where the title characters are changed from white to red or gold, the display becomes common from the white format. The image is displayed in such a way that it changes to a red color or a gold color. By doing this, in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters can be changed from white to red, or from white to gold. , since the display mode is changed to the common display mode and then changed to the red mode or the gold mode, by changing from the white mode to the common display mode, the common display mode changes to the red mode or the gold mode. Until the end, you can expect the game to change to the gold color mode, which has higher jackpot expectations than the red color mode.

Moreover, a common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title characters are made to shine, and when the light is clear, the display mode changes to a red mode or a golden mode. By doing so, the characters constituting the title characters can be illuminated to encourage the characters to change to a red color or a gold color.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) is used to control the game effect lamp 9, and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach system weak reach A introduction). In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B performance (weak reach type weak reach B introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for the two different super reach effects, thereby preventing increases in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part is different from each other. By using the corresponding brightness data table, it is possible to suitably lengthen the period until notification of whether or not there is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach performances A and B, and the low base strong reach performances A to C, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach performances A and B. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. . In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) to control the game effect lamp 9, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data for the low base weak reach A performance is The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the table (weak reach type weak reach A introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach type weak reach B In the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A performance (strong reach system strong reach A introduction). 9, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach type strong reach B introduction), and the low base strong reach B effect is controlled. In the introduction part of the reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C performance (strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part can be shared for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase in luminance data tables and using luminance data tables corresponding to each introduction part, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is announced whether or not it is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title can be created. Can be displayed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to control the low base weak reach A, B performances, the low base strong reach A to C performances that have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the low base strong reach A to C performances. It is possible to perform a low-base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance. Low base weak reach A, B production, low base strong reach A to C production, low base strongest reach production include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the production result is announced. It consists of each. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, the production control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table for the common title display part (common title for the weak reach system) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A production and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B production. ) to control the game effect lamp 9, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach system common title), and in the title display part for the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach effect is controlled. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table (strongest reach title for the strongest reach system), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, the brightness data table for the low base weak reach A performance (weak reach system weak title) is used to control the game effect lamp 9. In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach type weak reach B introduction). The effect lamp 9 is controlled, and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A performance (strong reach type strong reach A introduction), and the low base strong reach A performance is controlled. In the introduction part of the base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B effect (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), and the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect. In , the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C effect (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach effect, the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach effect is controlled. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table (strongest reach system, strongest reach introduced). By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part can be shared for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby reducing cost and capacity. By preventing the increase in luminance data tables and using luminance data tables corresponding to each introduction part, it is possible to suitably increase the period until it is announced whether or not it is a jackpot, and as a result, a suitable title can be created. Can be displayed. Furthermore, the low-based strongest reach effect, which is the most expected, is provided with dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introduction part, respectively, to increase interest, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are changed from white to red, or gold to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the red color. is possible. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). Then, when the color of the title characters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 creates a brightness data table in which brightness data for when the title change performance is not performed: When controlling the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach system common title (white) and changing the color of the title letters to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, use the title change effect. Brightness data table with brightness data set when performing: Control the game effect lamp 9 using the weak reach common title (red) or the weak reach common title (gold) to perform low base weak reach A and B effects Regardless of whether or not the color of the title characters is changed in the introduction part, the game effect lamp is set using the brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach type weak reach A introduction, weak reach type weak reach B introduction). Control 9. By doing this, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold or changed to the second mode, the luminance data corresponding to the introduction part can be used. By using a common table, we can prevent an increase in cost and capacity, and by using brightness data tables corresponding to each title display part, we can change the color of the title character from red or gold to red or gold. In the case where the title is changed to , each can be suitably produced, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part for displaying the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to use the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDLL1 to LL4, decoration LEDS1 to LS5, attacker lamps LA1 to LA4). ). In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is the title start period from when the title characters start displaying until they are displayed in the fixed position, and the title after the title characters are displayed in the fixed position. In the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 creates a brightness data table (which defines a light emitting pattern specific to the title start period), including a display period and a title end period. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach title start), and during the title display period and title end period, a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a unique light emission pattern after the title display period is used. to control the game effect lamp 9. By doing this, the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title character starts displaying until it is displayed at the regular position in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title character are displayed at the regular position. By using the brightness data tables corresponding to the title display period and the title end period after the title is displayed, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, an advantageous state can be obtained during the period in which title characters are displayed. It is possible to suitably lengthen the period until it is announced whether or not the title is displayed, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, a brightness data table corresponding to the title start period, or a brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period. By making one of them a common brightness data table and the other a separate brightness data table with individual contents, the brightness data table corresponds to the title start period, or the title display period and title end period. By using a common brightness data table for one side, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table that corresponds to each of the other brightness data tables, it is possible to determine whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect. Depending on whether the title is a presentation or not, the presentation can be performed appropriately, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

Although the present invention executes the ready-to-reach effect based on the variation pattern, it is conceivable to execute various preview effects before the ready-to-reach effect is executed. For example, a preview effect (step-up notice, pseudo-notice, reach suggestion effect, timer effect, etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal is composed of a plurality of layers, and it is possible to set which preview effect image or identification information is displayed on which layer according to a predetermined priority order. Then, a preview effect is displayed that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a specific layer. It is conceivable that by changing the display mode and changing the transmittance, the display mode of the preview performance can be effectively changed to improve the player's interest. Furthermore, when executing a preview performance in a specific layer, it is preferable to execute the preview performance in conjunction with a light emitting means provided around the liquid crystal or on the game board surface. Specific control of a specific light emitting mode using the light emitting means will be explained below.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the specific effect is executed and after the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed (FIGS. 44 to 47) , Fig. 56, Fig. 57, Fig. 63, Fig. 74, Fig. 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. In addition, since the type of background image is different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
Type 1-2 gaming machines are
It is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect in one variable display,
When the specific effect is executed without executing the predetermined effect, there is a higher degree of expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the predetermined effect is executed without executing the specific effect (FIGS. 44 to 47) reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
Type 1-3 gaming machines are
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image,
The first predetermined part is executable when the first background image is displayed;
A second background image is displayed during execution of the second predetermined part,
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background inciting effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the second background image is displayed by the second background stimulation effect (see FIG. 41);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect or by the second background enhancing effect.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is
In one variable display, it is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect,
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state.
When the predetermined effect is executed before the execution of the specific effect, there is a higher expectation that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state than when it is not executed (see FIGS. 44 to 47).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be increased by making the user expect that both the predetermined performance and the specific performance will be executed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-2 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The background images include a first background image before the decoration identification information is in the reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information is in the reach state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, and the decoration identification information. a third background image after the is in the reach state, and a fourth background image that is more advantageous than the third background image after the decoration identification information is in the reach state,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with the second background image;
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed together with the fourth background image (see FIGS. 56, 57, 63, 74, and 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-3 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the second background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 70, 71, and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effects of the second predetermined part and the specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-4 is
The debris image is capable of performing rotational movements;
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the second background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 94 and 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-5 is
When the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 94 and 100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-5]
Game machines of form 1-5 are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 95),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-6]
Game machines of form 1-6 are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 83).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect have the same period of time until they are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 86 and 91);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 86 and 91).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-3 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 95). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Type 1-8 gaming machines are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means, and The number of rotation operations performed from when the fragment images of No. 2 are displayed until they are hidden in the display area of the display means is the same (see FIGS. 94 and 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The display means is capable of displaying the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed,
It is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image during the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the fragment image during the second period after the first period (Fig. 56, Fig. 57, Fig. 63, Fig. 74, Fig. 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. This can surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to suitably execute the predetermined effect and the specific effect by reducing the sense of discomfort when the fragment image is displayed using the effect image.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period length (see FIGS. 74 and 79);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
Type 2-3 gaming machines are
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part;
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 74);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display of the fragment image can be started using the effect image without causing any discomfort.

[Form 2-4]
Type 2-4 gaming machines are
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 56, 57, and 63),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the predetermined performance and the specific performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that changes from the first speed to the second speed and moves over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 59, FIG. 66, FIG. 76, FIG. 81, and FIG. 83). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. In addition, since the speed at which the moving fragment image is displayed differs between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even if the performance similarly displays the fragment image, it is possible to give a surprise to the player. It can give an impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
In one variable display, a predetermined effect can be executed multiple times, while a specific effect can be executed once,
When the predetermined effect is executed multiple times, there is a higher expectation that the predetermined effect will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the predetermined effect is executed once.
There is a higher expectation that the specific effect will be controlled in an advantageous state when the specific effect is executed once than when the predetermined effect is executed multiple times (see FIGS. 44 to 47);
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-3]
Type 3-3 gaming machines are
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed. ,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 59(C) and 66(C)),
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that it moves at a first speed during a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and from the specific timing it moves non-stop in the display area of the display means. Displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed over a second period until it is displayed,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 83),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the same time as a fragment image is displayed in a specific performance,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period, but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 81, 83, and 92),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from deteriorating.

[Form 3-5]
Type 3-5 gaming machines are
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plural fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotation operations performed among the plural fragment images in the specific performance. This number is greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship,
The fragment image in the specific effect is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least part of the background image in a superimposed relationship to be recognized (Fig. 59, Fig. 66, Fig. 70, Fig. 71, Fig. 76, Fig. 81, 93),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even performances in which the fragment image is similarly displayed can give suitably different impressions. It is possible to increase interest in games.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The specific performance is a performance that includes displaying a special image together with the display of the fragment image,
The fragment image and special image in a specific performance are in a superimposed relationship,
The first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image can be recognized,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the special image can be recognized,
The third fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image and at least a part of the special image can be recognized (see FIG. 93). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the display mode of the fragment image different for each performance, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of each performance.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-1 is
The fragment image in a specific performance can be rotated,
When the first fragment image is at the first angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the first fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 94 and 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-2 is
In the specific effect, when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 94 and 100). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific effect are commonly displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction. (See Figure 59, Figure 66, Figure 76, Figure 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, while the direction in which the fragmented image moves is the same between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, the period required for it to disappear is different, so the fragmented image can be displayed in the same way. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image displayed while moving in a specific direction differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 88 and 92).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a specific effect takes a longer period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in a predetermined effect (see FIG. 95). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, and increase interest through various presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
All the fragment images among the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in the display area of the display means by moving outside the display area (for example, see FIG. 94(A)),
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific presentation is hidden in the display area of the display means in a manner that it moves outside the display area,
Among the fragment images in the specific performance, the second fragment image different from the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves outside the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 94(B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment images are displayed between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode in accordance with the movement of the object image; The production includes a second predetermined part that changes the mode from the crack mode to a second crack mode, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is to display an object image, and to perform a predetermined effect from when a crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed according to the movement of the object image. It is a production that starts displaying multiple fragment images in a period shorter than the period,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when the third predetermined part is not executed.
The period from the display of the crack precursor image of the second crack mode to the display of the fragment image in the predetermined production is longer than the period from the display of the object image to the display of the fragment image in the specific production. long,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
In the specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (FIGS. 60 to 62, FIG. 70, FIG. 71, FIG. 77 , see Figure 78),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, and the display period of the fragment image is different, Even a performance in which images are displayed can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see FIGS. 70, 71, 76, and 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance configuration.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, the crack precursor image in the second crack mode is continued for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part. (See FIG. 77)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the third predetermined part is not executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that sets the decoration identification information to a reach state,
There is a first pattern in which the predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in the ready state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in the ready state.
When the variable display is performed by the first pattern, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the variable display is performed by the second pattern (see FIG. 77);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is
In one variable display, it is possible to perform both a predetermined effect and a specific effect,
The specific performance can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific performance, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the third predetermined part is not executed (see FIGS. 44 to 47).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the third predetermined part in the predetermined performance is being executed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of form 6-5 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and at the second timing when the fragment image in the specific effect is displayed. ,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 60(G) and 62(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of form 6-6 is
The predetermined performance is a performance that sets the decoration identification information to a reach state,
It is possible to highlight the decoration identification information in the reach state in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period in which the decoration identification information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image (see FIGS. 61(I) to 61(K));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the game is in a ready-to-reach state.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is
A motion-enhanced image can be displayed in response to the motion of the object image in the first predetermined part;
It can be displayed in a display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
displaying a motion-enhanced image at the timing of starting display of a crack precursor image in a crack mode (see FIG. 60(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to change the crack precursor image into a crack pattern without causing any discomfort.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-2 is
It is possible to display small fragment images together with motion-enhanced images.
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion-enhanced image (see FIG. 60(D));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a crack mode.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-3 is
an effect image can be displayed in response to the movement of the object image in the second predetermined part;
Do not display the action emphasis image when displaying the effect image (see FIG. 60(H) and FIG. 77),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to differentiate the first predetermined part from the second predetermined part, thereby preventing the predetermined performance from becoming a monotonous performance.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part and the fragment image in the third predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means is different (FIG. 77);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in the way they are presented in the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-8]
Type 6-8 gaming machines are
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the specific performance is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIGS. 70, 71, and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment image can be made different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of form 6-9 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 83).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed to when it becomes hidden in the display area of the display means is longer than from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until it becomes hidden from the display area of the display means. (see Figures 77 and 78),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make a difference between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, and increase interest through various presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to perform a motion promotion effect that prompts the player to perform a motion on the motion detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display operation promotion images in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific performance is a performance that starts displaying a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
The movement promotion performance is a performance that displays a movement promotion image for a valid movement period and changes the display mode of the movement promotion image from a movement promotion mode to a motion completion mode when a movement of the player is detected.
When the movement promotion image changes from the movement promotion mode to the movement completion mode due to the movement promotion effect, the specific effect can be executed,
During at least a part of the execution period of the specific performance, it is possible to visually recognize both the motion promotion image of the motion completion mode and the fragment image in the specific performance,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific effect is shorter than the display period of the action promotion image in the action promotion mode, and longer than the display period of the action promotion image in the action completion mode (Figs. 56, 57, 66, 74, 81),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and a specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different timings. This can surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the interest of a specific performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the predetermined display layer differs before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (Fig. 56, Fig. 57, Fig. 59, Fig. 74, Fig. 76),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, in the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the types of background images are different between before and after the fragment image is displayed, so even if the same effect displays the fragment image, It is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase interest in the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see FIG. 56, FIG. 57, FIG. 59, FIG. 74, and FIG. 76),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The display means is capable of displaying the effect image at a first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. ,
It is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image during the first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the fragment image during the second period after the first period (Fig. 56, Fig. 57, Fig. 59, Fig. 74, Fig. 76),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be suitably executed by reducing the sense of discomfort when the fragment image is displayed using the effect image.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figure 56, Figure 57, Figure 59),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in such a manner that it moves while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the fragment image (FIG. 56, FIG. 57, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, 74, see Figures 80 and 83),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the speed at which the moving fragment image is displayed is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, even if the fragment image is displayed in the same way, it gives suitably different impressions and enhances the game experience. It can increase interest.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 56(G) and 64(H)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and in a second period from the specific timing until it is hidden. displayed in a manner of moving at a second speed,
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figure 83),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can provide a difference in how the fragment images are presented, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 64 and 83);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from deteriorating.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
All the fragment images among the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden from view in the display area of the display means by moving outside the display area (see FIG. 94(A));
The first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means in a manner that it moves toward the outside of the display area,
Among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part, the second fragment image different from the first fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means before it moves outside the display area (FIG. 94(B) )reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in the way they are presented between the first predetermined effect and the second specific effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 70, 71, and 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See Figures 86 and 87),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is
The visibility of a fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction differs depending on when it starts displaying and before it disappears (see FIGS. 86 and 87).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part can perform a rotation operation,
The number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotation operations performed among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part. greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image among the images is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is
When the fragment image assumes the first angle due to the rotation operation, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image,
When the fragment image assumes the second angle due to the rotational operation, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image (see FIGS. 94 and 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is
When the first fragment image is at the first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at the second angle (see FIGS. 94 and 100);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying a fragment image.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be performed,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed before the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information reaches the reach state,
When the first predetermined effect is executed before the second predetermined effect is executed, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the first predetermined effect is not executed (see FIGS. 44 to 47);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the third predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 74 and 80),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 59, 56, 57, 76, and 74).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, even if the performance similarly displays the fragment image, suitably different impressions can be given and the game interest can be increased. I can do it.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the third predetermined part,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions, at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
A fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a predetermined direction.
A fragment image that is displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the display means than a fragment image that is displayed while moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part. (See Figure 56, Figure 57, Figure 64, Figure 65, Figure 74, Figure 80),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, although the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined performance and the specific performance, the period required until the fragment images are hidden is different, so even if the fragment image is displayed in the same manner, it is suitable. It can give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image; The production includes a second predetermined part that changes from a first crack mode to a second crack mode, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image, displays a crack precursor image in a third crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a third crack mode according to the movement of the object image. a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of corresponding fragment images;
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The length of the execution period is different between the first predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part,
After the second predetermined part is executed, there are times when the third predetermined part is executed and times when the third predetermined part is not executed.
The period from starting the second predetermined part to moving to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from starting the fourth predetermined part to moving to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from being displayed to being hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 56, FIG. 57, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, (see Figures 77 and 74),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed until the fragment image is displayed and the display period of the fragment image are different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, the fragment image is displayed in the same way. Even if it is a performance, it is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from the third pre-crack mode to the third crack mode (see FIGS. 60 and 56);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance including a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect can be executed at a specific timing after executing the first predetermined effect,
The first predetermined part and the third predetermined part have the same length of execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of execution period,
When executing the second predetermined effect after the first predetermined effect, the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 53, 54, see Figure 72),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be performed continuously, it is possible to continuously surprise the player, and furthermore, it is possible to continuously surprise the player. , because the third predetermined part is started after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is hidden, a new crack precursor image is displayed even though the fragment image is already displayed. It is possible to prevent deterioration of the production effect.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The position at which the display of the fragment image starts is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 53, 54, and 95);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be presented differently, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part can commonly display a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in the first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode (see FIGS. 53(F) and 54(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can have different presentations of the special image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is
The length of the display period of the fragment image is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part, while the length of the display period of the special image is common (see FIG. 72);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be presented differently, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is
There is a first pattern in which a second predetermined effect is executed after the first predetermined effect is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined effect is not executed after the first predetermined effect is executed,
The rate at which the game progresses according to the first pattern is controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that when the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 38);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a manner that moves without a change in speed over the display period of the fragment image (see FIG. 83);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be related to each other, and the interest can be increased.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part. and
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 53(C), FIG. 54(C), and FIG. 72);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period length (see FIG. 72);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the relationship between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the performance effects of both can be enhanced.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is reported that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect, displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack mode and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image;
The fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period to be hidden in the display area of the display means,
The fragment image when it is notified by the notification effect that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state requires a second period different from the first period before it is hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 56, FIG. 57, 69, see FIG. 74, FIG. 82(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image and a fragment image, thereby surprising the player, and furthermore, it is possible to surprise the player by displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image. By displaying the crack precursor image together with the fragment images that require different periods of time, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The crack precursor image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state has a longer display period than the crack precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 74);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably indicate that the control is not in an advantageous state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
There is a first fragment image with the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part,
There is a second fragment image that has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is reported that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state,
The first fragment image has a larger display size than the second fragment image (for example, see FIGS. 57(J) and 69(D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in how they are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIG. 84).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images different in how they are presented, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is reported that the control is not in an advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction ( For example, see FIGS. 86 and 88),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the fragment images more relevant and more interesting.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is
In the first timing when transitioning from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and the second timing when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the control is not controlled in an advantageous state, the specific Can display color effect images,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 56(G) and 69(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display patterns of the effect images can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a second crack mode when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect;
When the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the first light emission pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, the light emitting means emits light according to the second light emitting pattern;
The light emission of the light emission means according to the first light emission pattern continues until the second predetermined part is executed,
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification effect in which it is notified that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state ends (Figs. 56, 57, 69, 74, 82(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, and furthermore, it continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the crack precursor image and notification effect are completed. By using the second light emitting pattern, it is possible to notify the player that the control is not appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a second crack mode when it is notified that the control is not in an advantageous state by the notification effect;
The type of background image differs before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed (Figs. 56(A) to 56(F), Fig. 57(I) ~See Figure 57(K)),
The display mode of the background image differs between before it is announced whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect and when the fragment image is displayed when it is announced that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state (Fig. 69(A), FIG. 69(B), FIG. 69(D), FIG. 74, FIG. 82(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by being able to execute a predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image, it is possible to surprise the player, and furthermore, by using the crack precursor image, it is possible to control whether or not to be controlled to be in an advantageous state. By changing the display mode of the background image before being notified, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. A third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images;
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode, a fifth predetermined part that starts the first movement of the movable body, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production including a sixth predetermined part,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( 56, FIG. 57, FIG. 59, FIG. 74, FIG. 76),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Moreover, by displaying the fragment image by operating the movable body after displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while being changed from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode;
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 74 and 76),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is displayed in common at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and at the second timing when transitioning from the fifth predetermined part to the sixth predetermined part. It is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 56(G) and 59(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display patterns of the effect images different, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-2 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
The display of the effect image is started when the movable body is placed at the advanced position (see FIG. 59(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of the second predetermined production can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 76);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the movement of the movable body in the suggestive performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first movement of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 76);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode according to the movement of the object image, and a fragment corresponding to the crack precursor image. A third predetermined part that displays a plurality of images;
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production that includes
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second operation different from the first operation, and the second operation of the movable body ends before the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means. (see FIG. 56, FIG. 57, FIG. 67, FIG. 68, FIG. 74, and FIG. 82(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Moreover, by operating the movable body and displaying the crack precursor image, it is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while changing from a first crack pre-stage mode to a first crack mode,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed while being changed from a second pre-crack mode to a second crack mode;
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first pre-crack mode to the first crack mode in the first predetermined part, and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second pre-crack mode to the second crack mode in the fourth predetermined part. The length is different depending on the period (see Figures 74 and 82),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in a crack mode.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color is commonly displayed at the first timing when transitioning from the second predetermined part to the third predetermined part and the second timing when transitioning from the fourth predetermined part to the fifth predetermined part. It is possible and
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 56(G) and 67(E)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
The display of the effect image is started when the second operation is started (see FIG. 67(F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the production effect of the second predetermined production can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 82);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the second predetermined performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the motion of the movable body in the suggestion performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first motion of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 82);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the predetermined performance and that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image. It is a production including a third predetermined part,
The specific effect is to display a plurality of fragment images in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect according to the first movement of the movable body. It is a production that starts displaying,
The execution timing is different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance,
In the specific performance, the movable body can perform a second action different from the first action, and starts the second action of the movable body after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means ( 56, 57, 63, 74, 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, so that it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and further, By operating the movable body and displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image, a powerful performance can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
The display of the effect image is started when the first operation is started (see FIG. 63(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body and the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created and the performance effect of a specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-2 is
The effect image can be displayed over a display period including a first display period and a second display period,
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance that is different from the specific performance and suggests that the movable body will be controlled in an advantageous state by operating it,
A movable body-enhanced image can be displayed in a display area overlapping with the movable body as the movable body moves,
While the movable body emphasized image is displayed along with the movement of the movable body in the suggestive performance, the movable body emphasized image is not displayed along with the first movement of the movable body in the specific performance (see FIG. 79);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the specific performance from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
Even if a crack precursor image in the first crack mode or the second crack mode is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
The image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode or the second crack mode is not displayed is displayed with the first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and is displayed in the second visibility over a predetermined range. is displayed with the first visibility over different specific ranges (see FIGS. 56(E), (F), FIG. 58(C), FIG. 74, and FIG. 75),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, each of which displays a crack precursor image with a different crack mode, can be executed at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various timings. Moreover, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the crack precursor image differs depending on the type of crack mode, even if the same crack precursor image is displayed, it gives a suitably different impression and improves the game experience. It can increase interest.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed using the first visibility and the third visibility that is higher in visibility than the second visibility (see enlarged view of FIG. 58(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the second predetermined performance can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
It is possible to display images compatible with variable display in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The corresponding image when the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 58(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be suitably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined effect.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image in the second crack mode is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image in the first crack mode (see FIG. 75);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can show a difference in the way the crack precursor image is presented, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The visibility of the background image differs between when the crack precursor image of the first crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack mode has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack mode,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images for the second crack mode.
The degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the crack precursor image of the second type of second crack mode is displayed than when the first type of crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed. High (see Figures 55 to 57, Figures 73 and 74),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, each of which displays a crack precursor image with a different crack mode, can be executed at different timings, thereby surprising the player at various timings. In addition, players will start to pay attention to the type of crack precursor image in the second crack mode, and similarly, even if the performance displays a crack precursor image, it will give a suitably different impression and increase the enjoyment of the game. can be increased.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
The background that is displayed below the predetermined display layer when the crack precursor image of the first type of second crack mode is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second type of second crack mode is displayed. Image visibility is different (see Figures 56 and 55),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the crack precursor images different in how they are displayed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can commonly display an effect image of a specific color,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second timing predetermined effect (see FIGS. 56 and 55),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the display patterns of the effect images different, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of a compatible image that supports variable display,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means are
It is possible to display images compatible with variable display in the special display layer,
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed in a second predetermined display layer that has a lower priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a second crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the change performance is not executed,
When the second predetermined effect is executed, the change effect can be executed (see FIGS. 56 to 58, FIG. 74, FIG. 75, and FIG. 102),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect that displays the first crack precursor image and the second predetermined effect that displays the second crack precursor image can be executed at different timings, so that the game can be played at various timings. Furthermore, even if the crack precursor image is displayed in the same way, the display layer and the execution or non-execution of the change effect are different, giving suitably different impressions and increasing the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is
The change performance is a performance in which a predetermined object image is displayed, and the predetermined object image performs an action that acts on the corresponding display to change the display mode of the corresponding display,
The predetermined object image can be displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 102);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the changing effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the second predetermined effect to the minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-2 is
In response to the movement of the predetermined object image, a change emphasis image can be displayed in a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image (see FIG. 102);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the changing effect can be suitably executed even while the second predetermined effect is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a first predetermined effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
A special performance can be executed after the second predetermined performance is executed,
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The first predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a first crack mode and displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance is a performance that displays a crack precursor image in a second crack mode and displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The execution timing is different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance,
The display mode is different between the fragment image in the first predetermined effect and the fragment image in the second predetermined effect,
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes an image in a suggestive manner that suggests that a special performance will be performed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined effect is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined effect (see FIGS. 56, 74, 79, 103, and 104);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings. Furthermore, since the display mode of the fragment image is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, and the relevance between the fragment image in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter can be increased, the same can be achieved. Even an effect in which a fragment image is displayed can give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
There are 1st special performance and 2nd special performance.
When the second special performance is executed, there is a higher expectation that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state than when the first special performance is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special performance will be performed, and a second suggestion mode that suggests that the second special performance will be performed (FIG. 103, FIG. 104, 105),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined effect includes a suggestion mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible,
More fragment images in the transmission mode are displayed than fragment images in the suggestion mode (see FIG. 105).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-2 is
The debris image is capable of performing rotational movements;
In the second predetermined effect, the amount of rotational movement is greater in the fragment image in the transparent mode than in the fragment image in the suggestion mode (see FIG. 105);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is
The second predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive mode are displayed, a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed,
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 104);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined effect.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the first stage performance (FIG. 63(C)) can be executed,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 91(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 91(B1)). It is a production that includes
The execution period of the first stage effect is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first aspect (see FIGS. 79 and 91),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a suitable crack pattern can be realized by creating a reservoir for cracks through the front stage rendering and giving a sense of speed to the crack image in the first aspect.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the first stage performance (FIG. 63(C)) can be executed,
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 91(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 91(B1)). It is a production that includes
The total period of the period in which the broken image is displayed in the first mode and the period in which it is displayed in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage effect (see FIGS. 79 and 91),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period during which the crack image is in the first mode and the second mode is made longer than the execution period of the first stage effect, thereby giving an impression of the crack pattern.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
At least a portion of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the display period of the cracked image.
It is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over a first period of the display period of the effect image, and it is possible to visually recognize the cracked image over a second period after the first period,
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIGS. 72 to 82 and 86 to 92),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image has the role of hiding the first displayed portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling its role, prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes displaying the cracked image in the first mode and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode,
The display means displays the effect image when displaying the cracked image in the first aspect, and hides the effect image at a timing before displaying the cracked image in the second aspect (FIGS. 72 to 82, (see Figures 86 to 92),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 90(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 90(B1)). It is a production that includes
The transmittance of the cracked image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the cracked image of the second aspect (see FIGS. 78 and 90);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined effect is to change the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode (FIGS. 86(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the first mode (FIG. 86(B1)). It is a production that includes
The specific effect is to change the cracked image from the third mode to the fourth mode (FIGS. 90(B2) to (B5)) after displaying the broken image in the third mode (FIG. 90(B1)). It is a production that includes
The cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image in the second aspect starts and the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the broken image in the fourth aspect starts, the transmittance is different ( 74, FIG. 78, FIG. 86, FIG. 90, and FIG. 94(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the broken image of the second aspect is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A means for executing a performance,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle will be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific performance that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that can be executed in a normal state, and after displaying the cracked image in the first mode (FIG. 86 (B1)), the cracked image is changed from the first mode to the second mode (FIG. 86(B1)). 86 (B2) to (B5)).
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a production that includes changing the appearance (Fig. 90 (B2) to (B5)),
The cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts and the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the broken image of the fourth aspect starts, the transmittance is different ( 41 to 43, FIG. 74, FIG. 78, FIG. 86, FIG. 90, and FIG. 94(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the broken image of the second aspect is displayed and when the broken image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
The background image can be displayed in a display layer that has a lower priority than the specific display layer,
It is possible to display special information regarding variable display in a display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The light emission control means is
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using the specific brightness data table,
Light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a specific brightness data table until a specific timing in the display period of the broken image, and after the specific timing, light emission control of the light emitting means is performed using a brightness data table corresponding to the background image (Fig. 72 to 74 and 77),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission control of the light emitting means can be suitably performed when a broken image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
At least a portion of the display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image overlap,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 72 to 78);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when a cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 72), and outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. Do not output the sound corresponding to the image (see Figure 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 72), and outputs a sound corresponding to the broken image when the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern. outputs a sound to notify that it is being controlled (see Figure 82),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions depending on the gaming state.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern (see FIG. 72), and outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. Do not output the sound corresponding to the image (see Figure 79),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a cracked image can be displayed using a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The sound output means is
It is possible to output a predetermined sound when a crack precursor image is displayed,
It is possible to output a specific sound when a cracked image is displayed,
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 99),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when a crack precursor image is displayed and when a crack image is displayed, and to suitably give an impression when a crack image is displayed.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
Sound output means;
The display means are
Object images can be displayed in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
It is possible to display the cracked image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in conjunction with the movement display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When a crack precursor image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the object image,
When a cracked image is displayed, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 99);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to create a contrast between when a crack precursor image is displayed and when a crack image is displayed, and to suitably give an impression when a crack image is displayed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the operation speed of the fragment image of the first size and the fragment image of the second size smaller than the first size in the first pattern are different,
In the second pattern, since the amount of variation is 0, the operation speed of the third size fragment image and the fourth size fragment image smaller than the third size in the second pattern is common ( (see Figures 84 and 85),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on its size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images falling somewhat slowly and quickly, creating a cracking pattern that shows realistic movement. The second pattern can be used when you want, and the second pattern is affected by the animation in the same way and falls in the same way regardless of the size, so you can select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene. Can be done.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display fragment images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The fragment image is displayed in a manner that it falls after the display starts,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
The speed at which the debris images fall differs due to the different settings of the gravity value between the first pattern and the second pattern (see FIGS. 84 and 85).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment images fall, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display fragment images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
Since the setting of the gravity direction is different between the first pattern and the second pattern, the direction in which the fragment image moves and is displayed is different (see FIGS. 84 and 85).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by varying the values of the parameters and varying the directions in which the fragment images travel, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and enhance the presentation effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display patterns of the fragment image include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern.
The first pattern includes a first parameter regarding the display of the fragment image, and a second parameter regarding the display of the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have the same first parameter value and different second parameter values (see FIGS. 84 and 85);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed and a common part is created for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is different to construct a variety of patterns, making it stable and versatile. It is possible to construct a display pattern of fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display patterns of the fragment image include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern.
The first pattern includes a first parameter regarding the display of the fragment image, and a second parameter regarding the display of the fragment image,
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have the same value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter,
The value of the first parameter is different between the second pattern and the third pattern, and the value of the second parameter is common (see FIGS. 84 and 85),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for fragment images by creating common parts for fragment images in each pattern and configuring them with different parameter values. .

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern,
The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs before the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern ( 41, 43, 56 to 58),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give different impressions and increase interest when displaying a cracked image in the normal state and when displaying a cracked image in the special state.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a third display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes displaying the cracked image in the first mode and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to the second mode,
The display means are
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
An effect image is displayed when displaying the cracked image in the first aspect, and the effect image is hidden at a timing before displaying the cracked image in the second aspect (FIGS. 41, 43, 56, and 56). 57),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The cracked image displayed according to the first pattern and the cracked image displayed according to the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The crack images displayed by the first pattern and the crack images displayed by the second pattern move at different speeds (see FIGS. 41, 43, and 56 to 58).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by the display pattern of the cracked image that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be advantageous when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (FIG. 38, (See FIG. 40(C), FIG. 41, FIG. 43),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the broken image, it is possible to draw more attention to the display pattern of the broken image.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The display period of the first type of fragment image and the display period of the second type of fragment image overlap at least in part,
The first type of fragment image is a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image has a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a lower display layer than the specific display layer can be recognized (see FIGS. 91 and 105).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying two types of fragment images having different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed in a predetermined display layer,
A plurality of fragment images of the second type can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The display period of the first type of fragment image and the display period of the second type of fragment image overlap at least in part,
The display mode is different between the first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image,
The display period of the first type of fragment image is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 91 and 105),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying two types of fragment images having different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The amount of debris images displayed in the first area, which is the display area where the movable body does not overlap, is larger than the amount of debris images displayed in the second area, which is the display area where the movable body overlaps (FIG. 91, (see Figure 105),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragments can be suitably displayed while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
The first fragment image of the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner that it moves from a first area, which is a display area where the movable body does not overlap, to a second area, which is a display area where the movable body overlaps. ,
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is displayed in such a manner that it moves in the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 91 and 105).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, fragment images that do not enter the area where the movable body overlaps make it possible to recognize that it has broken, and by preparing fragment images that pass through the area where the movable body overlaps, it is possible to create a dynamic image. It is possible to provide an impressive performance.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
Display means;
The display means are
Multiple fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The movable body is capable of performing an operation to overlap the display area of the display means,
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap,
Even after the movable body superimposed on the display area of the display means moves to a position where it does not overlap with the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see FIGS. 91 and 105);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the movable body overlaps the display area of the display means, the fragment image can be suitably displayed so as not to miss the fragment image.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance that suggests that the vehicle is controlled in an advantageous state;
The display means are
It is possible to display a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
The predetermined performance is a performance including a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of first type fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image requires a shorter period of time to be hidden in the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 60 and 61);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of displaying the fragment image.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
Before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, it is displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images used are different.
Before the second type of cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern, the second type of cracked image is displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer. The types of background images used are different (see Figures 56, 57, and 62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since a specific character appears in common in the display patterns of a plurality of cracked images, the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer,
The cracked image can be displayed in a second display layer that has a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed in a third display layer that has a lower priority than the second display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a fourth display layer that has a higher priority than the first display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern that displays a first type of broken image when a specific character moves,
The second pattern is a pattern that displays a second type of broken image when a specific character moves,
The display means is
When displaying a first type of broken image according to the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a predetermined timing after displaying the first type of broken image. As shown,
When displaying a second type of cracked image according to the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is turned off at a specific timing after displaying the second type of cracked image. Display (see FIGS. 56, 57, and 62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the effect image hides the first displayed portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display the fragment image in a specific display layer that has a higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the fragment image,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of fragment images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of second type fragment images are displayed in conjunction with the actions of a specific character,
The first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner of moving while changing from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that it moves without a change in speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image (see FIGS. 56, 57, and 62).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect by changing the speed at which the fragment image moves depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment image.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with display means,
The display means are
It is possible to display specific characters in the special display layer,
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer that has higher priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has higher priority than the specific display layer,
There are a first pattern and a second pattern as display patterns for the cracked image.
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of a specific character,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is different depending on when a cracked image is displayed using the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed using the second pattern (see FIGS. 56, 57, 60, and 61). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, expectations for the specific character are increased, and interest is improved by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 12 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, at the upper left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5, a first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), a second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and a decoration are displayed. A display area 5S for displaying small symbols corresponding to the symbols is provided, and the small symbols are variably displayed in response to the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, a pending display, a small symbol, an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a right-handed action prompting the player to perform a right-handed operation. Information images and time-saving remaining displays that indicate the remaining number of time-savings are displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the effect images (object images) such as characters, so that the effect images overlap and are stored in the first hold memory. While this prevents the visibility of the number, the number of secondary storage memories, small designs, and error displays from deteriorating, the decoration design is displayed on the back side (lower layer) than the production image. It may also be possible to prevent the visibility of the performance image from decreasing due to overlapping symbols.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. Displayed variably depending on the action. By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Moreover, based on having received the second variable display start command, the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a display area (special figure pending storage display area 5U) for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , active display area 5F) are provided. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In addition, in this embodiment, a common special symbol pending storage display area 5U is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this area represents a variable display in which execution of the first special symbol is pending. A first special figure pending memory display area in which a first pending display is displayed, and a second special figure pending memory display area in which a second pending display representing a variable display in which execution of the second special symbol is pending is displayed. , may be provided separately. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol holding memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a holding display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and when the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability change state. If it is in the state, it is a display area that displays a pending display according to the second special symbol. Furthermore, active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display according to the first special symbol when the gaming state is a normal state, and an active display according to the second special symbol when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. This is a display area that displays an active display.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 13). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric accessory having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the game ball is placed in the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state where no entry will occur (it is also said that the second starting prize opening will be in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. Incidentally, the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-described one as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable prize winning ball device 6B), the game board 2 is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 13), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 12), and the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." Further, these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 47). Further, various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 13).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 13).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 13, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The payout control board 006SG030 includes a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls, 5 balls, 10 balls, 15 balls, etc.) to the player based on reception of the payout signal. The device 006SG031 is connected to a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which game balls put out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and receives information from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032. It is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the form of the game ball detection signal.

Further, the payout control board 006SG030 includes a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is holding the ball batting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the firing device 006SG033 that can fire game balls onto the game board 2. Further, a signal indicating whether or not the touch ring 006SG35 is detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the firing device 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. .

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the display control unit 123 generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. A layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) to generate an image to be displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area is arranged. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower, and the images in the higher layer image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority in the image display device 5, and the images in the lower layer image drawing area are set higher in display priority. The lower the display priority is set in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and placing a background image as a layer 1 image, and a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and placing a decorative pattern as a layer 2 image. , a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as a layer 3 image, and a layer 4 for drawing and arranging a crack precursor image (glass plate image 006SG301 etc.) to be described later as a layer 4 image. In order to draw and arrange a glass plate image 006SG301A as a crack target image displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as an image of layer 5 in the image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 generated when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. A layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a motion effect image, which will be described later as a layer 6 image, and a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303, which will be described later as a layer 7 image. Image drawing area, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging operation promotion images to be described later as layer 8 images, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging variable display compatible displays (hold display and active display) as layer 9 images. A layer 9 image drawing area, a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and a right-handed hitting notification image are arranged as the layer 10 image. ing. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and arranged in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that a crack has appeared in the display area of the image display device 5 due to the action of the character or the movable body 32. , the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and arranged in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image for making the player recognize that the display area of the image display device 5 is broken. Further, the broken image 006SG302 is an image that is displayed with a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A changed in order to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken due to the action of the character or the movable body 32. be.

The glass plate image 006SG301 includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect A, which will be described later. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, this is an image that is not displayed at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A). In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301A includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, and a strong development effect, which will be described later. It is also an image (broken target image) that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing of the cracking effect (the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect.

Furthermore, as will be described later, a first continuous cracking performance, a second continuous cracking performance, a dialogue preview performance, a background change performance A, a background change performance B, a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, The start timing of the cracking effect in strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of glass plate image 006SG301 and glass plate image 006SG301A is invisible to the player due to the display of white-out image 006SG303. . For this reason, in the present embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 in which the crack is displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, so that it cannot be assumed from the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to realize the cracking (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302), and it is possible to strongly impress the player with the cracking effect.

In this embodiment, by superimposing each image drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 10 image drawing area, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. . Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the layer 1 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are set to have higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area are drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and the display priority is set higher than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area. Further, when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is set to have a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area.

In other words, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the lowest image displayed in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed (displayed with priority) in an upper layer than the image to be drawn, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is in the upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5. (priority display), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is displayed on the image display device 5 above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (priority display). The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, The image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and is drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. The image drawn in the image display device 5 is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. In the image display device 5, the image is displayed (displayed with priority) in an upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5. It is an image that is displayed in a higher layer (displayed preferentially) than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is higher than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. This is an image that is displayed in the upper layer (displayed with priority). Further, when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is displayed in the upper layer than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area on the image display device 5. It is an image (prioritized display). Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, as a substitute for the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may also have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), which will be described later, can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background, which will be described later, can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Images (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), and super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be drawn. , In the layer 1-3 image drawing area, it is possible to draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), which will be described later. The image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is a layer 1-3 image. The image has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area is compared to the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. This image has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the other images.

In addition, in this embodiment, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area have transmittance (transparency) so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the image drawn and placed in each image drawing area can be set higher than 0%. However, an image that is transparently displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The performance random number may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 14(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "0", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 17(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. , different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types is the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot".

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "missing". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has been cold started (that the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that cold start refers to the process of initializing the data when the power is turned on, without restoring the data that existed before the power was turned on, and then putting the gaming machine in a state where it can execute various processes. . Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has been hot started (that the power has been turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that hot start refers to putting the gaming machine into a state where various processes can be executed based on backed up data when the power is turned on. Since hot start does not involve initialization, it is also referred to as power-on without initialization. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. The command 9502H is used as a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (low probability high base state, time saving state), and a gaming state in which time saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state). The third gaming state designation command corresponds to the base state and variable probability state. Note that the high probability/high base state may simply be referred to as the "variable probability state".

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that notifies that the jackpot is in an open state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command that the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "0" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH indicates the result of determining whether the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)" as the winning determination result. This is a variable category command.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 17(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may also add commands different from . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passing notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 18, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "0" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table determines the variable display result in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot gaming state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table, the disturbance for special figure display result determination is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "miss".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result determination table, 22 shows that when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to display results. As a result, pachinko play rr is compared to the probability (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment) of determining that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the control is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when the pachinko game is in a time-saving state (low probability state). Therefore, the probability of determining the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and controlling it to a jackpot gaming state increases (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes higher.

FIG. 20(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 20(B). In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ``Probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' which transition to a high probability high base state, and ``probable variable jackpot A'', ``probable variable jackpot B'', and ``probable variable jackpot C'' which transition to a low probability high base state with only time saving control being executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Uncertain variable jackpot" is set.

The jackpot game state by "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The probability variable control and time saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot gaming states of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, the time saving control that is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the non-probable variable jackpot is controlled to the jackpot gaming state until the 100 variable displays are finished, or until the 100 variable displays are finished. It will be terminated on the condition that. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the probability variable control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the jackpot gaming state passes through the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive home situation that occurs continuously without interruption. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If not, the game state is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 100 times. Therefore, the time saving state is also a gaming state that is controlled when the consecutive game state can end.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" are different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20(A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is based on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. ing.

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIGS. 21(A) and 21(B) show fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the display results are variable depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). Among the cases in which the result is a "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case in which it is "reach", and the case in which the variable display result is a "jackpot" A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in accordance with the above. In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), a pseudo continuous performance including a temporary stop of decorative symbols and a variable display again is executed once as a super reach variation pattern during variable display. After that, the super reach α reach effect is executed via the normal reach and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2), the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the reach effect is executed via the normal reach Variable patterns in which the super reach β reach effect is executed and the variable display result is a miss or jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3), and the normal reach and super reach α reach after the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. A reach effect of super reach β is executed via the effect, and variable patterns (PA2-4, PB1-4) are provided in which the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot. In addition, the reach performance of super reach α in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described below, and the reach performance of super reach β corresponds to the strong S reach performance A and strong S reach performance B described below. .

In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the reach effect of super reach γ is executed via normal reach as a super reach variation pattern. A variation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-6, PB1-6), a variation pattern in which the super reach δ reach effect is executed via the normal reach and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2- 7, PB1-7) is provided. In addition, the reach performance of super reach γ in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described below, and the reach performance of super reach δ corresponds to strong S reach performance A and strong S reach performance B described below. .

As shown in FIG. 21, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of pending memories, the gaming state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22(A) to 22(D), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a loss, the special symbol that executes the variable display is suspended. If the number of memories (number of reserved memories of the same type) is less than 1, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table A for failure and the value of the random number MR3, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol to be variable displayed is determined. If there are 2 pieces, a variation pattern for a miss is determined based on the value of the judgment table B and the random number value MR3, and if the number of reserved memories of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 3 pieces, a variation pattern for a miss is determined. A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Further, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a loss, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss and the value of the random number MR3. As shown in FIGS. 22(E) and 22(F), when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the random number MR3 are A fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value, and when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3. Decide on a pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22(A), when the variation pattern determination table A for miss is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the variation pattern is changed to a non-reach miss without shortening. If the fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) is determined, and the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) that is outside the normal reach, and the value of the random number MR3 is 901. If it is within the range of ~970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo-continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971. If it is within the range of ~990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined. The pattern is determined to be a variable pattern (PA2-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, and then the super reach β is deviated through the normal reach and the super reach α.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variation pattern determination table B for miss is selected, the variation pattern is shortened if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700. (PA1-2), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), and the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach. , After performing the pseudo-continuous performance twice, a variation pattern (PA2-4) is determined in which the super reach β goes through the normal reach and the super reach α (PA2-4).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(C), when the variation pattern determination table C for miss is selected, the variation pattern is shortened if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750. (PA1-3), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), and the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970. If it is within the range, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the super reach α is off via the normal reach after performing the pseudo continuous performance once, and the value of the random number MR3 is 971 to 990. If the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off via the normal reach. , After performing the pseudo-continuous performance twice, a variation pattern (PA2-4) is determined in which the super reach β goes through the normal reach and the super reach α (PA2-4).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(D), when the variation pattern determination table D for miss is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the variation pattern is changed to the short non-reach variation pattern. (PA1-4), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach variation pattern (PA2-5), and the value of random number MR3 is between 551 and 550. If it is within the range of 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined as a normal reach fluctuation pattern. (PA2-5), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) in which the super reach γ is off via the normal reach, If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern (PA2-7) in which the super reach δ is off via the normal reach.

Also, as shown in FIG. 22(E), when jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the variation pattern is changed to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1 -1), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern will be changed to the fluctuation pattern (PB1 -2), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) that will lead to a super reach β jackpot via normal reach, and the random number If the value of MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be determined as a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that will become a jackpot with Super Reach β via Normal Reach and Super Reach α after performing pseudo-continuous performance twice. do.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(F), when jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, if the random value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the variation pattern is changed to the non-reach jackpot variation pattern ( PB1-5), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a super reach γ jackpot via normal reach, and If the value of numerical value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined at a ratio of 1 regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the determination ratio of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns may be made different depending on the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. There is. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A) is stored in the winning order.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B) is stored in the winning order.

As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held as pending data. The data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special figure reservation storage unit 006SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and satisfies the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for variable display result determination, the random number MR2 for winning type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuating pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 on the basis of The information is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In this way, the reservation data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 006SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 006SG151B can be used to execute a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol. This is pending information that indicates that the game is on hold and makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display results (special pattern display results) in these special pattern games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and the second starting winning opening In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the passing (entering) of the game ball by the game ball is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage section, the The variable display based on the second pending storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first pending information.

The standard figure reservation storage unit 006SG151C stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 006SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 006SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 006SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 006SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling effect operations in addition to programs for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has a performance control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. is provided. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 24(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 006SG191, a performance control timer setting section 006SG192, a performance control counter setting section 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 006SG194. There is.

The production control flag setting section 006SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 006SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 006SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 006SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A as shown in FIG. 24(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 006SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command), pending memory number notification command (the A set of four commands, ie, a first pending memory number notification command or a second pending memory number notification command), a symbol designation command, and a variable category command, are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, pending storage number notification commands, and symbol designation commands. , a storage area (entry) is secured for storing variable category commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in this embodiment, there is a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, and a continuous winning effect that will be described later. A storage area is provided for each storage area (entry) so that a continuous cracking effect flag that can specify whether ) are secured for each.

In addition, in the hold display effect determination process described later, if execution of the hold display effect is not determined, "0" corresponding to the normal hold display display pattern is stored in the hold display flag, and the hold display effect is When it is decided to execute the effect, "1" (square (◇) )) or “2” (star (☆)) is set. After the pending display effect determination process is executed, the pending display update process described later is further executed, so that the active display and the pending display are changed to display modes according to each pending display flag (for example, the value of the pending display flag is If it is "0", a white circle (○) is displayed, if the value of the pending display flag is "1", a square (◇) is displayed, and if the value of the pending display flag is "2", a star (☆) is displayed. In addition, the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is set in the continuous breaking effect setting process (see FIG. 37), which will be described later.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable category command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command, symbol designation command, and variable category command are stored in order.

The command stored in the start winning command reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 24(B) is sent to the entry (buffer number " 1-0" or "2-0" entry) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is deleted. '') and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols stored in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the commands stored in the buffer number "0" are deleted. ” are shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “0”. , the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4", respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stop. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then random number circuit setting processing (step S8) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). (Step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 26 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 26 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result is determined as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority play). ). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the gaming state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 27. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (006SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (006SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 006SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 006SGS102 (006SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (006SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 006SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "0", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (006SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way and the starting opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, transmission settings of a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (006SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "0", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 26 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process (step 006SGS112), and then, for example, sets the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 to the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. Settings are made to send a pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 by storing it in the area (006SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 26 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Random numerical value judgment process when winning a prize)
FIG. 29(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 28 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state is controlled by special symbol normal processing described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to do so. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 006SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the prize winning random value determination process shown in FIG. The current gaming state is specified (step 006SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the variable probability state (high probability/high base state) when the variable probability flag is on, and the time saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It is sufficient to specify that the state is the normal state (low certainty base state) when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the process of step 006SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 19 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 006SGS109 of FIG. 28 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 006SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table selected by the process of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 006SGS123; N), in response to the variable display result being "miss", The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command, is executed (step 006SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. It is determined whether there is one (Step 006SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set table D (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, a deviation variation pattern determination table B and a deviation variation pattern determination table C are prepared according to the number of pending memories. are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 22, among these fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss, a fluctuation pattern determination table is used for a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Judgment values from 1 to 660 are assigned within the range that the random number MR3 can take, and in the fluctuation pattern judgment tables B and C for failure, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Judgment values from 1 to 700 and from 1 to 750 are assigned to each of the possible ranges. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination tables A to C, determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern within the possible range of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 006SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always determined as non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for type determination (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. If it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command is executed, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command is executed (step 006SGS133). A pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the process of step 006 SGS135, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (low probability high base state or high If it is a certain high base state), it is sufficient to set the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

In the process of step 006 SGS138, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each step and the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3. (Step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is commonly "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A category, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", and a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach) are established, and a random value is set. It is sufficient if it can be determined based on MR3 whether or not it is determined to be in such a variation category.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 006SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 27 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "0" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "0" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "0" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 19 is selected as the table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss." and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off (low probability low base state and low probability high base state in this embodiment), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is between 1 and 219. If it falls within the range, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it does not fall, it is determined to be a "miss".

In this way, in the display result determination table selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so step 006SGS150 In this process, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine the special pattern display result as a "jackpot" depending on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state when the variable display such as a special pattern game starts. ” By determining whether or not to do so, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a “jackpot” with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of “A”, “probable variable jackpot B”, and “probable variable jackpot C” matches (step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed into a time-saving state (low probability high base state) and a probability variable state (which is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving state). Which gaming state to control (high-accuracy-high-base state) is determined before a fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3". Note that after the processing of step 006SGS155, the process advances to step 006SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "miss" (step 006SGS150; N), the process in step 006SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006 SGS156, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not) in advance, and the result of determining the jackpot type in the case where the jackpot gaming state is set. , set a confirmed special symbol. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "0" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 27 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a loss, if the gaming state is normal and the number of special symbols reserved for executing variable display is 1, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is selected, and the gaming state is normal. If the state and the number of pending memories of special symbols that execute variable display are 2, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, and the game state is normal and the number of pending memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 3. If it is, then the losing variation pattern determination table C is selected, and if the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the gaming state is normal, jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the gaming state is time saving or variable probability, jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected. do.

Then, by referring to the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, etc., multiple types of fluctuation patterns are generated. (Step 006SGS162).

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS162, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS163, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of special symbols (step 006SGS164). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, a special symbol variable display time which is a variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step 006SGS165). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS166), and then the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The specification command, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first pending memory number notification command, or the second pending memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variation start command, second variation start command, and variation pattern specification command are sent. , the gaming state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 27 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), it is determined in step 006SGS191 whether or not the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), proceed to step 006SGS196, and if the time saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), check whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. judge. If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the time saving number remains in a high base state, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS192;N). 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS194), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS195), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command is performed according to the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 27 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006 SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag and time saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). Further, the time saving number counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing, and the jackpot end processing is ended (step 006 SGS216).

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random value update process (step S77), a demonstration performance control process (step S78) for executing a demonstration performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display displayed on the image display device 5 are performed. A background display update process (step S79) of updating to another background display is executed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, the image display device 5 updates the image display device 5 according to the execution of a specific effect (for example, a background change effect or a reach effect described later) or a change in the game state during variable display. It is possible to execute control to update the displayed background image.

In addition to the process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, the menu display process includes a process of displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5, and also a process of displaying a speaker on the speaker in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is being displayed. This includes processing for adjusting the volume output from 8L and 8R, and processing for adjusting the amount of light (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the demonstration performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a timer until starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, such as a wait timer for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance, based on, for example, receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, The customer waiting demonstration effect may be started based on the fact that the timer has timed out without starting the variable display. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demonstration performance start wait timer is operating or the customer waiting demonstration performance is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration performance start waiting timer is cleared, the customer waiting demonstration performance is interrupted, The display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 34 as the production control process process. In the production control process shown in FIG. 35, the production control CPU 120 first determines the display mode of the pending display displayed in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F. A display effect determination process is executed (step S160). Further, a pending display update process (step S161) is executed to update the display mode of the pending display in the special figure pending storage display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F. Note that the pending display update process is also a process for starting anew the display of the pending display or active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the pending display effect determination process. After execution of the pending display update process, one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Hold display performance determination process)
FIG. 36 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the pending display and active display in the pending display effect shown in FIG. 35. In the pending display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the starting winning reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in FIG. 24(B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry for which the pending display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the pending display flag is not set, specify the variable display result from the symbol designation command in that entry and the variable category from the variable category command in that entry, and then combine these specified variable display results with the variable category. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a hold display effect and the effect pattern, that is, the display mode of a hold display or an active display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 36, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided at a rate of 5% not to execute the pending display effect, and at a rate of 25% it is decided to execute the held display effect in the effect pattern α. Then, at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 5% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect in production pattern α. Then, at a rate of 0%, execution of the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance is determined. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is other (normal reach), 75% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect with the effect pattern α. is determined, and the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance is determined to be executed at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is super reach, 65% of the time it is decided not to execute the pending display effect, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the pending display effect in production pattern α. Then, it is decided to execute the performance pattern β of the suspended display performance at a rate of 10%.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag of the entry as " If the value of the pending display flag of the entry is set to 1 and the performance pattern α of the pending display notice effect has been decided, the value of the pending display flag of the entry is set to 1, and the execution pattern β of the pending display notice effect is set. If execution has been determined, "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag of the entry.

In this embodiment, after setting a value of 0 to 2 in the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A as described above, the production control CPU 120 performs the pending display updating process (step S61). ), if the value of the pending display flag is set to 0, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag will be displayed as a white circle (○), and the pending display If "1" is set as the value of the flag, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white square (◇), and "2" is set as the value of the pending display flag. In this case, the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

Due to these settings, if the hold display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star shape in display pattern B, or if the hold display or active display is displayed as a white circle. If the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than that of display pattern B, and if the pending display or active display is displayed in a white star shape in display pattern B, then the pending display or active display is changed to display pattern A. Since the percentage of jackpot gaming state control (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when it is displayed as a white rectangle, the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, that is, whether the pending display effect is executed or not. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the performance pattern.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 006SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 006SG194A are stored in one buffer number. Shift upward by minutes (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the production control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, "7" is displayed as the stop symbol. It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern, a combination in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, a combination such as "767", etc. Determine the combination (missing symbol) that will result in the out-of-reach.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

After executing step 006SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 performs a continuous cracking performance setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous cracking performance during variable display, and a dialogue preview performance setting for executing a dialogue preview performance during variable display. processing (step 006SGS278), background change effect setting process for executing a background change effect during variable display (step 006SGS279), reach suggestion effect setting process for executing a reach suggestion effect during variable display (step 006SGS280), A cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) for executing a cut-in effect during variable display is executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts a process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 006SGS284). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command; however, the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 006SGS285). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous cracking effect setting process)
FIG. 38(A) is a flowchart showing the continuous crack effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the continuous breaking performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the gaming state is the normal state (step 006SGS311). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 006SGS311; Y), refer to the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A and check whether there is an entry for which the value of the continuous breaking effect flag (“0” or “1”) is not set. (Step 006SGS312), and determines whether there is an entry in which the value of the continuous crack effect flag is set (Step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous breaking effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318, and if there is an entry with the value of the continuous breaking effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), Based on the symbol designation command and variable category command stored in the entry, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect (step 006SGS314). In addition, in the continuous cracking effect in the normal state in this embodiment, by executing the variable display multiple times for a variable display that has not yet been executed, the variable display result of the target variable display becomes a jackpot. This is a performance that suggests that something will happen (see Figure 41).

When the gaming state is the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. Then, it is decided to execute the continuous cracking effect at a rate of 80%. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 80% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 20% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is other (normal reach), it is determined at a rate of 60% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 40% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach, it is determined at a rate of 50% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 50% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, in step 006SGS314, the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous cracking performance at a rate of 30%, if the variable display result is a jackpot, and at a rate of 70%. The execution of the continuous cracking effect is determined at the rate of . When the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 30% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 50% not to perform the continuous break performance, and at a rate of 50% it is determined to execute the continuous break performance. Further, when the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach, it is determined at a rate of 40% not to perform the continuous break effect, and at a rate of 60% it is determined to execute the continuous break effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state when the continuous breaking performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous breaking performance in the process of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it is determined to execute the continuous breaking effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous breaking effect flag of the entry to "1", proceeds to step 006SGS318, and decides not to execute the continuous breaking effect. If it is determined (step 006SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 sets "0" as the value of the continuous break effect flag of the entry, and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which "1" is set as the value of the consecutive breaking performance flag, that is, whether or not it has been decided to execute the continuous breaking performance. (Step 006SGS318). If there is no entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag (step 006SGS318; N), the continuous breaking effect setting process is ended, and "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag. If there is an entry (Step 006 SGS318; Y), it is further determined whether the entry whose continuous winning effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, the starting winning reception command. It is determined whether the entry is stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), it is determined that the variable display is not the target variable display of the continuous breaking effect. The execution setting of the first continuous cracking effect according to the above is performed, and the continuous breaking effect setting process is completed (step 006SGS320), and the entry for which "1" is set as the value of the continuous breaking effect flag is the entry corresponding to the variable display. If so (Step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (Step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous cracking effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), 006SGS321;N) sets the execution of the second continuous cracking effect according to the fact that the variable display is the target variable display of the continuous breaking effect, and ends the continuous breaking effect setting process (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous breaking effect when the gaming state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect is executed in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the continuous breaking effect. do. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous cracking effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern, the second continuous cracking effect is not executed, while the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern. In the case of a variable display with a variable pattern, a second continuous crack effect is executed.

In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state (step 006SGS311; N), the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a continuous breaking performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and performs a continuous breaking performance setting process. (Step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous breaking performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. At this time, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous cracking effect is determined. It is sufficient to determine the highest ratio (execution ratio of consecutive cracking effects for each variation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute a continuous breaking effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, the setting for executing the continuous breaking effect (first continuous breaking effect) once or twice in the variable display is set. , and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is normal reach or super reach, the first consecutive cracking effect will be executed twice in the variable display, and the second consecutive effect will be executed once after the two first consecutive breaking effects. All you have to do is set up the execution of the cracking effect.

In other words, the continuous break performance in the time saving state and variable probability state of this embodiment is a performance that can be executed multiple times in one variable display, and is a performance that suggests that the reach will depend on the number of executions. ing.

(Speech preview production setting process)
FIG. 39(A) is a flowchart showing the dialogue preview effect setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variation pattern of the variable display is shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview effect setting process is finished, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is non-shortened non-reach, normal reach, or super reach. If yes (step 006SGS331; N), the execution or non-execution of dialogue preview performance and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 39(B), if the variable pattern is non-reachable and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and the performance pattern A of the dialogue preview performance is determined. 30% of the time. In addition, if the variation pattern is normal reach and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in production pattern A is determined at a rate of 35%. , the execution of dialogue preview performance in performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable pattern is super reach and the variable display result is off, the non-execution of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in production pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%. Then, the execution of the dialogue preview performance in performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the dialogue preview performance in performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to perform the line preview performance, and at a rate of 5% whether or not to perform the line preview performance in production pattern A. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the performance pattern C of the dialogue preview performance is determined at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 39(C), production pattern A displays the line "Chance!?" in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking production executed as part of the speech preview production. The performance pattern B is a performance pattern in which the line "Chi hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking performance executed as part of the dialogue preview performance, The performance pattern C is a performance pattern in which the line "It's super hot!" is displayed in the area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in the cracking performance executed as part of the dialogue preview performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39(B), when the dialogue preview performance is executed during the variable display, the control is made to be in a jackpot game state more than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed (non-execution). The percentage of Furthermore, when the dialogue preview performance is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set to be highest when the dialogue preview performance is performed in the performance pattern C, and when the dialogue preview performance is performed in the performance pattern A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is set to be the lowest when executed in A > non-execution).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in FIG. 37 will be explained. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation patterns of the variable display are PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2. -7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, and PB1-7. The fluctuation patterns of the variable display are PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3. , PB1-4, or PB1-7, refer to the reception command buffer 006SG194A at the time of starting winning.

When the gaming state is in the normal state, if the symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is not stored in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that indicates a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 40(A). Then, it is decided at a rate of 60% not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect, and to perform the failure pattern of the background change effect while not executing the change of the background image (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is If it is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2-4. , PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of background change effect B with failure pattern is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of background image change and execution of background change effect with success pattern is determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the success pattern of background change effect A is executed, the variation pattern of the variable display is If it is one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B in a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the gaming state is in the time saving state/variable probability state, if the symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is not stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is no pending memory that will result in a jackpot, the background image It is decided at a rate of 50% not to perform the change and not to perform the background change effect, and to not perform the change of the background image and to execute the background change effect with a failure pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect are determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 5%. .

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory that will become a jackpot, then FIG. 40(A) As shown, it is decided at a rate of 30% not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect, and to perform the failure pattern of the background change effect without executing the change of the background image (change of the variable display concerned). If the pattern is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the background change effect A is executed with the failure pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA2-2, PA2. -4, PB1-2, PB1-4, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect B) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect are determined. (If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the success pattern of background change effect A, If the variation pattern is one of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4, execution of background change effect B with a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state/variable probability state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the starting winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a pending memory of a jackpot, the background image Deciding not to perform the change and not to perform the background change effect at a rate of 20%, not to change the background image, and to execute the background change effect with a failure pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PB1-7, PA1 -5, PA1-6, PA2-7, the execution with the failure pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the change of the background image and the success pattern of the background change effect is determined. execution (if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, PA2-7, execution with the success pattern of background change effect A) is determined at a rate of 80%. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state when the background change performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the background change effect in any of the effect patterns, the execution settings are made according to the effect pattern of the background change effect, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display during effect processing according to the execution settings. Just do it. Further, when it is determined to change the background image (when it is determined to execute the background change effect in a successful pattern), the background image change setting is performed. Note that the background image may be changed in the background display update process (step S79) shown in FIG. 34.

(Reach suggestion effect setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in FIG. 37 will be explained. In the reach suggestion performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the execution or non-execution of the reach suggestion performance and the reach suggestion performance are determined according to the variation pattern of the variable display. Determine the performance pattern.

For example, as shown in FIG. 40(B), if the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the failure pattern of the reach suggestion effect is determined. The execution rate is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a reach variation pattern, non-execution of the reach suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the reach suggestion effect in a successful pattern is determined at a rate of 70%. . In other words, in the present embodiment, when the reach-suggesting performance is executed, the reach (normal reach or super-reach reach performance) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the reach-suggesting performance is not executed. . Furthermore, when a reach-suggesting performance is executed, the player is notified that the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a failure pattern and does not result in a reach, while the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a successful pattern. The player is informed that the game is reachable by executing the game.

In addition, if it is decided to execute the reach-suggesting performance using any of the performance patterns, the execution settings are made according to the performance pattern of the reach-suggesting performance, and the reach-suggesting performance is executed in the variable display processing according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in FIG. 37 will be explained. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. Determine whether or not. If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, PB1-7, cut-in is performed according to the variable display result of the variable display. Decide whether or not to perform the performance and the performance pattern of the cut-in performance.

For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. 40(C), if the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the cut-in performance is determined at a rate of 65%, and the performance of the cut-in performance is Execution of pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of cut-in performance at production pattern Y is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 20%, and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 20%. Decide whether to execute Y at a rate of 70%.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set so that the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed, when the cut-in effect is executed with the effect pattern Y, the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed with the effect pattern X. (Presence or absence of cut-in performance and jackpot expectation level of performance pattern: performance pattern Y>performance pattern X>cut-in performance not executed). In addition, when the gaming state is in the time saving state/variable probability state, if the variable display result is a failure, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 70%. %, and execution of the cut-in effect in production pattern Y is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the cut-in effect in the effect pattern X is determined at a rate of 15%, and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Decide whether to execute Y at a rate of 75%. As described above, in the present embodiment, the proportion of control to the jackpot gaming state when the cut-in performance is executed, that is, the jackpot expectation level, is different between the normal state and the time saving state/variable probability state.

Note that the cut-in performance in this embodiment is a performance that displays different images depending on the performance pattern (for example, an image of the characters "Heat!!", an image of the characters "Chance!", etc.), This is a performance that differs in the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled depending on which image is displayed (which performance pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, the performance pattern X is This is a performance pattern that displays an image of the characters ``Chance!'', and the performance pattern Y is a performance pattern that displays an image of the characters ``Heat!!'').

In addition, when it is decided to execute a cut-in effect using any of the effect patterns, the execution settings are made according to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and the cut-in effect is executed in the variable display process according to the execution settings. All you have to do is execute it.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is an effect accompanied by a cracking effect (see FIGS. 42 and 66), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect is As a performance pattern of the performance, a performance pattern with a cracking performance and a performance pattern without a cracking performance may be provided. For example, the performance pattern Y with a high expectation of a jackpot may be a performance pattern with a breaking performance, and the performance pattern X with a low expectation of a jackpot may be a performance pattern without a breaking performance. Furthermore, when the effect pattern X is a effect pattern that does not involve a crack effect in this way, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined to be the effect pattern X, the display mode of the band-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed. The display color of the image may be determined from a plurality of aspects depending on the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different ratios from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss). By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a cracking effect is included as a cut-in effect, and if a cracking effect is not included as a cut-in effect, an image that is further displayed It is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode.

(Explanation of production)
As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a continuous break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a cut-in effect at the start of the variable display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-described continuous break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect, reach suggestion effect, and cut-in effect, a plurality of effects can be executed during variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, and the background change effect B. , a pseudo continuous performance, a reach suggestion performance, a weak development performance, a strong development performance A, a strong development performance B, a cut-in performance, and a result notification performance. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the cut are performed. It is possible to perform in-effect and result notification effects. Note that the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect may be provided as effects that cannot be performed in a normal state and can only be performed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. In this case, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determined ratios shown in FIGS. 38(B) and 40(C). In this way, it is possible to perform different types of cracking effects in the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state.

As shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, in the first continuous cracking effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is The cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed as the image to be broken instead, is broken is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and is not dependent on the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, etc. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking range is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301). In addition, the first continuous cracking effect improves the visibility of the background image between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. It's also a different performance. Furthermore, while the first continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display before the variable display to be read ahead, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, it may be executed multiple times during the execution of the first variable display. This is a performance that is likely to occur, and is also a performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of times it is executed.

The second continuous crack effect is a crack effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. is an effect that is executed from the start timing of the variable display, and a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking area is This is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301). In addition, the second continuous cracking effect improves the visibility of the background image between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. It's also a different performance. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the prefetch target.

The dialogue preview performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a production in which a cracking effect is performed, in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs breaks (the cracking area is the glass plate image This is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301). In addition, the dialogue preview effect is a effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (the area that is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 and is broken by the cracking effect) and other display areas. At the same time, one of the words "Chance!", "Hot!", and "Super Hot!" will be displayed in the cracked area (target area of cracking effect), and the jackpot game state will be controlled depending on the displayed line. This is an effect in which the percentage of play is different (the displayed dialogue suggests the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level)).

Background change effect A includes a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. In addition, background change effect A is a successful pattern in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of the character, and the background image changes as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. There are cases in which the process is executed, and cases in which the process is executed in a failure pattern in which the background image does not change because the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken).

In the background change effect B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is created in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. This is an effect that may change the background image when executed. In addition, background change effect B is a successful pattern in which cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 in two stages, and the background image changes as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. If the glass plate image 006SG301 has cracks in the first stage, but the second stage cracks do not occur and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, or the glass plate image 006SG301 has cracks in the first stage and the second stage. There are cases in which failure patterns (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) are executed in which the background image does not change because the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break even though cracks occur in the first step.

In the pseudo continuous effect, when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a specific combination during variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect in which the re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started by executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the plate image 006SG301, is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed by the movement of the movable body 32. This is an effect in which a crack occurs and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks. In addition, in this embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect is executed up to two times during one variable display, and as the first pseudo continuous effect, the color of the fragments of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A and The color of the fragments of the broken glass plate image 006SG301A as the second pseudo-reaction is different. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (which is controlled by the jackpot game state). The ratio is set to be high. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous performance in this embodiment, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) is determined by the color of the fragments of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the breaking performance executed as a part of the pseudo-continuous performance. It is now possible to make suggestions to people.

The reach-suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the establishment of a reach during variable display, in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect in which a reach may be established by executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed instead breaks. The reach suggestion effect is executed in a successful pattern in which a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of the character, and a reach is established when the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. There are two cases: a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken) even though a crack has occurred due to the action of the character, and a reach is not established. be.

The weak development effect is a glass plate image 006SG301 whose transmittance is less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 after the normal reach reach effect, and a glass plate image that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. By executing a cracking effect in which 006SG301A cracks, if the gaming state is in the normal state, the player is notified of the transition to the reach effect of Super Reach α, and the gaming state is in the time-saving state or the variable probability state. If so, this is a performance that notifies the player of the transition to the super reach γ reach performance. The weak development effect is also a effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks occurring due to the action of the character.

In the strong development performance A, when the gaming state is the normal state, after the reach performance of super reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the corresponding This is an effect that notifies the shift to the reach effect of super reach β by executing a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks according to the movement of the movable body 32. If the state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, after the normal reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. This is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach δ by executing a crack effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed breaks according to the movement of the movable body 32.

The strong development effect B is also a effect in which a crack occurs without any action of the character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. During the reach effect of Super Reach α, the glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken. By executing the cracking effect, this is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of super reach β, and the glass plate image 006SG301 can be replaced without cracking regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. This is an effect in which the entire displayed glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The cut-in performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance in which a cracking effect is performed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks without any cracks occurring regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character. . In addition, in the cut-in effect, different cut-in images are displayed depending on the effect pattern from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled varies depending on the displayed cut-in image (display This is an effect that suggests the rate (jackpot expectation level) of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the cut-in image that is displayed.

The result notification performance is an operation promotion performance in which an operation promotion image is displayed at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, in the center of the display area) to urge the player to operate the push button 31B. Thereafter, in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a performance that may notify that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by executing the cracking performance. In addition, the result notification performance is a success pattern that notifies that the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, breaks after a crack occurs due to the operation of the movable body, and that the state is controlled to be a jackpot game state. In the case where the movable body does not operate and cracks do not occur in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), the jackpot game state is not controlled. That is, there are cases where the execution is performed using a failure pattern that notifies the variable display result that it is a failure. In addition, the result notification performance of this embodiment is a variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are variable patterns of non-reach jackpot or non-reach, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. (See FIG. 47).

(Production timing for each variation pattern)
Next, the rough execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each effect in this embodiment will be explained. First, to explain the variable display when the gaming state is the normal state, as shown in FIG. can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display in the order of the first continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect, without overlapping the effect periods.

As shown in FIG. 44(B), when variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are variable patterns of shortened and non-reach, the first continuous cracking effect is executed from the start timing of variable display. It is executable.

As shown in FIG. 44(C), when variable display is executed in PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are fluctuation patterns of normal reach jackpot and normal reach, the dialogue notice is announced after a while from the start of variable display. Performance, background change performance A, reach suggestion performance, and normal reach reach performance can be executed individually in this order without overlapping performance periods.

As shown in FIG. 44(D), when variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach α jackpot and super reach α, 2 consecutive cracking effects, background change effect B, first pseudo continuous effect, normal reach effect, weak development effect, and super reach α reach effect can be performed individually without overlapping production periods. . In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach α, the result notification effect is executed in overlap with the reach effect of the super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 45(A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β deviation, from the start timing of the variable display, 2 consecutive cracking effects, dialogue preview effects, background change effects A, reach suggestion effects, normal reach effects, weak development effects, super reach α reach effects, strong development effects A, and super reach β reach effects in this order. can be executed individually without duplication. In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are individually executed overlapping with the reach effect of the super reach β.

In particular, the character displayed in the background change effect A starts to be displayed after the display of the dialogue in the dialogue preview effect (the display of the broken area of the display area of the image display device 5) becomes hidden. To prevent the deterioration of the performance effect of each cracking effect due to the player's attention being dispersed to a plurality of cracking effects, since no new cracking effect will occur in a place where a cracking effect has already occurred. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 45(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach β jackpot and super reach β deviation, from the start timing of the variable display, 2 consecutive cracking effects, background change effect B, 1st pseudo continuous effect, 2nd pseudo continuous effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, super reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, super reach β reach Each performance can be executed individually in the order of performance without overlapping performance periods. In addition, during the execution period of the reach effect of the super reach β, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are individually executed overlapping with the reach effect of the super reach β.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 46, a variable display in which background change effect B is executed and a variable display in which dialogue preview effect is executed are different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and dialogue preview effect may be effects that can be executed during the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case, when background change effect B and dialogue preview effect are executable during the same variable display, if it is decided to execute background change effect B, background change effect B and The execution periods of the dialogue preview performances may be set so as not to overlap. By doing this, for example, by executing the cracking effect as a dialogue preview effect while a crack is occurring as the background change effect B, the player who has executed the cracking effect as the background change effect B. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified when the background image changes.

Next, variable display when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 46(A) and 46(B), when a variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach, it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach and non-reach jackpot. When it is decided to execute the continuous breaking effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous breaking effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot When execution of the background change effect is determined as a prefetch for PB1-7, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, targeting the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, as a pre-reading preview effect, an effect is executed in which a crack gradually widens in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display before the variable display. However, it may also be possible to perform a performance (so-called immediate win performance, special continuous crack performance) in which a breaking performance is executed and a jackpot symbol is displayed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5. Incidentally, since this effect is an instant hit effect, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as a breaking effect may be made faster than the moving speed of the pieces displayed as other breaking effects.

As shown in FIG. 46(C) and FIG. 46(D), when a variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach variation pattern, the non-reach variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a non-reach jackpot. When it is decided to execute the continuous cracking effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, the first continuous breaking effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and the super reach δ When it is decided to execute the background change effect as a prefetch for PB1-7, which is the variable pattern of the jackpot, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 47(A), regarding the case where variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach variation pattern, when it is subject to continuous cracking effect and the variation pattern of super reach δ jackpot When the execution of the background change effect is not decided as a look-ahead for PB1-7, and when the variable display is executed at PB1-5, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, After the first continuous crack performance is individually performed three times from the start timing, a result notification performance is further performed.

As shown in FIG. 47(B), when a variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variable pattern outside the normal reach, the production except for the variable display of decorative symbols from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing is It is not executed, and only the normal reach effect is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 47(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6 and PB1-6, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach γ jackpot or super reach γ off, reach from the start timing of the variable display. The effects other than the variable display of decorative symbols are not executed until the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach effect, the weak development effect, and the super reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping production periods. There is. Note that during the execution period of the super reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the super reach γ reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 47(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7 and PB1-7, which are fluctuation patterns of super reach δ jackpot or super reach δ off, reach from the start timing of the variable display. Background change effect A can be executed during the period up to the timing. Furthermore, from the reach timing, the reach performance of normal reach, the strong development performance A, and the reach performance of super reach δ can be performed individually in this order without overlapping performance periods. In addition, during the execution period of the reach performance of the super reach δ, the cut-in performance and the result notification performance are individually executed overlapping with the reach performance of the super reach δ.

(Flow of production in Super Reach α)
Next, the flow of performance in super reach α will be explained based on FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach α.

As shown in FIG. 48 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of super reach α is started, the first background image (for example, An image representing a daytime city scene) is displayed, and a variable display of decorative patterns is executed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, the second continuous crack effect is started. Specifically, when the second continuous crack effect is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image changes to a cracked state. After this is displayed (see FIG. 48 (A2)), a crack effect is performed in which a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) in the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the variable display result may become a jackpot depending on the type of displayed character image. It is suggested (see FIG. 48 (A3)). After the second continuous crack effect ends, the variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the second continuous breaking performance, a dialogue preview performance is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview effect is started (see FIG. 48 (A4)). The operation promotion image is composed of a button image imitating the push button 31B, a character image "Press!!", an indicator image indicating the operation validity period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective period of operation ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 48 (A5)), a part of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and multiple fragment images are scattered. A cracking effect is performed. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, a text image "Chance!?" will be displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the variable display result may become a jackpot depending on the content of the displayed text image. (See Figure 48 (A6)). After the dialogue preview performance ends, the variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the dialogue preview performance, background change performance A is started. Specifically, after the effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (A7)), if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 48 (A7)). (See A8). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, a kicking motion of the character), and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to become cracked. After the image is displayed in this manner (see FIG. 48 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 48 (A10)). reference). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image (for example, a special zone image representing a wilderness landscape) is displayed as a background image (Fig. 48 (A11 )reference). After the background change effect A ends, variable display is performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the background change effect A ends, the reach suggestion effect is started. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, the character hits an area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel), and a crack precursor image is displayed on the left side of the crack precursor image. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the first crack mode (see FIG. 48 (A13)), the character image moves (for example, the character uses a gavel in the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R). The crack precursor image changes from the first crack mode to the second crack mode as a result of the crack being displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image (see FIG. 48 (A14)), and furthermore, the character image (For example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the central decorative pattern display area 5C with a gavel) (as shown in FIG. 48 (A15), if a crack has been determined, a crack target is displayed instead of the crack precursor image). A cracking effect is performed in which the entire area of the image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 48 (A16)).

Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, decorative symbols with the same numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the N reach performance, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (A17)), the character image moves (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and touches the glass plate). A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the punching action (punching action) (see Figure 49 (A18)), and a crack is displayed instead of the crack precursor image without a crack being displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. A cracking effect is performed in which the entire area of the target image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 49 (A19)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, weak S reach performance A (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (A20) to (A22) in FIG. 49).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance A is started. Specifically, after the development symbol with the word “Development” displayed in the center decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 49 (A23)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the movement of the glass falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a production position that overlaps with the approximate center position of the display screen, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. Instead, the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 49 (A24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed, and a strong S reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (Fig. 49 (A25) to (A27) )reference).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach effect, the cut-in effect is started. Specifically, an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the strong S reach effect (see FIG. 49 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective period of operation ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. After that, the text image "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see Figure 49 (A29)) ). After the cut-in effect ends, the strong S reach effect is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in performance, the result notification performance is started. Specifically, first, an image of the ally character delivering the final blow is displayed (see FIG. 50 (A30)), and then the ally character's actions are displayed in slow motion and the image fades out (FIG. 50). (See A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, after an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 50 (A32)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movable body 32 moves on the display screen A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the movement of falling from the upper origin position to a predetermined production position between the origin position and the production position, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. As a result, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a manner in which the crack appears downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (FIG. 50). (See A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin operation in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined presentation position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a plurality of fragments are generated. A cracking effect in which the image scatters is performed (see FIG. 50 (A34)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the ally character has won the battle of the enemy character. Ru. In addition, the background image is displayed as a fifth background image 006SG085 for the jackpot (e.g., a rainbow-like image), and the movable lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined luminescent color (e.g., rainbow) to produce a predetermined production effect. After a sound is output and it is announced that the jackpot game state is being controlled (see FIG. 50 (A35)), the background image returns to the first background image and the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed ( (See FIG. 50 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a missed display result, after the image of the enemy character's punch hitting the ally character is displayed (see FIG. 50 (A37)), the movable body 32 does not move and the crack precursor image ( A glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked manner (for example, a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and the display screen A gray image (effect image) is displayed in the entire area (see FIG. 50 (A38)).

Next, after the white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 50 (A39)), as the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the fixed decorative symbols of combinations that are not jackpots are displayed temporarily, and the ally It is reported that the character has lost the battle of the enemy character (FIG. 50 (A40)).Furthermore, after it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled, the background image returns to the first background image and the combination that is not a jackpot is announced. The determined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 50 (A41)).

(Flow of production in Super Reach β)
Next, the flow of performance in super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach β. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the flow of performance in super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when variable display of symbols based on the variation pattern of super reach β starts, the first background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, background change effect B is started. Specifically, when background change effect B is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the lower left of the crack precursor image. As a result, after the crack precursor image is displayed in a crack mode (see FIG. 51 (B2)), two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image, so that the crack mode of the crack precursor image is changed in stages. (see FIG. 51 (B3)), and if a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image instead of the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered. (See Figure 51 (B4)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 51 (B5)).

After the background change effect A is finished, the variable display is executed again, and after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 51 (B6)), in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, By temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern having the same number as the temporarily displayed decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach mode (see FIG. 51 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the background change effect B ends, a pseudo continuous effect is started. Specifically, in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, the pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating that the re-variable display is to be started is displayed at a reduced speed before the stop display position (Fig. 51 ( (See B8).

Next, after the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 51 (B9)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and one of the crack precursor images is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack (see FIG. 51 (B10)), the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position above the display screen) In response to the motion of falling to a presentation position that overlaps the approximate center position of the screen), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (Fig. 51 (See (B11)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a character image such as "x2" indicating the number of re-variable displays is displayed, and then variable display resumes (see Figure 51 (B12) to (B13)) .

In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo-continuation notice is not executed, the pseudo-continuation pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative pattern with the number one larger than the number is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result of the error is displayed (see FIG. 51 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-continuous performance of a triple pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern on which the characters "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous performance are displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C is displayed. Deceleration is displayed before the stop display position (see FIG. 51 (B14)). After the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 51 (B15)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a part of the crack precursor image is displayed. After the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack (see FIG. 51 (B16)), the movable body 32 moves (for example, when the movable body 32 moves from the origin position above the display screen to In response to the motion of falling to a production position that overlaps the approximately central position, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack production is performed in which a plurality of fragment images are scattered (FIG. 51 (B17) )reference). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, a character image such as "x3" indicating the number of re-variable displays is displayed, and then variable display resumes (see Figure 52 (B18) to (B19)) .

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo-continuous presentation of a two-part pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo-continuous presentation of a three-part pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is It is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 52 (B20)), and the decoration symbol with the same number as the decoration symbol temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decoration symbol display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decoration symbol display area 5R, and it becomes N reach ( (See FIG. 52 (B21)), the N reach effect is started.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the N reach performance, the weak development performance is started. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 52 (B22)), the character image moves (for example, the character moves toward the front of the display screen and touches the glass plate). A crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the punching action) (see Figure 52 (B23)), and a crack replaces the crack precursor image without a crack being displayed in a part of the crack precursor image. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the target image is broken and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 52 (B24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling showdown between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see (B25) to (B26) in FIG. 52).

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B is started. Specifically, when strong development effect B is started, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack is displayed in a part of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in the form of a crack. After being displayed (see FIG. 52 (B27)), a crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the crack target image, which replaces the crack precursor image, is cracked and a plurality of fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 52 (B28)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. As the transmittance of the white-out image increases, the development symbol with the word "Development" displayed in the inner decoration symbol display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 52 (B29)), and then the reach title image is displayed. is displayed, and strong S reach effect B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 52 (B30)). Note that the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with higher expectations than the strong S reach effect A. Furthermore, since the strong S reach effect B is an S reach effect with a higher degree of expectation than the strong S reach effect A, the cut-in effect described later is more likely to be executed in the effect pattern Y. In other words, in the strong S reach effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 described later is more likely to be displayed than in the strong S reach effect A.

Strong S Reach Effect B is almost the same as Super Reach α's Strong S Reach Effect A, except that the types of enemy characters etc. are different, so a detailed explanation of the flow until the end of the variable display will be omitted hereafter. .

(Examples of various effects)
Next, an example of the operation of the breaking effect in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained based on FIGS. 53 to 69.

In addition, an example of the expression showing the display mode used in the following explanation will be explained.

"Fade-out display" is a display that increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes, whereas "fade-in display" increases the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image as time passes. This is a display that decreases the transparency (transparency).

"Animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (video display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the previous image. , the visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the previous image. In other words, "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarging display", "reducing display", "frame-in display" and "frame-out display", but also " It also includes displays such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" that do not involve displacement of the image but change the display mode such as color tone. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Static display" is the opposite of animation display, and is a non-dynamic display (still image) that does not change the display mode at all by not changing the visibility of the image compared to the previous image. display).

As shown in FIGS. 53 to 69, when the gaming state is the low base state, the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R (for the low base state) are circular numbers when viewed from the front. A pedestal, a numeric display section consisting of numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the numeric pedestal section, and 10 types of characters corresponding to each number "0" to "9" on the numeric display section. (all characters are omitted) is displayed, a rectangular information pedestal in front view, and information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information pedestal. It is composed of an information display section, and a substantially rectangular pedestal display section that is displayed so as to surround the number display section, character display section, and information display section (see FIG. 1, etc.).

Although a detailed explanation will not be provided, when the gaming state is in the high base state or in other production modes, decorative symbols whose display mode is different from the decorative symbols for the low base state described above are displayed in each decorative symbol display area. It may be possible to variably display 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, as a variable display mode of the decorative symbols for the low base state, a mode in which the decorative symbols are vertically scrolled from the top to the bottom of the display screen has been exemplified, but other variable display modes may also be used. The variable display mode may be different depending on the presentation mode.

In the display area 5S provided at the upper left of the image display device 5, the first pending storage number, the second pending storage number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern are displayed. The small symbols are composed of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but the numbers of both patterns do not necessarily have to correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern correspond to the numbers of the small pattern. It may be a number from 1 to 5, which is smaller than the numbers from 0 to 9, or it may be a symbol or figure different from the numbers of the decorative design.

The special figure pending storage display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 includes a first pending display 006SG101 (see FIG. 102) and a second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending. ) is displayed, and in the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen, an active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. Incidentally, these first pending memory number, second pending memory number, small symbol, special symbol pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common in all production modes.

<First continuous cracking performance and second continuous cracking performance>
Details of the operation examples of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect will be explained based on FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the first continuous crack effect. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the second continuous crack effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), when the gaming state is the normal state, a second When the continuous crack effect is started, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed at a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying the cracks so as to spread radially from the glass plate image 006SG301. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 53(B)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, the second continuous cracking effect starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image which is the normal background image for the time saving state/probability variable state, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner by displaying the cracks so as to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are 1 visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed at the 2nd visibility, which is lower than the 1st visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed more conspicuously. be done.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken ( The glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken manner), and a cracking effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 53(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 53(D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the whiteout image becomes visible. The display of 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 53(E)).

Thereafter, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314 that are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished. After being displayed (see FIG. 53(F)), the glass plate image 006SG301A, character image 006SG305, and background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see FIG. 53(G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed in the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range) In this case, the first visibility is displayed with higher visibility than the second visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the second continuous cracking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect except for the different types of characters that appear, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. do. In addition, in this embodiment, the example of the operation of the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect was illustrated as being almost the same, but the example of the operation of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect is May be different.

For example, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, the cracking pattern is a common cracking pattern D, and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction is the same. Then, in Fig. 53(B), the crack is displayed on the right side, while in Fig. 54(B), the crack is displayed on the left side, so that when the crack starts, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The position at which the display starts may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect.

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image Depending on the display mode, it may be suggested which of the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect is to be executed. Furthermore, the cracking patterns may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect. In particular, regarding the second continuous cracking effect, the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

Furthermore, it is possible to output the character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect and the character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect, and both of them crack at the display timing of the whiteout image 006SG303. The character voice may be output together with the sound, the character voice may be output after the cracking sound is output at the display timing of the whiteout image 006SG303, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited. good.

<Speech preview production>
The details of the operation example of the dialogue preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating details of an example of the operation of the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 55(A), when the dialogue preview effect is started while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, a higher level than the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. The operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 55(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation promotion image 006SG310 is hidden, and a layer higher than the first background image 006SG081 is displayed. A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the 4-image drawing area, and cracks are displayed radially spreading from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, indicating that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 55(C)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken. A crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 55(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 55(E)), and the transmittance reaches 100%. The display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 55(F)).

After that, in the crack display area 006SG304 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the broken image 006SG302 is finished, the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A displays the message ``Chance!'' which indicates the expectation of a jackpot! ?" character image 006SG306 and a serif background image 006SG087 serving as its background are displayed (see FIG. 55(F)). Here, the serif background image 006SG087 and character image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the second visibility displayed in the area other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301 is 1 background image 006SG081 is displayed with a second visibility that is lower in visibility than the first visibility. In other words, since the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, it becomes easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the serif background image 006SG087, and the character image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 55(H)).

In addition, in FIG. 55(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack is placed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, in a layer image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301). Depending on the display mode of the effect image, it may be suggested which of the dialogue character images 006SG306 such as "Chance!?", "Hot!", and "Super Hot!" will be displayed. In addition, the cracking pattern may be different depending on the type of serif character (such as the display amount of the fragment image 006SG302. Especially when displaying "Super Hot!", the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in slow motion to increase the attention level). ), and while using a common crack pattern, the location of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the closer to the center) and the range of the crack (for example, the higher the expectation, the wider the crack). You can change it. Furthermore, character voices corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305 may be output, and both may be output with a cracking sound at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303, or the crackling sound may be output at the display timing of whiteout image 006SG303. The character voice may be output after the character voice is output, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Background change effect A>
Details of the operation example of background change effect A will be explained based on FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect A. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change effect A.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), when the gaming state is the normal state, the background change effect A starts when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and after being gradually enlarged (see FIGS. 56(B) and (C)), the effect image 006SG320 fades out. The character image 006SG305 is displayed (see FIG. 56(D)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, if the background change effect A is started while the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the time saving state Effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image which is the normal background image for the state/probability change state, and after being gradually enlarged and displayed, effect image 006SG320 is faded out and character image 006SG305 is displayed. is displayed.

Note that the effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 56(B) is an effect that stimulates whether or not the character image 006SG305 is displayed in FIG. 56(D), and in the case of a successful pattern, it is shown in FIG. In the case of a failure pattern, the transition does not proceed to FIG. 56C, and the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size and then hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 is not displayed.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed on the near side. After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the pre-crack mode, a crack is displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301 in response to the kicking motion towards the glass plate image 006SG301. (See FIG. 56(E)), the crack gradually spreads radially and changes into a cracked state (see FIG. 56(F)). Furthermore, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are , when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. By displaying, the crack aspect is displayed conspicuously. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, the character image 006SG305 is displayed. In response to the kicking motion toward the front side, cracks are displayed radially expanding from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack mode. After that, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a cracked state. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the 6th background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are: When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. As a result, the cracks are displayed more conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 56(G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIGS. 56(H) and 57(I)). Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 57(J)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 57(K)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, it is possible to naturally notice that the first background image 006SG081 has changed to the second background image 006SG082. Therefore, background changes can be shown without any discomfort. In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and is replaced by the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the displayed glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time saving state/probability change state, becomes higher. Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, it is possible to make it look natural that the sixth background image has changed to the seventh background image. Therefore, background changes can be made to look natural.

Furthermore, for example, it is possible to display a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082, and depending on the movement mode (actions such as punching and kicking) of the character image 006SG305. It may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed. Further, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image is displayed.

<Background change effect B>
The details of the operation example of background change effect B will be explained based on FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of background change effect B.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), when background change effect B is started while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first background image 006SG081 A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the upper layer 4 image drawing area, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small crack areas is displayed at the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner (see FIG. 58(B)). Thereafter, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed at the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, and the crack aspect of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes in stages (see FIG. 58(C)). ).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are created when the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. When it is not displayed, it is displayed in the first visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility. As a result, the crack appearance is displayed conspicuously.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed to fall downward from the portion where the crack is displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 58(C), the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 is While being displayed with the second visibility, each crack display area 006SG324 is displayed with the first visibility, which is higher in visibility than the second visibility. In other words, the visibility is different between the unbroken area and the part visible through the broken area, making it easier to recognize that a part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, is broken and the layer A crack effect is performed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the 5-image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 58(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 58(E)). Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 58(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 58(G)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, it is possible to naturally notice that the first background image 006SG081 has changed to the second background image 006SG082. Therefore, background changes can be shown without any discomfort.

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image The expected level of development of the production may be suggested by the display mode. Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is easy to finish at the first stage (see FIG. 58(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, it is easy to finish at the second stage (see FIG. 58(C)). (see), and in the case of red, it is preferable that it is most likely to develop into a cracking effect compared to blue or green. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75(B), when failure pattern 1 ends at the first stage, the transmittance gradually increases and becomes invisible (fade-out display) when 1500 ms elapses from the start of background change effect B. As shown in FIG. 75(C), when ending at the second stage in failure pattern 2, the transmittance may gradually increase and become hidden after 3000 ms have elapsed from the start of background change effect B.

In addition, while background change effect B is being executed, change effects for active display and pending display, which are images displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than glass plate image 006SG301, are restricted, while glass plate image 006SG301 It may also be possible not to limit the effect using images (for example, mini-character images, etc.) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the layer image drawing area. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the cracking effect.

<Pseudo continuous performance>
The details of the operation example of the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained based on FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating details of a partial operation example of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), after the pseudo-continuous effect has started, the pseudo-continuous pattern with the characters "NEXT" displayed indicating that the re-variable display is to be started is displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C. When temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed from the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301. By displaying the cracks so as to spread radially, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. In addition, the decorative designs displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are not displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed. While it is displayed in the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the cracks are more noticeable. is displayed (see FIG. 59(B)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the motion of the movable body 32 to fall from the origin position to the production position is started, and in response to this motion, a whiteout image is created at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area. After 006SG303 is displayed (see FIG. 59(C)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the surrounding area, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the start of the cracking effect (see FIG. 59(C)). (See D). In addition, along with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a glass plate image is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of 006SG301A is cracked and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image that is displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area at the beginning of display. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 59(E)). When the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the production position in the layer 6 image drawing area which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The motion effect image 006SG321 is displayed to spread from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area to spread from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (FIG. 59(F) ), see (G)).

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 has been displayed, the movable body 32 starts moving from the production position to the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is being displayed (see FIG. 59(G)). After all the fragment images 006SG302 are hidden, they are stopped at the presentation position, and the return operation to the origin position is completed (see FIG. 59(H)).

Note that even if the operation of returning the movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position to the origin position is started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished and then after the display of the background effect image 006SG322 is finished. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo-continuous display and variable display is started again, but the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first variable display The display color of the plate image 006SG301 is blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display is green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display is red. The display mode of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be made to be different. Further, for example, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be made to be different, such as the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 gradually becoming larger each time variable display is performed again.

Further, in this case, although the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times of re-variable display, it is preferable that the crack pattern is the same. In this way, by making the cracking pattern common in gaming machines that perform various breaking effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo continuous effect has been executed. In addition, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common for the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, for example, the first re-variable display and the second re-variable display The display mode of the crack pattern may be made different between the variable display and the third re-variable display, such as the size of the fragment images 006SG302 being different, the number of displayed fragment images 006SG302 being different, and the moving speed of the fragment images 006SG302 being different. .

<Reach suggestion production>
Details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect will be explained based on FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), when the reach suggestion effect is started while variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, the left ornamental symbol display area 5L is displayed as a decorative symbol. After the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 60(B)), the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 60(C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and the character image 006SG305 hits the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a gavel. Accordingly, a crack is displayed on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first crack mode, and an operation is performed in the layer 6 image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Effect image 006SG323 is displayed (see FIG. 60(D)).

Next, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a gavel, a crack is displayed on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby changing the glass plate image 006SG301 into the second crack mode. At the same time, the motion effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 60(E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the center ornament display area 5C with the gavel (see FIG. 60(F)), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area. After that (see FIG. 60(G)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the surrounding area, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 60(H)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 60(D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A falls downward from the part where the crack is displayed. After being displayed, it will frame out and disappear. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(H), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Next, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, the fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 becomes higher (see FIG. 61(I)). Then, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and the ornamental symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see FIG. 61). J)), the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 61(K)).

In addition, in various performances accompanied by a cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of FIGS. After the display is resolved and hidden, the performance progresses (for example, progresses from a reach-suggesting performance with a cracking performance to a reach-suggesting performance without a cracking performance).

For example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the effect image The expected degree of reach development may be suggested by the display mode. Specifically, when there are blue and red display modes for the effect image, it is sufficient that the reach is more likely to be achieved when the effect image is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

In addition, in the case of a failure pattern, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the centerpiece design display area 5C with a gavel (see FIGS. 60(G) and (H)). , a disappointed character image 006SG305 is displayed in the area corresponding to the center decoration pattern display area 5C, and then the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are hidden, and the missing pattern stops. The variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
The details of the operation example of the weak development effect will be explained based on FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the weak development effect.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state/variable probability state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is in the reach mode. When the weak development effect is started, the background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the character image 006SG305 is displayed at the approximate center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it. After (see FIG. 62(B)), after the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while being enlarged as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 62(C)) . The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are moved to the upper right position of the display screen and displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, and then the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started (see FIG. 62(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 becomes higher (see FIG. 62(E)). After the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 62(F)), when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 62(F)). 62(G)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the transition to the weak S reach effect occurs (see FIG. 62(H)). In addition, when the gaming state is the time saving state/variable probability state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken without being displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 becomes higher. Then, after the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the whiteout image 006SG303 was displayed, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the process shifts to the weak S reach effect. In addition, in FIGS. 71 and 84 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is not transparent, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect is non-transparent. is displayed in a transparent mode (for example, transmittance of 70% or more) in FIGS. 90 (B1) to (B3), which will be described later, and then in FIGS. 90 (B4) and (B5). (for example, the transmittance is less than 10%). That is, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 90 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent manner, and at the second timing, corresponding to FIG. 90 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent manner. can do.

In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the N reach effect develops into the weak S reach effect, it is possible to naturally show that the N reach effect image has changed to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088. Therefore, changes in the production can be seen without any discomfort.

<Strong development performance A>
The details of the operation example of strong development effect A will be explained based on FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing details of a part of the operation example of strong development effect A.

As shown in FIG. 63(A), in the weak S reach effect, the development symbol with the word "development" displayed is temporarily stopped, and when the strong development effect A is started, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position. At the same time as the action of falling to the production position is started, when this falling action is started, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 begins to fall (Fig. 63(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect is started.

In addition, when the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position as a preliminary performance before the cracking performance, and the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the layer 5 image drawing area higher than the weak S reach performance image 006SG088 , the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a plurality of pieces larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect is performed in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters (see FIG. 63(C)).

Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) in the layer 7 image drawing area, and here, it is transparent until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Since the ratio remains at 0%, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 63(C)). Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 63(D)). Next, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends with the transmittance reaching 100%, it is emphasized that the movable body 32 has moved to the production position in the layer 6 image drawing area which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. The motion effect image 006SG325 for this purpose is displayed so as to spread from the movable body 32 to the surroundings, and the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area so as to spread from the movable body 32 to the surroundings (FIG. 63(E) )reference).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes hidden, the movable body 32 starts an operation of moving from the presentation position to the origin position (see FIG. 63(F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position is completed, the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, and the strong S reach effect develops (see FIG. 63(G)).

<Strong development performance B>
The details of the operation example of strong development effect B will be explained based on FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of strong development effect B. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of strong development effect B.

As shown in FIG. 64(A), when the strong development effect B is started when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the weak S reach effect, the layer 4 image higher than the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 A glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the drawing area, and a crack is displayed radially extending from the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. (See FIG. 64(B)). In addition, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the first visibility, but when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the crack appearance is noticeable. It will be displayed as follows.

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, after the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 64(C)), the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 covers the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed (see FIG. 64(D)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 64(D), at the timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. A crack effect is performed in which the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. be done. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 64(E)). Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and the decorative pattern in which the developed pattern with the word "development" displayed is temporarily stopped is displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. After that (see FIG. 64(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 64(G)).

Next, after the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed at approximately the center position in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 64(H)), the white-out image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the white-out image 006SG303 covers the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time. is displayed, and the developed pattern is hidden (see FIG. 65(I)). Then, as the transmittance gradually increases with the passage of time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach effect becomes higher (see FIGS. 65(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing the cracking effect when the weak S reach effect develops into the strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has been broken and changed to the reach title image 006SG326. Therefore, changes in reach performance can be shown without any discomfort.

<Cut-in production>
The details of the operation example of the cut-in effect will be explained based on FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 66(A), when the cut-in effect is started when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the strong S reach effect, the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect is The operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area (see FIG. 66(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084. The glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked manner, but the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect is performed. In addition, the operation promotion image 006SG310 is displayed in a state where the button is pressed by the operation, and the operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, which is enlarged and displayed as time passes (FIG. 66(C), (See (D)).

Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 66(C)). Note that the operation promotion image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the whiteout image 006SG303, so the first visibility is the same as when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed. It is displayed while maintaining the first visibility.

Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible (see FIG. 66(D)), and the operation promotion image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 become hidden. , "Heat!!" character image 006SG307 becomes visible (see FIG. 66(E)), and after the display of whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 66(F)). ), the fragment image 006SG302 is hidden (see FIG. 66(G)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance patterns X and Y of the cut-in performance are both described as performance patterns with a breaking performance, but as the performance pattern of the cut-in performance, the performance pattern Y with high expectation of jackpot is used as a performance pattern with a high probability of winning. A chance performance pattern with a performance may be used, and the performance pattern The effect may be performed in such a manner that a cut-in image (not shown) is displayed.

<Result notification performance (jackpot)>
Details of an example of the operation of the result notification performance (jackpot) will be explained based on FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 67(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and a result notification effect is started. Then, the operation speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the character image 006SG305 is displayed in slow motion while fading out, and then a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed over the entire display screen (see FIG. 67(B)). ).

Next, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot display result, after the object image 006SG308 in which the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 67(C)), the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the predetermined production position. The glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308 in accordance with this falling movement. The glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack by displaying the crack so as to spread downward from the movable body 32. Further, the object image 006SG308 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while the glass plate image When 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed conspicuously (see FIG. 67(D)).

Furthermore, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the form of a crack, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then disappears. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the whiteout image 006SG303 starts to be displayed at a position near the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 67(E)), and a return-to-origin operation is performed in which the movable body 32 rises from the predetermined presentation position to the origin position. In response to the start of the whiteout image 006SG303, the whiteout image 006SG303 expands downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 67(F)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 67(F), at the timing when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden and the corresponding Instead of the glass plate image 006SG301, the entire area of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a plurality of pieces larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A cracking effect in which the fragment image 006SG302 scatters is executed. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302. Then, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 67(G)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends when the transmittance reaches 100%, and after the fifth background image 006SG085 and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 67(H)), the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. The display of is completed, the jackpot game state is notified (see FIG. 68(I)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the determined decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed ( (See Figure 68(J)).

Furthermore, after the cracking effect is started in response to the start of the upward movement for the movable body 32 to return to its origin, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible. By completing the rising motion of the movable body 32 to return from the predetermined performance position to the origin position before the end (becoming non-display), it is possible to quickly notify that a jackpot has been achieved.

<Result notification performance (missing)>
The details of the operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be explained based on FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a failure.

As shown in FIG. 69(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of the cut-in effect, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and a result notification effect is started. Then, the operation speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the character image 006SG305 is displayed in slow motion while fading out, and then a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed over the entire display screen (see FIG. 69(B)). ).

Next, when the variable display result is an off display result, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period in the layer 7 image drawing area without moving the movable body 32 (FIG. 69(C) reference). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305.

Thereafter, a glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, and cracks are displayed radially spreading from the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301. As a result, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are 1 visibility, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it is displayed at the 2nd visibility, which is lower than the 1st visibility, so that the crack aspect is displayed more conspicuously. (See FIG. 69(D)).

Further, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed falling downward from the portion where the crack is displayed, and then goes out of frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or in the layer 4 image drawing area.

In this way, although the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state was maintained and the cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301 was broken was not performed, so that it was possible that the jackpot game state was not controlled. be notified.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked manner, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again in the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 69(E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed. After being displayed (see FIG. 69(F)), the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the determined decorative symbols of combinations that are not jackpots are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69(G)).

(Details of performance)
Next, a detailed explanation will be given of each effect that can be executed in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 72, FIG. 53, and FIG. is displayed (first stage crack display period). Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect of the present embodiment, in the initial whiteout display period of 400 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot see the broken pieces. It is now impossible to visually recognize 006SG302. On the other hand, during 600 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, and the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player.

Furthermore, from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area of the crack effect) (second stage crack display). period). Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have transparency, and other images ( For example, background images, etc.) are visible to the player.

In addition, in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R over the above-mentioned crack display period of 500 ms, and the glass plate For 1000 ms from the cracking timing of the image 006SG301A, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (cracking sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are common between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, but in the first continuous cracking effect, the types of cracking effect sounds shown in Fig. 53 (E ) is output, and in the second continuous crack effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character shown in FIG. 54(E) is output together with the crack effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first continuous crack effect and the second continuous crack effect. Furthermore, the crack effect sound has a louder volume than the crack effect sound and is a sound that is easily recognized by the player, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output at an even higher volume than the crack effect sound, Moreover, since the output period is longer than that of the crack effect sound, the sound is more easily recognized by the player than the crack effect sound.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 800ms) for 800ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for normal background images again, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). be exposed. In addition, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 800ms) causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 400ms corresponding to the early period of whiteout display, and for 400ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to alternately emit white light at high brightness and low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 73, and FIG. 55, as a dialogue preview performance, first, as an operation promotion performance, an operation promotion that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (operation promotion performance execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, the first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from the timing (1st stage crack display period). Next, when it comes time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that was displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period ). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the speech preview performance of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. It becomes. On the other hand, during 600 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a second stage crack is displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area of the crack effect). Incidentally, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue preview performance have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be played through these fragment images 006SG302. person is visible.

In addition, in the dialogue preview production, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period of the first stage described above (crack sound output period). For 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (breaking effect sound output period). In addition, the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound that are output are common between the dialogue preview performance, the first continuous cracking performance, and the second continuous cracking performance, and the cracking performance sound was output in the dialogue preview performance. Afterwards (when the crack effect sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of character image 006SG306 is output. This can prevent dialogue voice sounds from becoming difficult to hear due to cracking effect sounds.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 800ms) for 800ms from the cracking timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for normal background images again, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). be exposed.

As shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 74(A), FIG. 74(B), FIG. 56, and FIG. is displayed, and an image in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (preliminary operation period). A crack is displayed for 2000 ms from the end timing of the preceding action (action of the character) (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 74(B), the crack display period of 2000 ms consists of a 1000 ms pre-crack display period and a 1000 ms post-crack display period after the pre-crack display period. . In the pre-crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the pre-crack display period, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed at that timing is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 57) reference). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, for 2000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible for the player to view.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background (images, etc.) can be viewed by the player.

In addition, in the background change effect A in the success pattern, a cracking sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the crack pre-display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack. Along with the sound output period), a character voice corresponding to the action of the character is output, and for 2500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Cracked production sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in background change effect A is a sound exclusively for background change effect A, and includes the sound effect of glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. It is a sound composed of the following, and a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is output for 1000ms out of the 2500ms output period along with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. After that, a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image is continuously output for 1500 ms. Furthermore, although the output period of the crack sound is set to 500 ms, it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or the sound may be output in accordance with the progress of the crack over 2000 ms. Furthermore, overlapping with the cracking sound, a motion effect sound is output for a period of 100 ms corresponding to the motion effect display period. The motion effect sound is a sound that is output at a louder volume than the cracking sound, and the cracking sound is difficult to hear when the motion effect sound is output, but since the output period is shorter than the cracking sound, the motion effect sound is It becomes possible to hear the cracking sound after the output.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image light emission data table until the start timing of the crack display period, the light emission is white in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). The light emission data for the crack display period mainly causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light for 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display period to the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A. By using the table, light is emitted in a manner that corresponds to the displayed crack. Furthermore, by using the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) for 1000 ms from the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, the white color is displayed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect. Light emission is mainly performed. In addition, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for chance background image, the white light emission is mainly performed in the manner according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). Light emission is performed without In addition, the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the early period of whiteout display, and for 500ms corresponding to the latter period of whiteout display. This is a data table for causing the game effect lamp 9 to alternately emit white light at high brightness and low brightness. Although an example has been described in which a light emission data table for a normal background image is used in the pre-stage operation period, the present invention is not limited to this. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using the light emission data table. In this case, until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in FIG. 56(D), but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. By doing this, there will be a sharp difference between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, so that the background change effect A is produced. The effect can be further enhanced. The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for crack display period White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 74(C), in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary operation. That is, in the background change effect A in the failure pattern, since the character is not displayed, the crack effect is not executed, and therefore the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is continued. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 56(B) and (C), although the character is displayed or not, neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. An image emission data table is used.

As shown in FIGS. 70, 75(A), and 58, as the background change effect B of the successful pattern, first, a crack in the first stage is displayed for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5. (1st stage crack display period). In the first-stage crack display period, from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. be done.

Further, from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, the second stage crack is displayed in a wider area in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms than in the first stage crack display period. (2nd stage crack display period). In addition, even in the second stage crack display period, from the start timing of the second stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, is displayed for 200 ms. will be displayed. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in the first-stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the second-stage crack display period have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. While each small pod fragment image is designed to have a different size and number, the value of the "gravity" parameter is the same, so they are commonly displayed in a downward frame-out. It has become.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that had been displayed at that timing is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (FIG. 58) reference). Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the background change effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, during 750 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Incidentally, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect B in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background (images, etc.) can be viewed by the player.

In addition, in the background change production B in the success pattern, the first stage crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start timing of the first stage crack display period in accordance with the display of the crack. (1st stage cracking sound output period), the speakers 8L and 8R output the second cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack for 500ms from the start timing of the second crack display period (2nd stage cracking sound output period). For 150 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (the cracking effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in background change effect B is a sound exclusively for background change effect B, and includes the sound effect of glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. It is a sound composed of the following, and a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is output for 1000ms out of the 1250ms output period along with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken. After that, a sound effect notifying that the background image has been switched to the chance background image is continuously output for 250 ms. In addition, the volume related to cracking in background change effect B is that the cracking effect sound is the loudest, and the volume may be the same for the 1st stage cracking sound and the 2nd stage cracking sound, or the volume of the 2nd stage cracking sound may be the same. may be made louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 can be performed in a manner according to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed, and by using the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, Light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner according to the crack effect. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, by using the light emission data table for chance background image, light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). .

As shown in FIG. 75(B) and FIG. 75(C), the background change effect B in failure pattern 1 is a crack in the first stage for 1500 ms and a crack in the outer first stage for 200 ms. Although the small fragment image corresponding to the failure pattern 2 is displayed, the second stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not broken. The first stage crack and a small fragment image are displayed for 200ms, and the second stage crack is displayed for 1500ms from the timing when 1500ms has elapsed in the first stage crack display period, and the second stage crack is displayed for 200ms. Although a small fragment image corresponding to the crack is displayed, the effect pattern is such that the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In the background change effect B with these failure patterns, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 76, and FIG. 59, as a pseudo-continuous effect, first, in the display area of the image display device 5, a "left" decorative pattern, a "right" decorative pattern, and a "middle" decorative pattern are displayed. Temporarily stop in this order. Then, a crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern which is the "medium" decorative pattern (crack display period). During the crack display period, a falling operation of the movable body 32 is performed for 1500 ms as a preliminary operation (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms have elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. It should be noted that the cracks in the crack display period of the pseudo continuous effect and the cracks in the crack display period of the background change effect A are designed to occur in different ways. For example, the crack in the background change effect A is displayed in such a manner that the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301 progresses step by step over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period. The cracks are displayed in such a manner that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It becomes. On the other hand, in 500 ms of the latter period of whiteout display, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player, which is a period in which the fragment image 006SG302 can be visually recognized. Additionally, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible.

Incidentally, for 3000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speakers 8L and 8R output a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect (breaking effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the pseudo continuous effect is a sound exclusively for the pseudo continuous effect, and includes the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the movement effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32. This is a composed sound, and the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is output for 1000 ms out of the 3000 ms output period, as well as the sound effect of the movement effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32, and then for 2000 ms. The sound effect of the motion effect corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 is continuously output. Thereafter, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, that is, the end timing of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rising period).

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image until the crack display start timing, the light emission from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background Light emission other than white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the image (second background image 006SG082), and for 2000 ms from the start timing of crack display to the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A, it is used for crack display. By using the light emission data table, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the crack display. Then, for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period, by using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), the white color is displayed in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect. Light emission is mainly performed. After the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, for 2000 ms, by using the light emission data table for pseudo continuous effect corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous effect has been executed, the mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect is used. The light is emitted. For example, when executing the first pseudo continuous effect, the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in green according to the execution of the first pseudo continuous effect, and when the second pseudo continuous effect is executed, the second pseudo continuous effect is emitted. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit red light in accordance with the execution of the performance. After the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous effect, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081 ) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for crack display period White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect in this embodiment have different crack display periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the length of the crack display period may be the same in the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 77(A), FIG. 60, and FIG. 61, as a reach suggestion effect of a successful pattern, first, as a preliminary action, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the character is an image that acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image that acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image that acts on the "middle" decorative pattern in the glass plate image 006SG301. The images that act on the display area 5C are displayed in sequence over 10,000 ms (first-stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed for 8000 ms in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L ( Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, a crack is displayed for 4000 ms in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. (right crack display period).

Among these, during the left crack display period, from the start timing of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and the glass plate A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A movement effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100ms around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and a small image smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. The fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. The small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment image 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R are different from each other as shown in FIG. Because the values of the parameters of "strength" and "repetition" are different, the speed of scattering and the size and number of each small fragment image are designed to be different, but the value of the parameter of "gravity" is the same. Because of this, they are commonly displayed in a downward frame.

When the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the pre-stage operation period and the pre-stage operation period ends, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed at that timing becomes the normal reach background corresponding to the normal reach effect. The image will be updated. Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the reach suggestion effect of the success pattern of this embodiment, the player is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303 and visually recognizes the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. has become impossible. On the other hand, during 1500 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Furthermore, from the end of the latter half of the white-out display period, the highlighted display of the decorative symbols will be increased to 3000 ms to notify the player that the player has reached a reach, for example by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols. This is carried out over a period of time (decorative pattern highlighting period).

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the reach suggestion performance in the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. etc.) are visible to the player.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance in the success pattern, a left crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack (left crack display period). Along with the cracking sound output period), the first character voice corresponding to the first action of the character is output, and the right sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500ms from the start timing of the above-mentioned right crack display period. At the same time as the cracking sound is output (right cracking sound output period), the second character voice corresponding to the second action of the character is output, and for 2000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the speaker 8L , 8R, the crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output (break effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestion production (success pattern) is a sound exclusively for the reach suggestion production, and the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken and the temporary enlargement of the decorative pattern are used to indicate the reach. This is a sound that includes a sound effect of emphasizing the decorative pattern to notify the player that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 1000ms out of the 3000ms output period. The highlighted sound effect is output together with the cracked sound effect, and then the highlighted sound effect is continuously output for 2000 ms. Thereafter, after the output period of the crack effect sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image will be output. Furthermore, when the action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, the sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is produced in the decorative pattern display area 5L where the action effect is on the "left". It is designed to be used both when displayed around the periphery and when displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is controlled by using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the light emission data table for the chance background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. Alternatively, light emission other than white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and within 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter period. By using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms), light emission mainly consisting of white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect. After the light emission in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in the reach-suggesting performance in the failure pattern, as a preliminary operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the character is displayed in the decorative pattern display area on the "left". 5L, an image that acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image that acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C are sequentially displayed for 14000 ms (first stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, a crack is displayed for 12000 ms in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L (left crack display period). Furthermore, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, a crack is displayed for 8000 ms in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R (right crack display period).

Among these, during the left crack display period, from the start timing of the left crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and the glass plate A small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the image 006SG301A is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start timing of the right crack display period, A movement effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed for 100ms around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and a small image smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. The fragment image 006SG302A is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302 in the failure pattern is displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment image 006SG302 in the success pattern, so the scattering speed of the small fragment image 006SG302 and the size and number of each small fragment image are different. Since the player cannot determine whether the pattern is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the pattern, it is possible to incite whether or not the normal reach is executed appropriately.

In addition, in the failure pattern reach suggestion performance, a left crack sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above in accordance with the display of the crack (left crack Right crack sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period (sound output period) in accordance with the display of the crack (right crack sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggestion performance of the successful pattern (timing 10000 has elapsed from the start of the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern), the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000 ms. (whiteout display period). The white-out display period is a period in which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are rendered invisible to the player by displaying the white-out image 006SG303. Furthermore, when the motion effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, the sound effect corresponding to the motion effect is output. It is designed to be used both when displayed around the periphery and when displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In addition, in the reach suggestion effect of the failure pattern, until the start timing of the whiteout display period, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) using the light emission data table for normal background images or chance background images or the chance background image After light emission is executed in a manner according to the display of the second background image 006SG082, during the whiteout display period, white light is emitted in a manner according to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the whiteout light emission data table. Light emission mainly involves light emission. Then, from the end of the white-out display period, the failure notification light emission data table is used to emit white light in a manner corresponding to the notification that there is no reach (that the reach suggestion effect is a failure pattern). The main light emission is performed. Incidentally, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach is not reached (that the reach suggesting performance is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display is stopped. Note that the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), the light emission data table for whiteout, and the light emission data table for failure notification are all light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light emission. , White light emission based on the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white emission and low-intensity white emission, whereas for whiteout White light emission based on the light emission data table and the failure notification light emission data table is executed without including a blinking pattern. Further, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the failure notification light emission data table (until the variable display ends by stopping the variable display), no effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 71, 78, and 62, in the weak development effect, first, as a preliminary action, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The image acting on the central part is displayed for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). Although the pre-operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate pre-operation period (2000 ms) pattern is provided, and when it is suggested to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the pre-operation period (4000 ms) is set as 4000 ms. It may be determined at a high rate to execute the weak development effect using the pattern of the first stage operation period (2000 ms).

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of normal reach that had been displayed up to that point changes to the weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect. At the same time, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3500 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It becomes. On the other hand, during 3000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 comes to an end, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that had been displayed up to that point is updated to the super reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α. Ru.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect do not have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. The player is invisible. Although the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency, this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development effect does not have transparency during the fragment image display period. Out of a certain 3,500 ms, the display is displayed in a transparent mode for 1,500 ms after the display starts (e.g., transmittance of 70% or more), and then gradually becomes non-transparent for 1,000 ms. (eg, transmittance of 70% to 10%), and then displays in a non-transparent mode (eg, transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (break effect sound output period). In addition to the crack effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the crack timing. It should be noted that the crack effect sound has a higher volume than the weak development effect sound, so it is a sound that is easily recognized by the player.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the normal reach background image until the start timing of the pre-stage operation, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image. By using the light emission data table for weak development effects over the 4000ms from the start timing of the pre-stage operation to the breakage timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, light emission that is not mainly white light emission in a manner corresponding to the weak development effect is performed. is performed, and for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the whiteout display latter half period, by using the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms), it is displayed in a manner according to the cracking effect. The light emission is mainly white light emission, and for 2500 ms from the end of the whiteout display latter period to the end of the fragment image display period, the weak development effect is produced by using the light emitting table for weak development effect again. Light emission is performed in a manner depending on the situation. In addition, after the light emission in the mode corresponding to the cracking effect is completed, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs.

In addition, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5, the weak development effect background image is updated to the super reach The update to the reach α background image may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, when displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development effect background image to the super reach α background image in this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in accordance with the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light using the whiteout light emission data table. Note that the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed at a timing before the end of the fragment image display period (for example, 500 ms before the end), and in this case, the white-out image 006SG303 may be displayed before the fragment image display period is displayed frame-out. The display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will start at .

As shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 79, and FIG. 63, in the strong development performance A, first, as a pre-stage operation, the movable body 32 falls for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1000 ms have elapsed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α that had been displayed up to that point changes to the strong development effect A. The fragment image 006SG302 is updated to the strong development effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to , and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

Furthermore, from the timing of the fall of the movable body 32, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the fragment image 006SG302 described above from the player is displayed for 1500 ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display first half period is displayed. Whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 1500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. It is possible. On the other hand, in 500 ms of the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible to the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. It is visible to the player.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect A background image corresponding to the strong development effect A that had been displayed at that timing changes to the super reach β background image corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β. Updated. The movable body 32 that fell as a preliminary operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period described above, and the movable body 32 rises to the initial position for 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period. (moveable body rising period). Furthermore, from the start timing of the rise of the movable body 32 (the start timing of the movable body rise period), the sound corresponding to the strong development effect A (strong development effect A effect sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms. be exposed. Note that in the strong development effect A, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the crack effect unique to the strong development effect A. In addition, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output in the strong development effect A, and in this case, by setting the priority of the strong development effect A effect sound to be high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the timing of the fall of the movable body 32, the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a corresponding manner, and by using the light emission data table for strong development effect A for 2500 ms from the start timing of the fall of the movable body 32 to the end timing of the fragment image display period, Light emission that is not primarily white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to strong development effect A. From the start timing of the rise of the movable body 32 (the end timing of the fragment image display period), the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) can be displayed by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image. Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs in a corresponding manner.

In addition, in the strong development effect A of this embodiment, an example is given in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the initial period of whiteout display for 1500 ms from the falling timing of the movable body 32, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the whiteout display early period of the strong development effect A may be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A.

As shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 80, FIG. 64, and FIG. 65, as the strong development effect B, first, a crack appears in the display area of the image display device 5 for 1500 ms without the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character. is displayed (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the crack timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A in the strong development effect B and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion effect, etc. have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. Each one is designed to be different in size and number.

When 1500 ms passes and the crack display period ends, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. When the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach α that had been displayed up to that point now corresponds to the strong development effect B. Updated to strong development performance B. Furthermore, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). Therefore, in the strong development effect B of this embodiment, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302 during the initial whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. It is possible. On the other hand, for 2500 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized by the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. It is visible to the player. Further, the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B starts being displayed at a normal moving speed, a normal rotation speed, and a normal falling speed, and then is displayed in a slow motion mode.

Then, when the display end timing of the fragment image 006SG302 comes, the strong development effect B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development effect B that had been displayed up to that time corresponds to the reach effect of super reach β. It is updated to the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). In addition, in strong development effect B, a cracking sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start timing of the above crack display period (crack sound output period) according to the display of the crack, From the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken to the end timing of the fragment image display period, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the strong development effect B (strong development effect B effect sound) for 3000 ms. Note that in the strong development effect B, unlike the weak development effect and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the crack effect that is unique to the strong development effect B. Furthermore, in strong development effect B, the sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output. In this case, by setting the priority of the strong development effect B effect sound to be high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

Furthermore, with regard to the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image until the crack display start timing, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the display of the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088). By using the light emission data table for strong development effect B, the light emission data table for strong development effect B is used for 1500 ms from the start timing of crack display to the crack timing of glass plate image 006SG301A. Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to B, and light emission for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is performed for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the latter period of whiteout display. By using the data table, the light emission is mainly white light emission in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect, and the strong light emission is performed for 2000ms from the end timing of the late whiteout display period to the end timing of the fragment image display period. By using the light emission data table for advanced performance B, light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to strong development performance B. Furthermore, after the light emission is completed in the manner corresponding to the strong development effect B, by using the light emission data table for the super reach B background image, the manner corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is changed. Light emission other than mainly white light emission occurs.

In the strong development effect B of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. However, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image, the strong development effect B is displayed by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 on the image display device 5. The update from the background image to the super reach β background image may be difficult or impossible for the player to see. In addition, when the background image is updated from the strong development effect B background image to the super reach β background image in this way, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed according to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. The game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using a whiteout light emission data table. In this case, the light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for whiteout are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly of white light emission. White light emission based on the light emission data table for whiteout (1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high-intensity white light emission and low-intensity white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the white-out light emission data table Light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern. Further, although the crack display period of strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the crack timing. For example, cracks may be displayed so that they gradually expand at first, second, and third timings between the start timing of super reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 81, and FIG. 66, first, as a cut-in performance, an operation promotion performance that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image is displayed for 3000 ms (operation promotion performance execution period). In particular, the operation promotion image during the execution period of the operation promotion effect of this embodiment is displayed as a pre-operation mode image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation mode image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during execution of the operation promotion effect, or when the execution period of the operation promotion effect ends, this timing is displayed as the break timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. The broken glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, a suggestion image according to the production pattern is displayed until the end of the cut-in production (over 5000ms from the cracking timing), and the above-mentioned fragments are displayed for 500ms. After the white-out image 006SG303 for hiding the image 006SG302 from the player is displayed (white-out display early period), the white-out image 006SG303, which has a higher transmittance than the white-out display early period, is displayed for 500 ms. (later period of whiteout display). For this reason, in the cut-in effect of this embodiment, during the initial white-out display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is obstructed by the white-out image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestion image. has become impossible. On the other hand, for 2000 ms including the latter whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the fragmented image 006SG302 and the suggestion image are visible to the player as a period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible. Additionally, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect have transparency, and other images (for example, background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be played through these fragment images 006SG302. person is visible. Further, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect starts being displayed at a normal moving speed, a normal rotation speed, and a normal falling speed, and then is displayed in a slow motion mode.

Further, from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, a post-operation mode image is displayed for 1000 ms, which is the state after the push button 31B has been operated by the player (post-operation mode image display period). Since the after-operation mode image is an image that is displayed with priority over the white-out image 006SG303, the player can visually recognize the operation mode image for 1000 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A. .

In addition, in the cut-in effect, a cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A (cut-in effect sound output period). . Note that in the cut-in performance, unlike the weak development performance, etc., the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that the user can enjoy the cracking performance unique to the cut-in performance. Furthermore, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken may be output in the cut-in effect.In this case, by setting the priority of the cut-in effect sound high, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken may be output. The output may be limited.

Furthermore, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 will be controlled according to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). The light emission data table for cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is displayed for 1000ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the latter half of the whiteout display period. By using the light emission data table for cut-in effect, light emission mainly consisting of white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the crack effect, and from the end timing of the late white-out display period to the end timing of the suggested image display period. By using this, light emission other than mainly white light emission is performed in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect. In addition, after the light emission is finished in the mode corresponding to the cut-in effect, by using the light emission data table for the super reach β background image again, the mode corresponding to the display of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is changed. Light emission that is not primarily white light emission occurs.

As shown in FIG. 71, FIG. 82(A), FIG. 67, and FIG. 68, as a success pattern result notification effect, first, as a preliminary operation, a falling operation of the movable body 32 is performed for 500 ms. fall period). When the falling motion of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms have passed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). In this crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms from the start timing of the crack display period, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. The small fragment image 006SG302A, which is also small in size, is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance etc. have different values of the "strength" and "repetition" parameters shown in FIG. It is designed to vary in speed, size, and number of small fragment images. In addition, the values of the "intensity" and "repetition" parameters are different between the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification presentation (failure pattern), so the scattering speed and small fragments are different. Each image is designed to have a different size and number.

Next, when the timing of glass plate image 006SG301A breaking comes, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) corresponding to the reach effect of super reach α that has been displayed up to that time or the super reach α background image (image 006SG088 for weak S reach effect) corresponding to the reach effect of super reach The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach effect is updated to the jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) that indicates that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragments remain for 1500ms. Image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period). Although not particularly shown in FIG. 82(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and after 10,000 ms (the variable display stop timing of the variable display) The background image (first background image 006SG081) is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and then updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game state from the variable display stop timing of the variable display.

Furthermore, from the timing of the breakage of the glass plate image 006SG301A, after the whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned broken image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500ms (whiteout display first half period), the whiteout display is Whiteout image 006SG303 having higher transmittance than the earlier period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display latter period). For this reason, in the success pattern result notification performance of the present embodiment, in the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is obstructed by the whiteout image 006SG303 and cannot visually recognize the broken image 006SG302. has become impossible. On the other hand, for 1000 ms including the latter period of whiteout display after the first period of whiteout display, the fragmented image 006SG302 can be visually recognized by the player as the period in which the fragmented image 006SG302 is visible.

Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification performance for the success pattern have transparency, and other images (for example, background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be seen through these fragment images 006SG302. etc.) are visible to the player.

Note that the movable body 32 rises to the initial position for 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (movable body rising period).

In addition, in the result notification performance in the success pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. sound output period). Note that in the result notification performance (success pattern), unlike the weak development performance and the like, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so that it is possible to suitably notify that the jackpot has been determined. Also, in the result notification performance (success pattern), a sound effect that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken may be output. In this case, by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high, the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. The output of sound effects may be limited.

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image ( Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the weak S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and whiteout occurs from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. For 1000 ms up to the end timing of the late display period, by using the light emission data table for crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), light emission is mainly performed in white light in a manner corresponding to the break effect. Incidentally, after the light emission is completed in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect, by using the light emission data table for the jackpot notification background image, the light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the jackpot notification background image. In addition, from the stop timing of the variable display, by using the light emission data table for the jackpot game, light emission mainly including rainbow color light emission is performed in a manner according to the display of the jackpot game background image.

As shown in FIG. 82(B), in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, the fall of the movable body 32 and the cracks accompanying the fall of the movable body 32 are not displayed, and the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301A for the success pattern are not displayed. From this timing, a crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5500 ms (crack display period). In addition, from the start timing of the crack display period, the super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) or the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, becomes variable. This is an image indicating that the display result is a failure, and is updated to a monochrome failure notification background image. The display of the deviation notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, and is updated to a color eye-catching image at the end of the crack display period. The display period of the eye-catch image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period of the eye-catch image ends, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) in color like the eye-catch image is displayed. is started. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying the monochrome failure notification background image, the color eye-catching image and the normal background image (the first background image 006SG081) is now displayed.

In addition, in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the above-mentioned crack display period (crack effect sound output period).

In addition, regarding the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the super reach α background image or the light emission data table for the super reach β background image until the start timing of the crack display period, the light emission data table for the super reach α background image (weak Light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the S reach effect image 006SG088) and the super reach β background image (4th background image 006SG084), and the variable display stops from the start timing of the crack display period. At this timing, by using the light emission data table for the failure notification background image, light emission, mainly white light emission, is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the failure notification background image. In addition, from the stop timing of the variable display, by using the normal background image light emission data table, light emission that is not mainly white light emission is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). . Note that the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000ms) and the light emission data table for the deviation notification background image are both light emission data tables that execute light emission mainly using white light. White light emission based on the light emission data table for white out (1000ms) is executed including a blinking pattern that alternates high brightness white light emission and low brightness white light emission, whereas white light emission based on the light emission data table for white out White light emission is performed without including a blinking pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is started from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the display start timing of the broken image 006SG302). The whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start displaying at a timing earlier than the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A (display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302).

(Fragment speed when performing cracking effect)
Next, the above-mentioned first continuous cracking effect, second continuous breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect. The display speed of the broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the cracking effect is executed as effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 83(A), among these performances, the first consecutive breaking performance, the second consecutive breaking performance, the dialogue preview performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo continuous performance, the reach suggestion performance, and the weak development. The fragmented image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the cracking effect is executed as the effect, strong development effect A, or result notification effect, is displayed during the fragment image display period including the early white-out display period and the latter white-out display period. It is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the broken image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when the strong development effect B and the cracking effect as the cut-in effect are executed, is different from the white-out display early period and the white-out display period. While it is displayed moving at a speed of V1 for 1000ms with the latter period, during the fragment image display period after the whiteout display latter period (2000ms for strong development effect B, 1500ms for cut-in effect). , and is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion) that is lower than the speed V1. Note that as the effects in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the speed V0, strong development effect B and cut-in effect are shown in FIG. 83, but background change effect B and strong development effect A are also as described below. The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at a speed of V0, and when indicating to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect B and strong development effect A is displayed moving at a speed of V1. It is also decided to move and display at a speed V0 at a high rate.

(Details of cracking effect)
Next, details of the crack effect will be explained based on FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in the crack effect. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a display example of each crack pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the cracking effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined cracking timing, something appears from the rear side at approximately the center position of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area. A crack in which a crack starts under the setting where an impact (force) is applied, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area where the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed. The image is now displayed as an animation. In other words, the cracking effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes to the broken image 006SG302, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in a broken state (fragmented state). In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A is started to crack when a sphere collides with it from the rear at a substantially central position.

Note that the animation display in which the glass plate breaks and the fragment images scatter is actually composed of a number of still images (for example, about 30 to 100 frames) depending on the fragment image display period, but in FIG. Five still images are extracted from among the plurality of still images that make up the animation display of broken fragment images from the start to the end, and are arranged in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 85, the five-frame images of each crack pattern are not five consecutive frames, but actually a plurality of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, there are various ways of cracking, and multiple types of cracking patterns (for example, cracking patterns A to G) are set in advance, and the performance control CPU 120 can break depending on the type of performance to be executed. It is possible to perform a cracking effect based on a preset cracking pattern.

Specifically, cracking pattern A is a pattern corresponding to background change effect A and reach suggestion effect, cracking pattern B is a pattern corresponding to background change effect B and strong development effect B, and cracking pattern C is a pattern corresponding to background change effect B and strong development effect B. , is a pattern corresponding to a pseudo continuous performance and a result notification performance (jackpot), a crack pattern D is a pattern corresponding to a first continuous crack performance, a second continuous crack performance, and a dialogue preview performance, and a crack pattern E is, The cracking pattern F is a pattern corresponding to a weak development effect, the cracking pattern F is a pattern corresponding to a strong development effect A, and the cracking pattern G is a pattern corresponding to a cut-in effect.

Each of the crack patterns A to G is different in at least one of the following items: "acting entity," "crack mode," "crack range," and "fragment image display mode." Note that the display period, display timing, etc. are as described in FIGS. 70 and 71, and therefore their description will be omitted below.

"Agent" indicates the actor who acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A. For crack patterns A and E, the crack effect is executed according to the action of the "character", and for crack patterns C and F, the action of the "movable body" is performed. A cracking effect is executed according to the splitting pattern B and D, and the breaking effect is executed at a predetermined timing regardless of the actor. "Crack mode" indicates whether or not the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack mode before it breaks, and for crack patterns A to D, the crack effect is executed after the "crack mode" is displayed, and the crack pattern In E to G, the crack effect is executed without the "crack mode" being displayed. Note that the "crack mode" includes a plurality of types of modes in which the display position on the display screen, the number of displays, the shape of the crack, etc. are different. The "crack range" is the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and the crack patterns A to C and E to G are the "whole" display screen, and the crack pattern D is "part". "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent mode, and a part of crack pattern B and crack pattern E are set as "non-transparent", and other crack patterns are set as "transparent". .

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the near side of the approximate center of the display screen. Therefore, since the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area, and the "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 has a shape that reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area. , when the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is large (45 degrees to 90 degrees), the light is easily transmitted without being reflected, making it easier to see the lower layer image drawing area, while the second At an angle of (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light with respect to the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), the light is reflected and difficult to pass through, making it difficult to visually recognize the lower layer image drawing area (Figure 94 reference). For example, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then When a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, vertical and horizontal positions, depth position, etc. of this light can be changed in various settings, and the setting values regarding the light may be changed depending on the crack pattern.

Furthermore, the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken include a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 having different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, and the like. Further, each fragment image 006SG302 moves while rotating in various directions, at various speeds, and in various orientations during the display period from when the display starts until it ends and becomes non-display. Specifically, those that are displayed in a manner that moves in the X-axis direction (horizontal direction), those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Y-axis direction (vertical direction), and those that are displayed in a manner that they move in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction). There are some that are displayed in a manner that they move towards the target, and others that have different moving speeds, rotational speeds, number of rotations, display periods, etc. Regarding the direction of movement, it is possible to move not only in one direction among the X, Y, and Z axes, but also in multiple axes among the X, Y, and Z axes (for example, the XY-axis direction and the XY-axis direction). Including those moving toward the target.

In other words, each of the crack patterns A to G includes at least one of the plurality of pieces when the fragment image 006SG302 is scattered, in addition to the above-mentioned "acting entity", "crack mode", "crack range", and "fragment image display mode". The display mode such as the shape, size, rotation speed, rotation speed, movement direction [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period of the fragment image 006SG302. At least one of them is a different pattern.

In addition, the cracking patterns A to G are cracking animations created using, for example, the shutter function of a predetermined animation creation software, and the created cracking patterns A to G are based on multiple parameters shown below. The numerical values of at least some of the parameters are different.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in FIG. 84, "gravity" allows setting of gravity, and adjusts the acceleration at which the scattered fragments gradually fall. Because of gravity, it is not constant but gradually accelerates downward. The "gravity direction" can set the direction in which gravity is applied, and can specify up, down, left, and right directions based on 0 degrees (upward direction). The "gravity gradient" allows gravity to be adjusted closer in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and the value set with this parameter is combined with the "direction of gravity." It is possible to specify all directions in 3D space: front and back, top, bottom, left and right. Note that for values of "-90" and "90", since the direction is the Z-axis direction, the "direction of gravity" is essentially treated as invalid. "Strength" allows you to adjust the force of the flying debris; increasing the value will increase the speed at which the debris will fly. "Amount of variation" allows you to adjust the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. Normally, in the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, it takes more energy to move large and heavy objects. Therefore, if the same impact is applied, small objects will move or rotate faster, and large, heavy objects will move or rotate more slowly. The difference in physical animation depending on the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0% to 100%; at 0%, size and weight are not taken into account, so small and large fragments will move in the same way. Note that the default setting of 30% is considered to be a value close to the physical laws of nature. "Repeat" allows you to adjust the size of the broken pieces; increasing the value will make each piece smaller and increase the number of pieces. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of fragments, and increasing the value will increase the time it takes for movement and rotation to stop due to resistance. Also, as if it were attached to a sticky object, it would also apply resistance to gravity, which would slow down its falling speed. In other words, when the value of "viscosity" is adjusted to a large value, the movement of the pieces becomes slow motion. Note that FIG. 84 shows crack patterns B, crack pattern E, and crack pattern F as crack patterns in which the value of "viscosity" has been adjusted to be larger than normal, but as will be described later, crack pattern G also has " The value of "Viscosity" has been adjusted to be larger than normal.

The above parameters are just an example, and in addition to the above, there are also "force", which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, and "position", which allows the position of the force to be adjusted in the X-axis and Y-axis directions. ", "Depth" which allows you to adjust the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "Rotation speed" which allows you to set the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302. It may also be possible to set a "random degree" or the like that can be set.

Next, the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering mode) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern will be briefly described.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the value of "gravity direction" is set to "180°", so after fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters to the surrounding area, it naturally moves downward. On the other hand, for crack patterns B and G, the value of "Gravity direction" is set to "0°", so after fragment image 006SG302 breaks and scatters to spread to the surroundings, Compared to crack patterns A, C to F, it is less likely to fall downward.

In this way, crack patterns A, C to F (first pattern) and crack patterns B and G (second pattern) have different "gravitational direction" settings, so crack patterns A, C to F are " 180°'', which means that the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves and is displayed is different. This allows you to create a variety of patterns, increasing your interest.

In addition, for crack patterns A, C to F, the value of "variation amount" is set to "30%", so the fragment image 006SG302 is a small fragment image 006SG302 that moves and rotates quickly, and the large heavy fragment image 006SG302 is is a slow mode, while for crack patterns B and G, the value of “variation amount” is set to “0%”, so in the fragment image 006SG302, small and large pieces are in the same mode with no difference. Therefore, it is considered a cracking pattern with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on their size, with the small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and the large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slow and falling quickly, resulting in realistic movement. Crack patterns B and G can be used when you want to show a scene.Crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way and fall in the same way regardless of the size, so it is a crack pattern that is suitable depending on the scene. can be selected.

In addition, crack patterns A and C (first pattern) and crack patterns D to F (second pattern) have the same "gravity direction" setting but different "gravity value" settings, so the fragment image The speed at which 006SG302 falls is different. In this way, by varying the numerical value of the parameter "gravity value" and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be constructed and the interest is improved. More specifically, since the crack patterns D to F have larger numerical values, the fragment images 006SG302 fall faster.

In addition, for the crack patterns A to C, E, and G, the value of "gravity gradient" is set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while While the crack patterns D and F are displayed as if they are moving in the axial direction, that is, toward the front, the fragment images are 006SG302 is a mode in which it is displayed only by moving in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, without moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, in the crack patterns A to C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves toward the front side, the fragment image is displayed in a manner that gradually enlarges, so that It can emphasize that you are approaching. In particular, for crack patterns B and G, the numerical value of the "gravity gradient" is set to "90", so the fragment images are displayed in a manner that moves further toward the front.

Furthermore, for crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and " The second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302, and by varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, it is possible to create a stable and diverse fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

In addition, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) are, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern). The first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and the second parameter of "strength" is "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, which are different from each other. (2nd pattern) and cracking pattern G (3rd pattern) are different in that the first parameter of "gravity" is "5" for cracking pattern E and "2" for cracking pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "2". "5" is common. In this way, each pattern has a common part for the fragment image 006SG302 and is configured using different parameters, thereby making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of cracking patterns A to G having different numerical values of various parameters are stored in advance, and a cracking effect is executed based on the cracking patterns A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the type of performance to be executed by the performance control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the determined performance may be It is possible to determine the numerical values of various parameters according to the type of item, jackpot expectation level, etc., create breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values, and display an animation display of the glass plate breaking based on the created breaking animation data. You can also use it as

(Display example of crack pattern)
Next, details of display examples of crack patterns A to G will be explained based on FIGS. 86 to 92. FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a display example of crack pattern B with and without a whiteout image. FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern F. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern G.

In each of FIGS. 86 to 92, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of crack patterns in the mode of displaying whiteout image 006SG303. This is an example of displaying a crack pattern in a mode in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed although it is a corresponding image. In other words, this is a diagram comparing a case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and a case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed at the start of the crack effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 is 0%, and the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3). In (A4), the transmittance of whiteout image 006SG303 is 100%.

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of FIGS. 86 to 92, in the animation display in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, in the frame at the beginning of the crack (for example, (B1)), the glass plate image 006SG301A is located at approximately the center position. Since the setting is such that the cracking starts when an impact (force) such as a sphere colliding from the rear side is applied, the scattering starts from the fragment image 006SG302 near the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the surrounding area A large number of fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started scattering. In other words, at the stage when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed over the entire display screen instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the timing of the cracking, started to change to a broken state, a large number of glass plate images 006SG301A, which were hidden from view at the timing of the cracking, filled almost the entire display screen. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, the images displayed in the lower display layer image drawing area than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 are almost difficult to see.

Therefore, at the start timing of the cracking effect, as shown in (B1), the glass plate image 006SG301A, which has been displayed for several frames and filling almost the entire area of the display screen, changes to a broken state, and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are created. Therefore, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started. In particular, it is better if the cracking effect starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked manner, as in the cracking patterns A to D. However, as in the cracking patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A If the crack effect suddenly starts without being displayed in the crack mode, the image will suddenly be displayed filling the display screen, as if to drown out the image that was displayed before the crack effect started. Since the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a broken state and a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, there is a possibility that this may give an unnatural impression to the player.

Therefore, at the beginning of cracking, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 to hide a large number of fragment images 006SG302, as shown in the whiteout display early period of (A1). This can reduce the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

In addition, as shown in the latter period of whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), the whiteout image 006SG303 is not suddenly hidden, but is faded out and the transmittance is gradually increased, thereby reducing debris. Since the image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has been moved from the center of the display screen to the surrounding area to some extent, the manner in which the fragmented image 006SG302 breaks and scatters can be made to look natural and natural.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 86 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) (see Figure 86 (B2)), it falls downward and the main 86 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 87, in the crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 87 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 87 (B2)), the particles are directed downward. Since it is difficult to fall, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed frame-out from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 87 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 88, in the crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to break from the center of the screen (see FIG. 88 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 spread radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) (see Figure 88 (B2)), it falls downward and the main 88 (B3) to (B5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a pseudo continuous effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, and a cut-in effect are executed, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as a background image. The present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly illustrated, for example, background images may be displayed in different display modes depending on the type of effect.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 89 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, to the right) or the Y-axis direction (for example, to the left) (see Figure 89 (B2)), it falls downward and is displayed as frame-out mainly from the bottom side (Figure 89 (B2)). 89 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in FIG. 90, in the crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 90 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (for example, horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (for example, vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (for example, forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 90 (B2)), it moves in slow motion. 90 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to FIGS. 90 (B3) to (B5), and more specifically, The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 90 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Further, in FIG. 90 (B1), the movable body 32 is intentionally not shown in order to make it easier to see the beginning of the crack in the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, the fragment image 006SG302 in the crack pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from FIG. 90 (B3), and it takes time to display it out of frame. A super reach α effect may be performed by white-out while moving in slow motion so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see FIG. 91 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., rightward) and Y-axis direction (e.g., leftward) (see Figure 91 (B2)), the main body falls downward in slow motion. 91 (B3) to (B5)). Further, since the small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly, it falls first and is displayed out of frame, whereas the large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 is slow, so it is displayed out of frame after the small fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during the strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern at the top right of the display screen in the reach mode will be temporarily hidden, and will be displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in the breaking effect is hidden. By doing so, it is possible to omit as much display as possible that is not related to the cracking effect, and to enhance the effect of the cracking effect. In addition, when a cracking effect occurs not only during the strong S reach effect but also during other reach effects such as the weak S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern of the reach mode is temporarily hidden, and the fragment image in the corresponding cracking effect is temporarily hidden. 006SG302 may be displayed again when it becomes hidden.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center position of the screen (see FIG. 92 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 is broken by normal motion movement. After scattering in the X-axis direction (e.g., horizontal direction), Y-axis direction (e.g., vertical direction), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward direction) so as to spread radially (see FIG. 92 (B2)), the particles are directed downward. Since it is difficult to fall, it moves in slow motion radially from the center and is displayed frame-out from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see FIGS. 92 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the value of the "viscosity" parameter in crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", which corresponds to FIGS. 92 (B1) and (B2), and more specifically, The value of the "viscosity" parameter corresponding to 92 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(Details of fragment image)
Next, details of the fragment image will be explained based on FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a fragment image displayed in (A) a pseudo continuous effect and (B) in a cut-in effect. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing fragment images displayed in (A) background change effect A and (B) strong development effect B. Note that the fragment image indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 94 indicates that it is not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo continuous effect is in a non-transparent mode (for example, the transmittance On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect recognizes at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and character image 006SG307 that are in a superimposed relationship. Since the image is in a transparent mode (for example, 100% transmittance) that allows the fragmentation image to be displayed, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, it can give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized. (the background is transparent), and the second fragment image 006SG302 is an image in a transparent mode (the characters are transparent) that allows at least part of the character image 006SG307 (special image) to be recognized. The image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and text are transparent) that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the character image 006SG307. By changing the display mode of images, the effect of each performance can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(A), all of the fragment images 006SG302 among the fragment images in the background change effect A are moved downward to the outside of the display screen of the image display device 5 and framed. While the first fragment image 006SG302 out of the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development effect B is hidden in an out-display mode, as shown in FIG. The second fragment image 006SG302, which is hidden in a frame-out manner by moving vertically and horizontally, and which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5. By being hidden from the front, it is possible to make a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated at a first angle (for example, an angle where the plane faces the front side), and the incident angle of the irradiation light on the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees. When the angle of the fragment image 006SG302 is a large angle), it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and the rotation operation causes the fragment image 006SG302 to move to a second angle smaller than the first angle. (for example, a small angle at which the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end face faces the front side), at least one of the background images in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302. It becomes difficult to recognize the parts. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 94(A), when the first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image is at the second angle, so that the fragment image The presentation effect when displaying 006SG302 can be enhanced.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variable display of these special symbols and decorative symbols, the player It is possible to control the jackpot game state which is advantageous for players. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, which is a presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state will be controlled during variable display, and a dialogue notice. Control means for executing performance, background change performance A, background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, result notification performance, etc. It is equipped with a certain performance control CPU 120. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to draw images with different display priorities in the VRAM area of the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5. It has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas.

For example, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative designs as layer 2 images, and objects such as characters as layer 3 images. A layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging crack precursor images (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as a layer 4 image, a glass plate image as a layer 5 image. Layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and placing 006SG301A and fragment images 006SG302 (glass shards, etc.), Layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and placing operation effect images as layer 6 images, White as layer 7 images Layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the out image 006SG303, Layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the operation promotion image as the layer 8 image, variable display compatible display (pending display, etc.) as the layer 9 image. Layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the active display), drawing and arranging the small pattern (4th pattern), the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the right-hand hitting notification image as the layer 10 image. It has layer 10 image drawing area for. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

Note that unless a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, and the layer 9 image drawing area is the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is a layer 9 image. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority on the display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. Yes, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The image has a low priority, and the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Furthermore, although it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, as a substitute for the layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, It may also have layer 1-3 image drawing areas. In this case, a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and a chance background image (second background image) can be drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. Background image 006SG082, 7th background image), normal reach background image, super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088), super reach β background image (4th background image 006SG084) can be drawn, and layer 1- A background effect image (background effect image 006SG322) and a jackpot notification background image (5th background image 006SG085) can be drawn in the 3rd image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area is layer 2. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area is not drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area. The image has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area. This is an image with a low display priority in No. 5.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 47, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A are effects that can be executed at different timings. Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the background change effect A includes a crack display period in which a crack is displayed when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a glass plate The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the image 006SG301 is broken and a fragment image display period is displayed, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.As shown in FIG. This is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and a fragmented image 006SG302 is displayed in a shorter period than the background change effect due to the operation.

Furthermore, the background change effect A is displayed on the image display device 5 before the crack is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started. The strong development performance A is a performance that changes the background image of the image display device 5 before the strong development performance A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A starts. This is an effect that changes the background images displayed in the . In other words, in this embodiment, background change effect A is used to display the crack and fragment image 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and background change effect A is used to display the fragment image 006SG302 without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. By being able to execute the development effect A at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings, and furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 is common to the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. Since the types of background images displayed before and after the display are different, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, it gives suitably different impressions to the player and increases the interest in the game. be able to.

[Form 1-2]
In addition, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect is better when strong development effect A is executed without background change effect A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when performance A is executed and strong development performance A is executed (for example, see FIGS. 44 to 47). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, and increase interest.

[Form 1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via background change effect A, It is also possible to provide a case where the game goes through different chance background stimulation effects (FIG. 41). Also, when the background image changes from a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via background change effect A, it is better to change the background image via background change effect A to a chance background image (second background image 006SG082). The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed by either the background change effect A or the chance background stimulation effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
In addition, if background change effect A and strong development effect A can be executed during the variable display of 1, the strong development effect is better when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect A is executed. Before the execution of A, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the background change effect A is not executed (for example, see FIGS. 44 to 47). By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by making the user expect that both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A will be executed during the first variable display.

[Form 1-4-2]
As shown in FIGS. 74 and 79, during variable display, background change effect A is an effect executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. It is. In addition, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081) and a chance background image (first 2 background image 006SG082), a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of super reach α is being executed, and a background image indicating that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. The super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) shown in FIG. Fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect A is the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084). ), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, since the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A has transparency, the chance background that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 can be seen through the fragment image 006SG302. It is possible for the player to recognize at least a part of the image (second background image 006SG082), and since the background image displayed in strong development effect A does not have transparency, the fragment image 006SG302 Since it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302 in these background change effects A. It is possible to enhance the display and the effect of the strong development effect A.

[Form 1-4-4]
Further, as shown in FIG. 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches the first angle due to the rotation operation, the player can see at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. However, when the fragment image 006SG302 is at the second angle due to the rotation operation, it is difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. good. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
Further, as shown in FIG. 100, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plural fragment images 006SG302 becomes the first angle, one of the plural fragment images 006SG302 The second fragment image 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in multiple directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction is The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 to be hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer than that for the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the axial direction. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect A both exhibit speed changes from the start of display to the timing of the end of display. Since the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving without accompanying movement, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally without any discomfort in these background change effect A and strong development effect A.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A commonly move toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A have the same period of time until they become invisible on the display screen (see FIGS. 86 and 91). By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A increases, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 1-7-2]
The visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes hidden on the display screen (Fig. 86, 91). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it is hidden, thereby increasing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change effect A. By lengthening the period required for this to occur, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A is displayed. The number of rotation operations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in strong development effect A is displayed until it becomes hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 The number of rotation operations until the display area becomes non-display may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 2-1]
Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 79, in both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts. The display period of white-out image 006SG303 in these background change effects A and strong development effect A is the first half of the white-out display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303, and the white-out display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 in the white-out image 006SG303. Since it consists of a white-out display latter period during which the person can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that they can be displayed at various times. In addition to being able to surprise the player, the whiteout image 006SG303 can reduce the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change effect A and strong development effect can be suitably executed. .

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 79, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change effect A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the strong development effect The display period of whiteout image 006SG303 in A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms, so by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, background change effect A and strong development effect A are As the relevance increases, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A, so it is possible to enhance the effect of both the background change effect A and the strong development effect A. can.

[Form 2-3]
Furthermore, regarding the background change effect A shown in FIG. ) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. By doing so, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started with the whiteout image 006SG303 without any discomfort.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 63, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A, and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is an image that is displayed in the same manner, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect A in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner is increased, and both The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 81, the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83, the fragmented image 006SG302 in the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed moving at a speed of V1 regardless of the progress of the effect, while the fragmented image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed as it moves depending on the progress of the effect. Since the speed changes from the speed V1 to the lower speed V0, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a suitably different impression can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be increased. .

[Form 3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 47, if the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times in variable display 1, but the cut-in effect can be executed only once, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed multiple times. When the cut-in effect is executed, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed only once, and when the cut-in effect is executed once, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be higher than when the game is executed twice. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, and increase interest.

[Form 3-3]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the cracked state (glass plate image 006SG301A) in the pseudo continuous effect, and the first timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect. The whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the two timings, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire area of the display screen (FIG. 59(C), FIG. 66 (C)), the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 can be made different between the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is displayed moving at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the whiteout image 006SG302 is displayed moving at speed V1. Since the image 006SG303 is moved and displayed at a speed V0 lower than the speed V1 from the timing when the display period of the image 006SG303 ends, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect.

[Form 3-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81, when displaying the white-out image 006SG303 when displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in effect, as shown in FIG. 83, the display period of the white-out image 006SG303 is may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V1, but not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V0. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effect of the cut-in performance from deteriorating.

[Form 3-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 100, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect can be rotated, the first fragment among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect The number of rotation operations performed from when the image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is longer than the number of times the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect. The number of rotation operations may be greater than the number of times the rotation operation is performed from the time the image is displayed until the image becomes non-display in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 81, the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo continuous effect do not have transparency, the player can see the fragment images 006SG302 displayed on the image display device 5. While the background image is not visible, the fragmented images 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in effect are transparent, so the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragmented images 006SG302. is visible, so even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way in the pseudo continuous performance and the cut-in performance, it gives suitably different impressions to the player and increases the interest in the game. I can do it.

[Form 4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect is an image in a transparent mode that allows at least part of the background effect image 006SG322 to be recognized, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is a character image. It is an image in a transparent mode in which at least a part of the image 006SG307 can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a combination of at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and a character image. This is a transparent image in which at least a portion of 006SG307 can be recognized (see FIG. 93). By changing the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each performance in this way, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 100, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect can be rotated, the rotation movement causes the first fragment image 006SG302 to rotate at the first angle. If this happens, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and if the first fragment image 006SG302 becomes at the second angle due to the rotation operation, the fragment image 006SG302 It may become difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the background image. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 100, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is rotatable, the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is rotated at the first angle in the cut-in effect. Sometimes, a second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 81, the pseudo-continuous effect and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, regarding these pseudo continuous effects and cut-in effects, the cut-in effects include at least one of the glass plate images 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo continuous effects. The display starts displaying a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a period shorter than the crack display period until the fragment image 006SG302 that partially imitates is displayed, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are created. The fragment image 006SG302 is commonly displayed in a manner of moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 95), and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302 may take a longer period of time to disappear from display in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs depending on when the display starts and the timing before it becomes hidden on the display screen (FIG. 88, 92). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it is hidden, thereby increasing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
The fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is hidden on the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves and displays in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) in background change effect A. By lengthening the period required for this to occur, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 5-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect are hidden from view on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 94(A)), and the fragment images in the cut-in effect are hidden. The first fragment image 006SG302 of 006SG302 is hidden from view on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves outside the display screen. It is preferable to hide the display before moving towards the target (for example, see FIG. 94(B)). By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is presented between the pseudo continuous effect and the cut-in effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the reach-suggesting performance and the weak development performance of this embodiment are performances with different execution timings in the variable display. It can give you a surprise. Furthermore, regarding these reach-suggesting performances and weak-development performances, the right crack display period in the reach-suggesting performance is longer than the preceding movement period in the weak-development performance, and the fragment image display period in the reach-suggesting performance and the fragment in the weak-development performance are longer. The length may be different from the image display period (see FIGS. 77 and 78). By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 6-2]
Furthermore, in the reach suggestion performance, the right crack display period may be made longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 77). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach-suggesting performance from decreasing due to a monotonous performance configuration.

[Form 6-3]
In addition, as the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment, there is a case in which the success pattern is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, and a case in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after the crack is displayed. There are cases where the glass plate image 006SG301A is executed in a failure pattern that does not break, and when the reach suggestion effect is executed in the failure pattern, there is a broken image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in the success pattern. For a period of 6000 ms, which is longer than 2000 ms of the display period (fragment image display period), cracks appear in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period. Since this is displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate to the player that the reach suggestion performance will not be executed in a successful pattern, that is, that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion performance is a performance that informs that it will become a reach if executed in a successful pattern, it will not become a reach if it is executed in a failure pattern. Since this is a performance that suggests that the rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low, the player is dependent on whether or not the reach-suggesting performance is executed and whether the reach-suggesting performance is executed in a successful pattern. It can attract attention and increase interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 47, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect is different from the display of the weak development effect in the reach suggestion effect. When the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is made executable after it has started, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is started before the execution of the weak development performance, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not performed. You can do it like this. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect and increase interest.

[Form 6-5]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 transitions from the state where it is displayed in a cracked state to the broken state in the reach suggestion performance, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the weak development performance, In common, a whiteout image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed spreading from the center of the display screen to the periphery, and at the second timing, it is displayed over the entire area of the display screen (Fig. 60 (G), Fig. 62 (D)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 6-6]
It is possible to highlight the decorative pattern in the reach state in the reach suggestion effect, and in the fragment image display period, the period in which the reach state glue pattern is highlighted is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so (see FIGS. 61(I) to 61(K)), it is possible to suitably indicate that a ready-to-reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In response to the movement of the character image 006SG305 in the reach suggestion effect, the movement effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302, and the timing to start displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 By displaying the motion effect image 006SG323 (see FIG. 60(D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without causing any discomfort.

[Form 6-7-2]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, in the reach suggestion performance, the timing at which a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301 and By displaying the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the small fragment image 006SG302A for a longer period of time than the motion effect image 006SG323, the player is informed that a crack has been displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. This can be suitably shown.

[Form 6-7-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 77, in the reach suggestion effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started; When acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the motion effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. For this reason, depending on the action of the character, cracks may be displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character appears in the glass plate image 006SG301. It is possible to prevent the reach-suggestion performance from becoming a monotonous performance by giving a difference in the performance mode of the reach-suggestion performance when acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C.

[Form 6-7-4]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, in the reach suggestion effect, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period in which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period). is also a long period of time, so when a crack is displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, the character is It is possible to prevent the reach-suggestion performance from becoming a monotonous performance by giving a difference in the performance mode of the reach-suggestion performance when acting on the decorative pattern display area 5C of "medium".

[Form 6-8]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effect have transparency, the player can visually recognize the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. On the other hand, since the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect do not have transparency, the player cannot see at least part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. , the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 can be made different between the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83, the speed of both the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect changes from the display start timing to the display end timing. Since the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed moving without any movement, these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
Further, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be set to be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see FIGS. 77 and 78). By doing this, it is possible to create a difference between the reach-suggesting performance and the weak development performance, and increase interest through a variety of presentations.

[Form 7-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 81, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81, when a cut-in effect is executed, first, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion effect, and the player presses the push button. 31B is operated or when the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking is reached, the cut-in effect is executed, and during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, it is given priority over the white-out image 006SG303. An image of the state after the push button 31B is operated is displayed. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is 2500 ms, the display period of the state image before the operation of the push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the state image after the operation of the push button 31B is the display period of the white-out image 006SG303. The display period is 1000ms, which is the same as the display period, that is, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect (cut-in image display period) is the same as the display period of the pre-operation mode image of the push button 31B (pre-operation mode image display period). ) and longer than the display period of the state image after operation of the push button 31B (post-operation state image display period), the cut-in effect becomes monotonous and the interest of the cut-in effect decreases. This can be prevented.

[Form 8-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display. can give you a surprise. Background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous effect, the combination of decorative patterns displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different between before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, the combination of decorative patterns is different). However, after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination according to the pseudo continuous effect). By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 8-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect, may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 9-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display. can give you a surprise. Furthermore, the period in which cracks are displayed in background change effect A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period in which cracks are displayed in pseudo continuous effect (crack display period) is 1500 ms, which is different in length. . In both the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started at the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, and these whiteout images are The display period of the image 006SG303 consists of an early white-out display period in which the player cannot see the broken image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303, and a late white-out display period in which the player can see the broken image 006SG302. Therefore, the sense of discomfort when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be reduced by the whiteout image 006SG303, and the background change effect A and the pseudo-sequence can be suitably executed.

[Form 9-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display the same, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in background change effect A, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous effect. , may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 10-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 80, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83, the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is displayed moving without changing the speed from the start of display to the end of display, and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B is displayed in white from the start of display. Until the out image 006SG303 is displayed, it is displayed moving at a speed of V1, and at the transition, it is displayed moving at a speed of V0, which is lower than the speed V1. It can give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 10-2]
A first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change effect A, and a second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect B. In common, a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 56 (G), Fig. 64 (H)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at a speed V0 in the strong development effect B is longer than the period in which it is displayed moving at a speed V1. The presentation of the fragment image 006SG302 can be made different from the presentation B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V1 in the strong development effect B is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving at the speed V0. Since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is moved and displayed, it is possible to prevent the presentation effect of the strong development presentation B from deteriorating.

[Form 10-4]
All the fragment images 006SG302 of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A are hidden on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 94(A)), and the fragment images in the strong development effect B The first fragment image 006SG302 of 006SG302 is hidden from view on the display screen by moving toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, moves outside the display screen. It becomes hidden before moving toward the object (see FIG. 94(B)). By doing this, it is possible to make the fragment image 006SG302 look different between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B are both transparent images, so when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B commonly move toward a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect B have the same period of time until they become invisible on the display screen (see FIGS. 86 and 87). It is preferable that there be. By doing so, the relationship between the background change effect A and the strong development effect B is increased, and the effect of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed while moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) is different depending on when the display is started and before it is hidden on the display screen (Fig. 86, see Figure 87). Specifically, it is difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 when the display starts, but it is easy to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 before it is hidden, thereby increasing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 100, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the plurality of fragment images displayed in the background change effect A are rotated. Among the fragment images 006SG302, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 is greater than the number of times the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development effect. The number of rotation operations may be greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed until it becomes non-displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 100, when rotating the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B, the rotation movement causes the fragment image 006SG302 to become the first When the angle becomes the second angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 becomes the second angle due to the rotation operation, the fragment image 006SG302 It may be difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is in a superimposed relationship with the background image. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 100, when the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development effect B are rotated, the first fragment image 006SG302 is When the angle is , the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. By doing so, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form 10-8]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 47, if both background change effect A and strong development effect B can be executed during the variable display of 1, the background change effect can be performed at the timing before reach, and strong development effect. Output B can be executed at the timing after reach, and when background change effect A is executed before strong development effect B is executed, the rate of control to jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. You can do it like this. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the background change effect A is being executed and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
In addition, regarding the background change effect A and strong development effect B shown in FIGS. 74 and 80, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. If it is possible to display the background change effect A, the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and the period in which the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack in the pseudo continuous performance. and may have different lengths. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 11-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display. can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 70, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo continuous effect does not have transparency, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A has transparency. Even if the effect is displayed, it is possible to give a suitably different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 12-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 80, the background change effect A and the strong development effect B of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, the lengths of the crack display period in background change effect A and the crack display period in strong development effect B are made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development effect B are made common. , the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in a plurality of directions, at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction is the fragment image that is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction. The fragment image 006SG302, which takes a longer time to disappear in the display area of the image display device 5 than 006SG302, and is displayed moving in the Z-axis direction in the strong development effect B, The period required for the fragment image 006SG302 to be hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be longer than that of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed. By doing so, even when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a suitably different impression can be given, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 13-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 77, the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect of this embodiment are effects that are executed at different timings during the variable display, so that the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, while the right crack display period is 4000ms in the reach suggestion production, the crack display period is 2000ms in the background change production A, and the display period of fragment image 006SG302 (fragment image display period) in the reach suggestion production is 1500ms. On the other hand, since the display period (fragment image display period) of fragment image 006SG302 in background change effect A is 20,000 ms, a suitably different impression is given even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed. , can increase interest in games.

[Form 13-2]
In the first predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack mode according to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth predetermined part, the glass plate image 006SG301 is changed from the third crack front mode to the third crack mode. By being able to change the display (see FIGS. 60 and 56), it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked manner.

[Form 14-1]
Furthermore, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect of this embodiment shown in FIG. 72 are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, surprises can be given to the player at various timings during the variable display. can give. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect can be executed at a timing after the first continuous cracking effect, and the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect have the same length of crack display period, and the fragment image The length of the display period is also the same, and when the second continuous cracking effect is executed after the first continuous cracking effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous cracking effect is temporarily hidden. Since the crack display period of the second crack effect is started, the effect of the effect is prevented from decreasing due to a new crack being displayed even though the fragment image 006SG302 has already been displayed. I can do it.

[Form 14-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect have at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction in common. The fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including the above, and the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-3]
The character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed in common with the fragment image 006SG302 in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, and the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous breaking effect can be displayed in the first mode (for example, , character image of Jam), and the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect is displayed in a second mode (for example, the character image of Mumu) different from the first mode (Fig. 53 ( F), see FIG. 54(F)), the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be presented differently to increase interest.

[Form 14-4]
Further, while the length of the fragment image display period is different between the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect shown in FIG. 72, the character image 006SG305 displayed as a result of the first breaking effect and the second breaking effect. The length of the display period may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first cracking effect and the second breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 14-5]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, a pattern in which a second continuous cracking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the cracking effect is not executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is better than a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. Since the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the second consecutive winning performance is executed and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are both displayed moving without changing the speed from the display start timing to the display end timing. It is possible to enhance the relationship between the first consecutive cracking performance and the second consecutive cracking performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
Furthermore, for the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect shown in FIG. 72, a white whiteout image 006SG303 can be displayed in common from the display start timing of the fragment image 006SG302, and is displayed in the first continuous cracking effect. The display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may be the same. By doing so, the relationship between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect can be increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 14-7-2]
Furthermore, since the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect shown in FIG. The relationship between the cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be enhanced.

[Form 15-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 82, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as a result notification performance when the jackpot game state is not controlled, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. The time required for the fragmented image 006SG302 to disappear in the background change effect A, and the time required for the cracked image of the glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the jackpot game state is not controlled. Since the required time is different, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

[Form 15-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 74, the fragmented image 006SG302 in the background change effect A requires 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification effect when the jackpot game state is not controlled, the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked. Since it takes 5500 ms for the image containing the icon to disappear, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

[Form 15-3]
There is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) that has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the background change effect A, and has the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification effect (miss). There is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302), and the display size of the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) is larger than that of the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302). Preferable (see, for example, FIGS. 57(J) and 69(D)). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment images 006SG302 different in how they are displayed, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A is a transparent image that allows at least part of the background image in the superimposed relationship to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) is in the superimposed relationship. By using a transparent image in which at least a portion of a certain background image can be recognized (see FIG. 84), it is possible to differentiate the way the fragment image 006SG302 is presented and increase its interest.

[Form 15-5]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification effect (missing) are common to a plurality of images including at least a predetermined direction (for example, the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction). It is preferable to display the screen in a manner of moving in the direction (see, for example, FIGS. 86 and 88). By doing so, it is possible to make the fragment images 006SG302 relevant and to make them more interesting.

[Form 15-6]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the background change effect A, and the broken image 006SG302 in the result notification effect (disappearance). The white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common at the second timing when the white-out image 006SG303 is displayed, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. . Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (FIG. 56(G) , see FIG. 69(C)). By doing so, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (missing), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 16-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 82, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. In addition, during the crack display period in the background change performance A, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification performance, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the failure pattern result notification performance, The game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a corresponding manner. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background change effect A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts, while the game effect lamp 9 continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the failure pattern result notification effect. The light emission 9 may continue until a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as stopping the variable display after the failure pattern result notification effect ends, or starting the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the control will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled by the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the second cracked mode, and in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the cracked mode. The type of background image differs between before and when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effect (see Figures 56(A) to 56(F), Figures 57(I), and 57(K)). , Display of the background image before it is announced whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled by the result notification effect, and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is announced that the jackpot gaming state will not be controlled. The aspects are different (see FIGS. 69(A) to 69(B) and FIG. 69(D)).

By doing this, it is possible to execute the background change effect A in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, thereby giving a surprise to the player. By changing the display mode of the background image before notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled, the player can be appropriately informed that the jackpot gaming state will not be controlled.

[Form 18-1]
Background change effect A includes a first predetermined part that displays the character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked manner according to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the glass plate image. This is a performance that includes a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and the pseudo-continuous performance includes a third predetermined part that displays the glass plate image 006SG301 with a second crack. a fourth predetermined part that is displayed in the same manner, a fifth predetermined part that starts the falling motion of the movable body 32, and a fragment image imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. This is a production that includes a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of 006SG302, and the execution timing is different between the background change production A and the pseudo continuous production, and in the cracking production of the pseudo continuous production, the movable body 32 is different from the first action. A different second operation is started, and after the fragment image 006SG302 is no longer displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the second operation of the movable body 32 ends (see FIGS. 56, 57, and 59).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect that display the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 can be executed at different timings, giving surprises to the players at various timings. Furthermore, by operating the movable body 32 to display the fragment image 006SG302 after displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in the form of a crack, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form 18-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 74 and 76, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. It may be possible to change and display it. In this case, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change effect A until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and the period from when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the background change effect A to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo continuous effect. The length may be different from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in the form of a crack.

[Form 18-3-1]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the state where it is displayed in a cracked state to the broken state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the pseudo continuous effect. , a white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 56 (G), Fig. 59 (C)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the pseudo continuous effect, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first operation is a falling motion in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the production position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the production position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (FIG. 59( See C). In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-coupled effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Further, as shown in FIG. 76, in the pseudo continuous effect, the movable object falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be set to be longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance.

[Form 18-4]
Furthermore, as a performance different from the pseudo-continuous performance shown in FIG. 76, it may be possible to perform a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. . In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body moves as a pseudo continuous effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area overlapping with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pseudo continuous effect from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 19-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 82, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 82, the result notification effect of the success pattern is an effect in which a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. This is an effect that starts the ascent of 32 and ends the ascent before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display the cracks on the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to provide an impressive effect.

[Form 19-2]
Regarding the background change effect A and result notification effect shown in FIGS. 74 and 82, after displaying the first stage crack on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack is changed to the second stage crack. It may also be possible to display the image. In this case, in the background change effect A, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack, and in the result notification performance, the glass plate The length may be different from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the image 006SG301 until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displaying the crack precursor image in the form of a crack.

[Form 19-3-1]
The first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from the cracked state to the broken state in the background change effect A, and the second timing when the broken image 006SG302 is displayed in the result notification effect (jackpot) A white-out image 006SG303 (effect image of a specific color) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the white-out image 006SG303 differs between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, at the first timing, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire area of the display screen, and at the second timing, it is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery (Fig. 56 (G), Fig. 67 (Refer to (E)), the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change effect A and the result notification effect (jackpot), thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second operation is an operation in which the movable body 32 moves from the production position toward the origin position, and when the second operation is started, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started (see FIG. 67(F)). . In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the white-out image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the pseudo-coupled effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
In addition, regarding the result notification effect shown in FIG. 82, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is the movable body rising period. Since it is longer than , it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the result notification performance.

[Form 19-4]
Further, as a performance different from the result notification performance shown in FIG. 82, it may be possible to perform a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 is operated during execution of the variable display to control the jackpot game state. . In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification performance from being degraded due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 20-1]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 79, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the game can be played at various timings during the variable display. can surprise people. Furthermore, the strong development effect A is a effect that displays the fragment image 006SG302 in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is longer than the fragment image display period in the background change effect A. is also a short period. Furthermore, in strong development performance A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the origin position above the image display device 5 after falling, and the movable body 32 starts rising after the fragment image display period ends. As a result, it is possible to provide a powerful performance.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first operation is an operation in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the production position, and when the first operation is started, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is started (see FIG. 63(B)). . In this way, by linking the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created and the effect of the strong development effect A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in FIG. 79, the strong development performance A includes an early whiteout display period and a whiteout latter display period. Here, the initial whiteout display and the falling period of the movable body 32 (movable body falling period) may have substantially the same length, and the fragment image display period may be made longer than the movable body falling period. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the strong development performance.

[Form 20-3]
Furthermore, as a performance different from the strong development performance A shown in FIG. 79, it is also possible to perform a movable body suggestion performance that suggests that the movable body 32 will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. good. In the case where the movable body suggestion effect can be executed in this way, it is possible to display a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed. When the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area overlapping with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the strong development performance A performance from decreasing due to the movable body emphasized image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change effect A and background change effect B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the background image can be viewed together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301 when not in use, are displayed with the first visibility, and in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is in a cracked state. The first background image 006SG081 when displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in background change effect B. The images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas whose priority is lower than that of the predetermined display layer when For example, the crack display area 006SG324) is displayed with the first visibility (see FIGS. 56(E), (F), and FIG. 58(C)).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the background change effect B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack modes, can be executed at different timings, so that the player can enjoy the game at various timings. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack mode, even when the glass plate image 006SG301 is similarly displayed, it is suitably different. It can give an impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
By being able to display the boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range using the first visibility and the third visibility that is higher in visibility than the second visibility (see enlarged view of FIG. 58(C)), the background The performance effect of change performance B can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and active display 006SG103 (corresponding image) that support variable display can be displayed in the layer 9 image drawing area that has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, and the glass plate image 006SG301 The corresponding image when is displayed in a cracked manner is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range, and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 58(C)). The corresponding image can also be suitably displayed.

[Form 21-4]
Further, for the background change effect B shown in FIG. 75, the second stage crack display period may be set to be longer than the first stage crack display period. By doing so, it is possible to make the glass plate image 006SG301 look different between the background change effect A and the background change effect B, thereby increasing the interest.

[Form 22-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the background change effect A and the dialogue preview effect of this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings during the variable display, so the player can can give you a surprise. Regarding the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, the visibility of the background image may be different between the crack display period in the background change performance A and the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance is made longer than the crack display period in the background change performance A, and multiple types of crack modes are provided in the dialogue preview performance (see FIGS. 56 and 55). The ratio of control to the jackpot gaming state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type and the second crack mode is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type and the second crack mode is displayed. may be set high. By doing this, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the speech preview performance, and even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, it will give a suitably different impression and increase the interest of the game. can be increased.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type in the second crack mode is displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type in the second crack mode is displayed, it is displayed lower than the predetermined display layer. The visibility of the background image differs (see FIGS. 56 and 55). By doing so, the way the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed can be differentiated and the interest can be increased.

[Form 22-3]
It is preferable that the whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance. (For example, see FIGS. 56 and 55). By doing so, the display patterns of the white-out images 006SG303 can be made different and more interesting.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 can display corresponding images (for example, first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and active display 006SG103) that are compatible with variable display in the special display layer (for example, layer 9 image drawing area). , the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer (for example, layer 9-1 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the special display layer, and a second predetermined display that has a lower priority than the special display layer. Special information regarding variable display in a special display layer (for example, layer 10 image drawing area) that can display the glass plate image 006SG301 in a layer (for example, layer 4 image drawing area) and has a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer (for example, small patterns), and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first predetermined display layer in background change effect A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and the 2 When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on a predetermined display layer, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when the background change effect A is executed, the change effect is not executed and the background change effect B is executed. It is possible to perform a change effect when the user is in a situation where the user is not aware of the changes (see FIG. 102).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the background change effect B can be executed at different timings, which makes it possible to surprise the player at various times. Even if the image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and the execution or non-execution of the change effect are different, so suitably different impressions can be given and the game interest can be increased.

[Form 23-2-1]
The change production is a production in which the character image 006SG305 is displayed and the display mode of the corresponding image is changed by the character image 006SG305 performing an action that acts on the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 has a higher priority than a predetermined display layer. can be displayed in a lower display layer (for example, layer 3 image drawing area) (see FIG. 102). By doing so, the changing effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background changing effect B to the minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
By being able to display a change emphasis image (for example, effect image 006SG330) in a display layer higher than the special display layer so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 102), The changing effect can be suitably executed even while the background changing effect B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The display modes are different between the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A suggests that a strong S reach effect (special effect) will be executed. The display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A. (See FIGS. 56, 103, and 104).

By doing this, the background change effect A and the strong development effect A can be executed at different timings, so that surprises can be given to the player at various timings, and furthermore, the background change effect A The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 is different between the strong development performance A and the fragment image 006SG302, and the relationship between the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A and the subsequent performance can be increased, so the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed. Even if the performance is different, it can give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (for example, strong S reach effect J, N) and a second special effect (for example, strong S reach effect A, B), and when the second special effect is executed. , the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the first special performance is executed, and the suggestion mode is the first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special production will be executed, and the first suggestion mode that suggests that the first special production will be executed. (See FIGS. 103, 104, and 105). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment images 006SG302 (for example, the fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A includes a suggestion mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode This is displayed more often than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggested mode (see FIG. 105). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can perform a rotational movement, and in the strong development effect A, it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode has a larger amount of rotational movement than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestion mode (Fig. 105 reference). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development effect A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode are displayed, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in a second predetermined part, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part. In the part, a single fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestion mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in the transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 104). By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development effect A.

[Form 25]
Further, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 81 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, the effect can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the white-out image 006SG303, and during the operation promotion effect execution period before the cut-in effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the cut-in effect. (and the fragment image 006SG302) are not visible for a period longer than the initial white-out display period, so the operation promotion effect creates a reserve for the crack effect, and the fragment image display period creates a sense of speed. It is possible to achieve a unique cracking pattern.

[Form 26]
Further, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 81 makes the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then makes the whiteout image 006SG303 a transparent image. Furthermore, it is an effect that can be changed to a visible state by ending the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Note that the fragment image display period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation promotion effect execution period. By doing so, the crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form 27]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. In presentation A, strong development presentation B, cut-in presentation, and result notification presentation, at least a portion of the display period of white-out image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap, and the display period of white-out image 006SG303 is the fragment image. The period is shorter than the display period. Furthermore, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period and a latter whiteout display period. Note that the latter half of the whiteout display period may be longer than the first half of the whiteout display period. By doing this, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the beginning of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, while the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is whiter than the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents image 006SG303 from being emphasized.

[Form 28]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. In production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production, by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed instead of glass plate image 006SG301, starts to break or the display has just started. The fragment image 006SG302 is hidden from view from the player. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden on the condition that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 29]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, by displaying whiteout image 006SG303, glass plate image 006SG301A that was displayed in place of glass plate image 006SG301 in the whiteout display early period is displayed. The fragment image 006SG302, which has just begun to crack or display, is hidden from the player's view, and the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player in the latter period of the white-out display when the transmittance of the white-out image 006SG303 is increased. It is possible. Therefore, in the latter period of whiteout display, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the fragment image 006SG302, which is moved and displayed after a sufficient period of time has elapsed from the start of display.

[Form 30]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 74 and 78, it is possible to start displaying the fragment images 006SG302 from the execution timing of the crack effect, and to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the late whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of background change effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of weak development effect, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 31]
Furthermore, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect shown in FIGS. 74 and 78, it is possible to start displaying the fragment images 006SG302 from the execution timing of the crack effect, and to move and display these fragment images 006SG302. . Here, the background change performance A may be a performance that can be executed when the gaming state is a normal state, and the weak development performance may be a performance that can be performed when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the late whiteout display period in the background change effect A and the late whiteout display period in the weak development effect. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of background change effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in the latter period of whiteout display of weak development effect, The performance effect can be enhanced.

[Form 32]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to emit light using the light emission data table for cracking performance over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. From the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so the display is replaced with the glass plate image 006SG301. Light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks can be suitably performed.

[Form 33]
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, In the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display period of whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least in part, and the speakers 8L and 8R are in the whiteout state. Since the crack effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is output from the display start timing of the image 006SG303, the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 34]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production patterns for the cracking production (the cracking pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken, and a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken. There is a second pattern that breaks without any damage. Here, when the cracking effect is executed in the first pattern and when it is executed in the second pattern, the sound corresponding to the breaking effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302) The difference may be whether or not the sound produced by the user is output. By doing this, it is possible to provide different impression patterns in each crack effect.

[Form 35]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production patterns for the cracking production (the cracking pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken, and a first pattern in which a crack is displayed and then broken. There is a second pattern that breaks without any damage. Here, if it is possible to actually execute the crack performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern in the second pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled to a jackpot game state as the crack performance of the result notification performance of the success pattern. A sound may be output depending on the situation. By doing so, it is possible to provide patterns of cracking effects that give different impressions depending on the condition.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The production pattern for the cracking production in production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is. Here, when the cracking effect is executed in the first pattern, the breaking effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301. On the other hand, when the breaking effect is executed in the second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the images are displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the display of the broken image 006SG302. The crack effect sound may not be output. By doing so, it is possible to provide crack patterns with different impressions.

[Form 37]
Shown in FIGS. 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the fragment image is output. When 006SG302 is displayed, the effect sound (crack effect sound) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a louder volume than the effect sound corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing so, a contrast is created between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the crack pattern is impressed.

[Form 38]
As shown in FIG. 99, as a breaking effect in the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the character voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the displayed character. When output is enabled and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a crack effect sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing this, a sharp contrast is created between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, giving an impression of the crack pattern.

[Form 39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B, G). value (for example, "30%"), the operating speeds of the first size fragment image 006SG302 and the second size fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the first size in the first pattern are different; The second pattern has a variation amount of 0 (for example, "0%"), so that the third size fragment image 006SG302 and the fourth size fragment image smaller than the third size in the second pattern The operating speed is the same as that of 006SG302 (see FIGS. 84 and 85).

By doing this, the first pattern will be affected by the animation differently depending on its size, with the small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and the large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slow and falling quickly, resulting in a cracking pattern that looks realistic. It can be used when you want to show movement, and the second pattern is affected by the animation regardless of the size, as all the objects fly in the same way and fall in the same way, so you can choose an appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene. You can choose.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts, and the display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A and C) and a second pattern (for example, a crack pattern). There are patterns D to F), and the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls differs depending on the setting of the gravity value between the first pattern and the second pattern (see FIGS. 84 and 85). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment images 006SG302 fall, a variety of patterns can be constructed and the interest is improved.

[Form 41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (for example, crack patterns B, G). , the direction of movement of the fragment image 006SG302 when moving and displayed differs depending on the setting of the gravity direction (see FIGS. 84 and 85). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, it is possible to construct a variety of patterns and improve the interest.

[Form 42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern B), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern C). For crack pattern B and crack pattern C, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" in common, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5" for crack pattern A and "5" for crack pattern B. 3'', and the crack pattern C is different from ``7'' (see FIGS. 84 and 85). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302, and by varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, it is possible to create a stable and diverse fragment image 006SG302. Display patterns can be constructed.

[Form 43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E), a second pattern (for example, crack pattern F), and a third pattern (for example, crack pattern G). For example, crack pattern E (first pattern) and crack pattern F (second pattern) have the same first parameter of "gravity" as "0" and crack pattern F and crack pattern G. The second parameter of " is "3" for cracking pattern E and "5" for cracking pattern F, and cracking pattern F (second pattern) and cracking pattern G (third pattern) are The first parameter is "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and the second parameter of "strength" is "5", which is common (see FIGS. 84 and 85). In this way, each pattern has a common part with respect to the fragment image 006SG302 and is configured using different parameters, thereby making it possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 44]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns for the crack image (for example, fragment image 006SG302), and the crack image according to the first pattern is usually The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time saving state, a variable probability state), and the cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state. , the type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer differs after the cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, and before the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern. It is preferable that the type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer differs after the cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern (for example, see FIGS. 56 and 57). . By doing so, it is possible to give different impressions and increase interest when using the crack patterns A to G in the normal state and when using the crack patterns A to G in the special state.

[Form 45]
Background change effect A is a effect that includes displaying a broken image (for example, fragment image 006SG302) in a first mode and then changing it to a second mode, and the image display device 5 displays a normal state and the normal state. In special states (for example, time saving state, variable probability state) that are more advantageous than the above, an effect image (for example, whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed when the broken image is displayed in the first mode, and the broken image is displayed in the first mode. The effect image is hidden at a timing before it is displayed in the second mode (for example, see FIGS. 56 and 57). By doing so, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the first display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The cracking effect pattern (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301 breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern. Here, the cracking effect of the first pattern can be executed in a normal state, and the breaking effect of the second pattern can be executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed by the two patterns of cracking effects may be displayed in a manner that they move in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction. Furthermore, the speed of movement may be different between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of cracking effect. By doing this, the performance effect during the time saving state or the variable probability state can be enhanced by using a cracking pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time saving state or the variable probability state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 72 to 82, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect. The cracking effect pattern (crack pattern of glass plate image 006SG301A) in effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect is that once a crack is displayed on glass plate image 006SG301, then the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. A first pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of 006SG301 breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without any cracks being displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301. There is a pattern. Here, the first pattern of cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, the second pattern of breaking effect can be executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state, and when the first pattern of breaking effect is executed, The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be different depending on when the second pattern of cracking effect is executed. By doing this, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled is different depending on the crack pattern, so that the crack pattern can draw more attention.

[Form 48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer (for example, a specific display layer with a higher priority than the predetermined display layer) For example, a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 Special information regarding variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially Overlapping, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is a mode in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is a form in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a lower display layer than the specific display layer is This is a transparent mode that can be recognized (see FIG. 105). In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

[Form 49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a specific display layer (for example, a specific display layer with a higher priority than the predetermined display layer) For example, a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area), and a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 Special information regarding variable display (for example, small patterns) can be displayed in the image drawing area), and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are at least partially The first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 have different display modes, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302. long (see Figure 105). In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable performance.

[Form 50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least in part, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, is better than the second display area over which the movable body 32 overlaps. The display amount is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the display area L2 (see FIG. 105). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least in part, and the first fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is a period in which the movable body 32 overlaps from the first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap. The second fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 moves from the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. It is displayed in a moving manner (see FIG. 105). By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not go into the area where the movable body 32 overlaps makes it possible to recognize that it is broken, and the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps is prepared. By doing so, it is possible to provide a dynamic performance.

[Form 52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (for example, layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), and a special display layer with a higher priority than the specific display layer (for example, layer 10 The movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing it on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302. The operation period of the movable body 32 overlaps at least partially, and even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position where it does not overlap with the display screen, the fragment image 006SG302 continues. (See Figure 105). By doing so, while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed so that the fragment image 006SG302 is not overlooked.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion performance, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (for example, small fragment images 006SG302A), and The type of fragment image 006SG302 takes a shorter period of time to disappear from the display screen than the first type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIGS. 60 and 61). By doing so, the performance effect of the performance using the crack pattern A can be enhanced.

[Form 54]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed in a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before one type of cracked image is displayed and after the first type of cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern. are different, and a display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern. The types of background images displayed are different (see FIGS. 56, 57, and 60 to 62). By doing this, the specific character (for example, character image 006SG305) appears in common in the plurality of crack patterns, so that the degree of attention to the specific character increases.

[Form 55]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. , when displaying a broken image using the first pattern, an effect image (for example, a whiteout image 006SG303) is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a predetermined image is displayed after displaying the first type of broken image 006SG302. When the effect image is hidden at the timing and the broken image is displayed using the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second type of broken image 006SG302 is displayed. The effect image (for example, whiteout image 006SG303) is hidden at a specific timing (see FIGS. 56, 57, and 60 to 62). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the first display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving a sense of discomfort.

[Form 56]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern E) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern A) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of cracked images of the first type are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of cracked images of the second type are displayed in conjunction with the movements of the character image 006SG305. The fragment image 006SG302 of the first type is displayed in such a manner that it moves while changing from the first speed to the second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is Over the display period of the type of fragment image 006SG302, it is displayed in a manner that it moves without a change in speed (see FIGS. 60, 61, 56, and 57). By doing so, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, thereby increasing the presentation effect.

[Form 57]
There are a first pattern (for example, crack pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, crack pattern E) as display patterns of the crack image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), and the first pattern is the display pattern of the character image 006SG305. This is a pattern in which the first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which the second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The degree of expectation of being controlled into a jackpot state is different depending on when the image is displayed and when the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern (see FIGS. 56, 57, 60, and 61). By doing so, expectations for the character image 006SG305 are increased, and interest is increased by drawing attention to the type of crack pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the embodiment described above, the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the first half of the whiteout display period of each effect is all constant (first continuous crack effect, second continuous break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A). , background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, V1 for result notification performance, V0 for strong development performance B and cut-in performance), but this The invention is not limited to this, and as a first modified example, these first continuous cracking effects, second continuous breaking effects, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, and reach suggestion effect are included. , weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. The advancing speed (display speed) in the vertical direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction), and in the direction toward the player (also referred to as the Z-axis direction) may be different.
The degree may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the result notification effect is a fragment image 006SG302A, Fragment image 006SG302B moving at a speed of 0 in the axial direction, a speed of Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 speed in the Z-axis direction, 0 speed in the X-axis direction, 0 speed in the Y-axis direction, In addition to the fragment image 006SG302C that advances in the Z-axis direction at a speed Vz1, the fragment image 006SG302 that advances in two directions among these X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 that advances in three directions. It may have a fragment image 006SG302.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect has a speed of Vx2 in the X-axis direction and a speed of Vx2 in the Y-axis direction. Fragment image 006SG302A moving at a speed of 0 towards the Z-axis direction, a speed of 0 towards the X-axis direction, a speed of Vy2 towards the Y-axis direction, and a speed of 0 towards the Z-axis direction In addition to the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C that moves at a speed of 0 in the X-axis direction, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, these images in the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction Among the axial directions, the fragment image 006SG302 may proceed in two directions, and the fragment image 006SG302 may proceed in three directions.

Note that since moving the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in an enlarged manner, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as an enlarged display speed.

Here, in each production, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that advances only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that advances only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that advances only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in FIG. 95(C) In this modification example 1, unlike the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B, the fragment image 006SG302C is only enlarged and displayed toward the player. It is set longer than image 006SG302B. In other words, in the cracking effect of each effect, by displaying the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A ends when the fragment image 006SG302B is displayed. Since the three-dimensional effect can be continued even after the splitting, the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. , the result notification performance is the performance group X, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, and the cut-in performance is the performance group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the cracking performance of these performance group X and the cracking performance of the performance group Y. Comparing the displayed fragment image 006SG302C, in this modification 1, the traveling speed Vz1 of the fragment image 006SG302C in the presentation group The fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group Y is set to have a longer period from the start of display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302C in the effect group X, for example, by setting the display speed to be high (Vz1>Vz2). Therefore, in the present modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification. By being able to execute the background change performance A and the strong development performance B at different timings, it is possible to make the player pay attention to these performances at various timings, thereby giving surprise to the player. , since the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to be hidden is different between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, the same broken effect is executed to display the fragment image 006SG302. Even in the case of a presentation, it is possible to give suitably different impressions to the player depending on the presentation, so that the interest in the game can be increased.

In particular, in this modification example 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to require a longer period of time to hide the fragment image 006SG302C than the effects included in effect group X. When the cracking effect is executed as the included effect, the effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced more than when the breaking effect is executed as the effect included in the effect group X.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is moved and displayed (enlarged) toward the player as the fragment image 006SG302 of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is provided, but the present invention is directed to this. However, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved and displayed toward the player (enlarged display) changes as it is enlarged and displayed from the display start timing to the display end timing. You can also do this. By doing so, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , Comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect. , as shown in FIG. 95(C), the fragment image 006SG302C is set to have a longer period from display start to display end than the fragment image 006SG302A and the fragment image 006SG302B. The period from the start of display to the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific production (for example, a cut-in production) is not limited to a predetermined production (for example, a pseudo-coupling production) that is different from the specific production. The period may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment images 006SG302A and 006SG302A, B that move only in the X-axis direction and Y-axis direction in the presentation). By doing this, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 is made different between the specific performance and the predetermined performance (in the above example, the cut-in performance and the pseudo continuous performance), and the interest of these specific performance and predetermined performance is increased. can be increased.

In addition, in the embodiment and the present modification 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. , strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by being moved and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and for fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect or background change effect A), all the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Regarding the fragment image 006SG302 that is hidden by completely moving towards the target and displayed as a specific effect (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some of the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed on the image display device 5. While the fragment image 006SG302 may be hidden by being completely moved outside the area, other fragment images 006SG302 may be hidden while being moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. By doing so, it is possible to make the display modes of the fragment image 006SG302 different between the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing the interest of the specific performance and the predetermined performance.

In addition, in this modification example 1, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as each crack effect are displayed moving in multiple directions such as the X-axis direction, Y-axis direction, and Z-axis direction, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the crack effect of the first continuous crack effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second continuous crack effect. . By doing so, it is possible to make a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous breaking effect, thereby increasing the interest.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed as a result of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken as the breaking effect of each effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each The number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect may vary depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 96A, the whiteout display early period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A has a length L1, and is a period that is continuous with the whiteout display early period, The latter period of white-out display in which the white-out image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the first period of white-out display is displayed has a length L2 (L2>L1).

In addition, the fragment image display period is set to a length L3 (L3>L1+L2), which is the period from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A and is longer than the total period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period. It consists of a first fragment image display period and a second fragment image display period that is continuous with the first fragment image display period and has a length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2).

Here, as shown in FIG. 96(B), in the second fragment image display period, more fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than in the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the game interest of the cracking effect. Can be done. Furthermore, in this modification example 2, in the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the white-out image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early white-out display period; In the period that overlaps with the whiteout display period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is equal to the total period of the whiteout display early period and the whiteout display latter period. Since the length is longer than the length (L1+L2), during the first half of the white-out display period, by making the fragmented image 006SG302 invisible to the player, the player may feel uncomfortable with the cracking effect due to the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A. In addition, it is possible to prevent the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragmentation image 006SG302 in the latter half of the whiteout display period, thereby preventing the game enjoyment of the cracking effect from decreasing. There is.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the performance and result notification effect has transparency, while the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the pseudo continuous effect and the weak development effect does not have transparency. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, and a reach effect. The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may all have transparency, or all of them may be transparent. It does not have to have a gender.

(Modification 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 97 as modification example 3, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, and a weak development effect. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effects of , strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect changes as the effect progresses (in this modification example 3) If so, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 is 0 at the display timing of the fragment image 006SG302, T1 (T1>0) at the end timing of the whiteout display period, and T2 (T2>T1) at the end timing of the whiteout display latter period. , T3 (T3>T2) may be set at the timing at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends.By doing this, for example, immediately before the timing at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5. When sufficiently scattered over the display area, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In particular, in this modification example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking. Since the image can be easily recognized through the image 006SG302, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the image displayed as a result of the cracking performance being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this third modification, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect has an example in which the transmittance increases as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may decrease as the effect progresses.

(Modification 4)
Furthermore, in modification example 3, a first continuous cracking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo continuous effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, As the cracking effects of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 98(A) and 98(B) as a fourth modification, the effects to be executed include a first continuous breaking effect, a second continuous breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, Fragment image 006SG302 depending on whether it is background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, or result notification effect. The transmittance of the broken image 006SG302 may be different, or even if the effect is the same, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different depending on the game state (in FIG. 98, the background change effect A and the weak development effect (Illustrating the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 in and).

As shown in FIG. 98, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started as a crack effect, the period of whiteout display ends. This makes the fragment image 006SG302 visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect of the background change effect A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a crack effect of the weak development effect have different transmittances when they are visible to the player. Therefore, even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, it is possible to create a difference in the content of the effect. Therefore, as the breaking effect of the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. It is possible to enhance the production effect between when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a crack production of the weak development production.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98, a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect as background change effect A when executed in a normal state, and a weak development effect when executed in a time saving state or a variable probability state. Even when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect of , the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect as background change effect A when executed in the normal state and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the breaking effect as the background change effect A when executed in the time saving state or the variable probability state. When the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect as a weak development effect when executed, the transmittance in the state where it can be seen by the player is different, so in both cases, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed as a breaking effect. Even if the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the cracking effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, it is possible to make a difference in the effect content even if there is a difference in the effect. It is possible to enhance the production effect when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a crack production in the development production.

(Modification 5)
In addition, in the embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, a breaking effect is executed as a effect within these background change effect A or reach suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, a voice corresponding to the displayed character (for example, a character voice) may also be output. By doing so, it is possible to give contrast to the crack effect between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 99 as modification example 5, when a character voice corresponding to the character is output when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as background change effect A or reach suggestion effect, the output of the character voice is The character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol1 in the example of FIG. 99) so that at least a part of the period and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

In addition, in this modification 5, as shown in FIG. 99, the crack effect sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed has a louder volume than the crack sound output when the crack is displayed. (Vol2 in the example of FIG. 99) may be output. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the crack effect between when the crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, the crack effect can be added as a background change effect A or a reach suggestion effect. The player can get an impression that the performance is executed, that is, that the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance are executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of the cracking performance.

(Modification 6)
In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are shown as examples in which the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed from the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A is moved and displayed until the end of the display. The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of these effects may be rotated in addition to being moved during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display. Furthermore, the number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different depending on which of the effects is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 100 as modification example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the breaking effect of the dialogue preview effect rotates R three times from the start of display to the end of display. However, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effect of background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo-continuous effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, and strong development effect A is larger than R3 from the start of display to the end of display. Fragment image 006SG302, which is rotated a small number of times R2 (R3>2) and displayed as a cracking effect of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, rotates fewer times than R2 from the start of display to the end of display. It is sufficient to rotate R1 (R2>R1) times.

In this way, in this modification 6, even if the timings that can be executed during variable display are different, by having the effect in which the number of rotations from the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display is the same, The combination of the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, the strong Like the combination of development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance, the relevance within each combination of performances increases, so the performance effect within the combination of these performances can be enhanced.

In addition, as described above, in this modification 6, the number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302 differs depending on which effect is the cracking effect, and in particular, for example, the pseudo continuous effect The fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect has a higher number of revolutions from the start of display to the end of the display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the cut-in effect, so the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect are Cracks performed as production, dialogue preview production, background change production A, background change production B, pseudo-continuation production, reach suggestion production, weak development production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, result notification production Variations in presentation can be increased, and the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modification example 6, the first consecutive cracking performance, the second consecutive cracking performance, the dialogue preview performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo continuous performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, and the strong development performance A. , the form in which the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is displayed in rotation has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the rotation of the fragment image 006SG302. When these fragment images 006SG302 reach the first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, and when these fragment images 006SG302 reach the second rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. At least a portion of the background image may be made invisible. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when these fragment images 006SG302 are displayed. Furthermore, as described above, in the case where the presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 are not rotated synchronously. Image 006SG302 may be rotated at a different angle from other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 has the first rotation angle, part of the other fragment images 006SG302 has the rotation angle 2, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect when displaying the fragment image 006SG302. be able to.

(Modification 7)
Further, as the pseudo-continuous effect in the above embodiment, a form in which a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5 and then a crack effect is executed according to the operation of the movable body 32 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 101(A) as modification example 7, as a pseudo continuous effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the crack may be displayed as a crack display period after a preliminary operation period in which the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 101(B), by configuring the crack display period into a crack pre-stage display period and a crack post-stage display period as in the background change effect A of the embodiment, the crack can be displayed in two stages. The cracking effect may be executed after being displayed separately.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo continuous effect may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change effect A of the embodiment. By doing so, even though it is the same that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the pseudo-continuous effect of this modified example 7, they are By making the period until the second stage crack is displayed different between the background change effect A and the pseudo-continuous effect, it is possible to increase the effect patterns until the crack effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect when displayed.

Furthermore, in this modification example 7, like the background change effect A in the embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the character's action and the movement of the movable body 32 operate. In the example shown in FIG. It is also possible to create an effect in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a pre-stage operation period in which the action of 1 and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed. In this case as well, the crack display period in the reach-suggesting performance is composed of a crack-pre-stage display period and a crack-post-stage display period, and the length of the crack-front stage display period in the reach-suggestion performance is set to the background change performance A of the embodiment. The period may be different from the pre-crack display period. By doing so, even though it is the same that the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in two stages in the background change effect A of the embodiment and the reach suggestion effect of this modified example 7, they are By making the period until the second stage crack is displayed different between the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed, and it is possible to increase the effect pattern until the crack effect is executed. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the is displayed.

(Modification 8)
In the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are placed in the layer 4 image drawing area and the layer 5 image drawing area below the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. Although the display form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in the active display area 5F and It may be possible to display it not only in the layer 4 image drawing area below the special figure pending storage display area 5U, but also in the layer image drawing area above the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U.

For example, in this modification example 8, as shown in FIGS. 102 (A1) to (A5), in the background change effect A, the glass plate image 006SG301 is placed in a layer higher than the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. It can be displayed in the image drawing area. In addition, in response to the kicking motion of the character image 006SG305 toward the front, cracks are displayed radially expanding from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301. After being displayed in the previous stage mode (see FIG. 102 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to the crack mode, a part of the crack is displayed in the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U. They can be displayed in a superimposed manner (see FIG. 102 (A3)).

When a part of the crack is displayed in such a way that it overlaps the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U, the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 are displayed. In this case, the visibility of the first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and the active display 006SG103 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this case, execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, so the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 102 (B1) to (B5), in the background change effect B, as explained in the embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 are displayed in the active display area 5F and the special figure hold It is possible to display it in a layer image drawing area lower than the storage display area 5U. In addition, in response to the action of character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right corner of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small crack areas is displayed at the lower left position of glass plate image 006SG301 (Fig. 102 (B1 ), two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed at the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324 in accordance with the movement of the character image 006SG305 to start descending. The appearance of cracks changes stepwise (see FIG. 102 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area that is lower than the active display area 5F and special figure reservation storage display area 5U, if the crack grows and the active display area 5F and special figure reservation Even if it is displayed so as to cover the storage display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U.

Also, even when the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U, the character image 006SG305 is superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U. The effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image drawing area above the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U without being displayed (see FIG. 102 (B3)). Thereafter, an active change effect is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 102 (B4)).

As described above, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the background change effect A that may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure hold memory display area 5U is an active change effect ( By overlapping the execution period with the effect production by the changing character), the execution of the active change production that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is restricted, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked mode, In the background change effect B that does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure hold memory display area 5U, by making it possible to execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103, the crack precursor image can be similarly displayed. Even if the effect is displayed, since the display layer and whether or not the active change effect is executed are different, it is possible to give suitably different impressions and increase the interest in the game. Note that the target of the change effect may be the first pending display 006SG101 or the second pending display.

In addition, in background change effect A, part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U, thereby improving the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure pending memory display area 5U. However, if the display mode of the pending display or active display changes in such a situation, it will be difficult to tell whether the change is due to the change effect or the crack mode, giving the player a sense of distrust. It is preferable that the changing effect can be executed in the background changing effect B in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special figure pending storage display area 5U does not deteriorate even if it becomes a crack mode.

Further, in this modification example 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner in the background change effect A, execution of the active change effect is restricted, but for example, after that, the crack effect is executed and the broken image 006SG302 After scattering and the whiteout image 006SG303 is hidden, the active change effect can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of variation, during reach, etc.). Alternatively, the active change effect may be performed in a simplified manner (for example, in a manner in which the changing character is not displayed and the active display mode is casually changed at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (A3)). In this way, by performing the change effect during a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display becomes difficult to see due to the break effect, the effect of both the break effect and the change effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 9)
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that it will develop into the strong S reach effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plurality of fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the performance are fragment images 006SG342M in a suggestive manner suggesting that any one of multiple types of strong S reach performances A, B, J, and N with different expectations will be executed; 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc. may be included.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 103(A) to (F), the cracking effect is executed in the strong development effect A, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. Before being hidden, a fragment image 006SG342M that suggests that strong S reach effect A or strong S reach effect B will be executed, and a fragment image 006SG342J that suggests that strong S reach effect J will be executed, A fragment image 006SG342N indicating that the strong S reach effect N will be executed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see FIG. 103(G)).

Then, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, only one fragment image 006SG342M is displayed while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden, and if multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed, the strong S It is announced that reach effect A or strong S reach effect B will be executed (see FIGS. 104 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and the fragment image 006SG342J is displayed as a single image while other fragment images 006SG342M are displayed. , 006SG342N is hidden and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent mode are displayed, it is announced that the strong S reach effect J will be executed (see FIGS. 104 (B1) and (B2)), and the fragment images If the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden while 006SG342N is displayed as a single image, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in transparent mode are displayed, it will be announced that the strong S reach effect N will be executed ( (See FIGS. 104 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the relationship between the fragment image in the strong development effect A and the subsequent strong S reach effect, so it is suitable even if the effect displays the fragment image 006SG302. It can give a different impression to the player and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification, the type of strong S reach effect to be executed is indicated by the non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N that display the faces of the types of characters that appear in various strong S reach effects. However, the suggestion mode is not limited to the above one, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image has a mode that allows the type of strong S reach effect to be executed. It may be a fragment image displaying related information such as a reach title name or a background image that can identify the type of production.

Furthermore, if one of the plurality of fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N is displayed while the others are hidden, it is suggested that the type of fragmentation image 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N has been determined to be executed Any one of them may be suggested by displaying it in a large size, displaying it in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Further, the strong S reach effect may be executed with two or more fragment images finally displayed.

(Modification 10)
Further, in the embodiment, a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas. It may also be displayable.

For example, in this modification 10, as shown in FIG. 105, among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the crack pattern F used in the strong development effect A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed on layer 5-1 in a transparent manner. The small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the image drawing area in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area which is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. Further, in this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a crack precursor image is displayed in each of the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the crack timing. Furthermore, as explained in modification example 9, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach effect drawn. It is said to be a mode.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has a character drawn, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area is This is a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area that is lower than the layer 5-2 image drawing area can be recognized. In this way, by displaying the two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display modes in overlapping display periods, it is possible to provide a memorable effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are a first display that is not superimposed on the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the production position. It consists of an area L1 and a second display area L2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line indicating the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the production position, the amount of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 is larger than that of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. . By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be suitably displayed while the movable body 32 overlaps the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, any first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving from the first display area L1 to the second display area L2, while the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 Any second fragment image 006SG302 of the images 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it moves in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. By doing this, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 makes it clear that it is broken, while the fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 is prepared, creating a lively effect. can be provided.

Further, in the embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 imitating a glass plate is applied as an example of the crack precursor image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A crack precursor image imitating an object other than glass may also be applied. Further, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, the transmittance may be displayed at 100% or less than 100%. Further, the crack precursor image may be displayed in a plurality of layered image drawing areas so that crack effects can be produced individually.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as an example of the fragment image, a form in which a glass fragment image 006SG302 imitating a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is a replacement for the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image, can be displayed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed. The broken fragment image may be displayed in part. Further, although the fragment image is displayed in a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed in a lower display layer than the crack precursor image.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the cracking patterns A to G are set as the cracking patterns in the cracking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effect is based on cracking patterns of types other than those described above. may be executable.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, an example was given in which a cracking effect can be executed during execution of an effect such as a preview effect indicating the expectation level of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The breaking effect may be performed independently and separately from other effects other than the breaking effect. In this case, by making the jackpot expectation different depending on the form of the cracking pattern, the breaking performance may be performed as one of the preview performances, or the performance stage, performance mode, and game state may be changed. It may also be performed as a change performance.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the crack effect, the crack starts when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear side to the approximate center position of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and cracking may be started by applying some kind of impact (force) to a predetermined position of the crack precursor image from the front side. Further, the force may be applied to multiple locations on the crack precursor image at a predetermined timing or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the embodiment, depending on the type of preview effect, cracking may start after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a crack mode, or cracking may start suddenly without changing to a crack mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview effect, all crack effects include the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changing to a crack mode. Alternatively, cracking may start suddenly without all the cracking effects changing to the crack mode.

Further, in the embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, the object image (such as a character), decorative pattern, and background image displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. is displayed in the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but is displayed in the second visibility, which is lower in visibility than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked manner, a layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. The various images to be displayed may be displayed with the first visibility without reducing their visibility, and for example, the crack may be displayed in a way that makes it stand out by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the portion representing the crack.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the character image 006SG305 was mainly used as an example of the object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character type may be of a type other than the above. You can. Furthermore, instead of a character, it can be changed to a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, a target, etc. in various ways.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, the cracking effect is divided into cases where cracking is started according to the movement of the object image, cases where cracking is started according to the movement of the movable body 32, and cases where cracking is started according to the movement of the object image and the movable body 32. Although we have exemplified a case in which cracking starts regardless of the movement, and a certain form, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the cracking may be started in all effects depending on the movement of the movable body 32, or the cracking may be started in all effects regardless of the object image or the movement of the movable body 32. In addition, although the movable body 32 as a logo accessory is used as an example of the movable body, a board-side movable body provided elsewhere on the game board 2 may be applied, or a movable body provided on a board other than the game board 2 A frame-side movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3 may be applied. Furthermore, cracking may be started according to the operation of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, when the cracking of the cracking effect is started, the whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image in a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the fragment image 006SG302 is difficult to visually recognize in the period immediately after the start of the effect, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to make it difficult to visually recognize 006SG302.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is made difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at the start of the crack effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 is increased at the start of the cracking effect, that is, by displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in a fade-in manner, the breaking effect can be started. It may be made difficult to visually recognize the fragment image 006SG302 at this time.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and arranged to display the crack in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as an image of the actual crack (changes to the fragment image 006SG302) in the layer 5 image drawing area. Although the form in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the glass plate image 006SG301 is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area. In this case, a fragment image 006SG302 is drawn and placed as an image in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and the glass plate image 006SG301A may not be drawn and placed.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , the form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be displayed in a cracked manner. The transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying the broken image. For example, the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301A to be displayed in a cracked manner is made higher than the transmittance of glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked manner (glass plate image 006SG301 is made a non-transparent image). ), the timing at which a crack is displayed and the timing at which a crack effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, at the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner in the layer 4 image drawing area is hidden, the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked aspect in the layer 5 image drawing area is performed. Although the starting form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display timings of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the cracked form and the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to the cracked form overlap at least in part. You can.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked manner is illustrated as the crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image is The glass plate image 006SG301A displayed instead of the plate image 006SG301 may be an image other than the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 as long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken.

In addition, in the embodiment, the character kicks the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 56), hammers (see FIG. 60), punches ( 62), etc., the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effects of background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and weak development effect are illustrated As a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301, in addition to or in place of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, the background change effect of this embodiment includes background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick, causing the glass plate image 006SG301A to break (it breaks due to the impact of the kick); In addition to background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without any action (see Figure 41), as described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword (the sword The background change effect C (broken by a slash) can be executed, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled can be varied depending on whether or not the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 and the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. good. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of effect patterns in which the glass plate 006SG301A breaks that can be executed as a breaking effect, and it is possible to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , In the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the crack effect as the result notification effect, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed instead of the glass plate image 006SG301. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be displayed instead of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301. The whiteout image 006SG303 may not be displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to break. By doing so, it is possible to increase the sense of speed from when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the form of a crack is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and to provide a powerful and memorable breaking effect.

Furthermore, if the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a crack effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A instead of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the crack mode, the glass plate image 006SG301 in the crack mode itself is broken. It may be displayed as follows. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so when the cracking effect is executed, the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the game This can prevent people from feeling uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A and background change effect B, the fragment image 006SG302 without transparency may be displayed. In particular, if the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when the cracking effect is executed as background change effect A or background change effect B, the display on the image display device 5 until immediately before the cracking effect is executed. A part of the background image displayed in the area may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development performance B, cut-in performance, and result notification performance have been exemplified forms in which the cracking performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first continuous cracking performances and second continuous cracking performances are illustrated. , dialogue preview performance, background change performance A, background change performance B, pseudo continuous performance, reach suggestion performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, strong development performance B, cut-in performance, cracking performance as a performance other than result notification performance may be executable. For example, a jackpot game state that is variable and has a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-probable variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game with a probability variable jackpot C in which the number of rounds is 2) At the timing after the player is notified that the game will be controlled in a variable state), or in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display, a jackpot game state that is highly advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game) A promotion effect that once again announces that the jackpot game state will be controlled in the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A (which is a jackpot with 10 rounds and the number of rounds is 10), or a promotion effect that announces that the jackpot game state will not be controlled because it is in a variable display. After that, a breaking performance may be executed as a revival performance to notify once again that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , When performing a cracking effect as a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the glass plate image are performed after the actions of the character and movable body 32, the display of cracks, etc. Although the form in which the cracking of 006SG301A is performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects can be performed by whiteout without the action of the character or movable body 32 or the display of cracks, etc. A case may be provided in which the image 006SG303 is displayed or the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise due to the execution of the cracking effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are shown as examples in which the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A) are targeted for cracking, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for these cracking effects, an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A may be used as a crack target (for example, the operation promotion image 006SG310 in the case of a cracking effect of a dialogue preview effect or a cut-in effect).

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , In the cracking effects of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 as an image higher than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the broken image 006SG302, Although at least a part of the background image is temporarily made invisible to the player, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be displayed as an image between the image 006SG301A and the background image.

Furthermore, in the embodiment, as the breaking effect of the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the front side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and these cracking effects can be achieved by drawing and arranging the character image in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIGS. 3 and 3). 4), the character may act on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as an ordinary flat image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the strong development effect In the cracking effect, which is a performance that suggests that the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when other performances are executed due to the fact that it is executed like a cut-in production or a cut-in production, the broken image 006SG302 can be viewed stereoscopically. It may also be displayed as a 3D image. By doing this, when performing a strong development effect or a cut-in effect, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as a breaking effect makes the player aware that there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state. Can be done.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo continuous effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A. , the form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effect of strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The fact that the performance itself is executed as such suggests that the rate of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when other performances are executed, and the cracking performance in performances other than these strong development performances and cut-in performances. The moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be made different between the two. By doing this, for example, the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect of a strong development effect or a cut-in effect can be changed to the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, and the background change effect. A, Background change effect B, Pseudo continuous effect, Reach suggestion effect, Weak development effect, By setting the movement display speed slower than the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in the result notification effect, strong development effect or cut-in When the performance is executed, the moving display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 allows the player to recognize that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high.

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect. As the cracking effects of the production, strong development production A, strong development production B, cut-in production, and result notification production, the transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, while as the cracking production of the pseudo continuous production and the weak development production. , the form of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 without transparency has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by itself being executed like a strong development effect or a cut-in effect, other effects can be realized. The presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 is determined by the cracking effect in the effect that suggests that the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when executing , and the breaking effect in effects other than these strong development effects and cut-in effects. It may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state, depending on whether or not the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect is transparent.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state is a non-AT state, the advantageous state is a big bonus, regular bonus, assist time (AT), and the special state is assist time (AT).

Moreover, in the embodiment, by allowing the game ball to enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the starting winning hole or the general winning hole 10. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and it becomes easier to control the jackpot game state in which the game ball enters the winning hole more easily than in the normal state. A time-saving state or a variable probability state may be set as an advantageous state as long as it is a gaming state that is advantageous to a player such as the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Microcomputer 120 for game control CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means,
A performance control means,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The game control means is
Determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the game medium enters the starting region;
Executing variable display of the specific identification information,
Based on the result of the determination, select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns,
when determining the first variation pattern, transmitting a first command to the production control means;
when determining the second variation pattern, transmitting a second command to the production control means;
The performance control means is
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the advantageous state is controlled.
The display means is
It is possible to display cracked images in a specific display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer that has a higher priority than the specific display layer,
The display pattern of the broken image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
an expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the broken image is displayed according to the first pattern; and an expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state when the broken image is displayed according to the second pattern; are different,
After being notified that the specific reach will control the advantageous state, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display corresponding to the advantageous state to be controlled,
displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach;
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the title display part,
In the introduction part, the gaming machine controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the introduction part.

Images